JP2019069396A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase game amusement.SOLUTION: A time-shortened game includes: a low probability time-shortened mode in which a probability to be a big winning is a normal first probability; and a high probability time-shortened mode in which a probability to be a big winning is a second probability higher than the first probability. When the time-shortened game is completed, a game state is a normal state of a low probability low base in the low probability time-shortened mode, and a game state is a latent probability variation state of a high probability low base in which a probability variation is latent that apparently is difficult to distinguish from the normal state in the high probability time-shortened mode. When a predetermined condition is satisfied after the time-shortened game is completed, a game state suggestive performance that suggests whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent probability variation state is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 105

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing display effects using a display device triggered by winning of a gaming ball in a starting opening (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform display effects using a character image, a symbol or the like.

JP, 2016-202930, A JP, 2016-198339, A JP, 2016-182376, A

  However, even with the above-described gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to improve the interest of a game.

  The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application example. In addition, the reference numerals in the parentheses in the column, the supplementary explanation, and the like indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to aid the understanding of the present invention, and the present invention is not limited at all. .

Application Example 1
A big hit game execution that executes a big hit game when the symbol displayed variably displayed by the display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects, the symbol display means capable of displaying the variable display of symbols, and the symbol display means A gaming machine comprising: means and a time change game changing means for changing a gaming state after a big hit game executed by the big hit game execution means to a time saving game, wherein the time saving game is the big hit There is a low probability time which is usually the first probability and a high probability time which is the second probability higher than the first probability, and when the time saving game is over, the gaming state is the low probability time Is a low probability low base normal state, and in the high probability time short, the gaming state is a high probability low base latent probability change state in which a probability change which is apparently not distinguishable from the normal state is latent, the display means Multiple It is possible to execute the first effect display as one effect display of the effect display, and the first effect display indicates that the current gaming state is the normal state when the predetermined condition is satisfied after the short time game is over. A gaming machine characterized by performing a gaming state suggestive effect that suggests whether it is a latent change of state or not.

Application Example 2
The establishment of the predetermined condition is when the variable display of the symbol is performed a predetermined number of times by the symbol display means, and the display means executes the second effect display as one effect display of the plurality of effect displays. The second effect display is characterized in that the second effect display performs a countdown display for each fluctuation of the symbol until the fluctuation display of the symbol reaches a predetermined number of times after the short time game is ended. The gaming machine described in.

Application Example 3
The display means can execute a third effect display as one effect display among the plurality of effect displays, and the third effect display is an effect display for displaying a specific image that changes according to an effect mode The gaming state suggestion effect is whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent probability state by making the display mode of the specific image different depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the latent probability change state The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 1 and 2 which suggests that:

Application Example 4
The display means can execute a fourth effect display as one effect display among the plurality of effect displays, and the fourth effect display is an effect to be performed during a big hit game execution by the big hit game execution means Displaying a plurality of selection images suggesting the gaming state after the jackpot game and suggesting the expectation of the gaming state after the jackpot game by the selected image selected from among the plurality of selected images; The gaming machine according to any one of application examples 1 to 3 characterized by the above.

Application Example 5
The player is provided with an effect button operable, and the display means can execute the fifth effect display as one effect display among the plurality of effect displays, and the fifth effect display performs the jackpot game execution It is an effect display performed during execution of a big hit game by means, and displays a plurality of characters selectable by the player, and the button having a different operation of the effect button according to the character selected from among the plurality of characters The gaming machine according to any one of application examples 1 to 4, characterized in that an effect is performed, and a game state after the jackpot game is suggested after the end of the button effect.

  According to the present invention, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is an enlarged view of indicators. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution by the side of the main control board of a game machine. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on a sub control board side of the gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating main ROM and main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating sub ROM and sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating the various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating determination tables T1-T4. It is an explanatory view of jackpot type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-time-short state. It is explanatory drawing of fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of electric cho open | release pattern determination table T7. It is explanatory drawing of a big winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of V opening-and-closing member open pattern judging table T9. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. It is a flowchart of main side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a starting opening sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of the special figure 1 prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of normal operation processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of jackpot determination processing. It is a 1st flow chart of change pattern selection processing. It is a 2nd flow chart of change pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol variation. It is a flowchart of special symbol decision processing. 6 is a flowchart of gaming state management processing. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of special electric role processing. It is a flow chart of V opening and closing member operation processing. It is a flow chart of game state setting processing. It is a flow chart of V field sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of holding ball number processing. It is a flowchart which shows sub control main processing. It is a flowchart of sub side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of pre-reading production decision processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a prior determination information storage area. It is explanatory drawing of pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flow chart of change production start processing. It is an explanatory view of main production pattern decision table T52. It is explanatory drawing of a chance improvement presentation pattern determination table T53. It is a flow chart of processing during change production. It is a flowchart of display control processing. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the state which the 1st movable actor 14 moves. It is an explanatory view which illustrated the 2nd mode of the 1st movable character item 14. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view exemplifying a first display effect of the first movable role item 14; FIG. 18 is an explanatory view exemplifying a second display effect of the first movable role item 14; It is an explanatory view which illustrated the display production of a light guide plate. It is an explanatory view which illustrated the 2nd mode of the 2nd movable character item 15. As shown in FIG. It is an explanatory view which illustrated the 2nd mode of the 3rd movable character item 18. It is a figure for demonstrating next timer value display production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating next timer value display production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the following timer value display production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating next timer value display production D. FIG. It is a figure for explaining timer indication frequency suggestion production A. It is a figure for demonstrating timer indication frequency suggestion production B. It is a figure for demonstrating timer indication frequency suggestion production C. It is a figure for demonstrating timer presentation frequency | count frequency suggestion production D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating timer count presentation A. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing timer count effect B. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing timer count effect C. FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram for describing timer count effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating timer presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating timer presentation B. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing timer effect C. FIG. 17 is a diagram for describing timer effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating image transparent display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the image permeation | transmission display effect B. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing an image transmission display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the image permeation | transmission display effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating image combination production A. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing an image combination effect B. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing an image combination effect C. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing an image combination effect D. It is a figure for explaining interlocking production A. It is a figure for explaining interlocking production B. It is a figure for explaining interlocking production C. It is a figure for explaining interlocking production D. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | removing icon image matching presentation A. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a pending icon image matching effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding icon image matching production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding icon image matching production D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating movable role thing impact production A. It is a figure for demonstrating movable role thing impact production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating movable role thing impact production C. It is a figure for demonstrating movable role thing impact production D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding display production A. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a pending display effect B. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing hold display effect C. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a hold display effect D. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining zone effect A. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining zone effect B. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining zone effect C. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining zone effect D. It is a figure for explaining cut-in effect A. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a cut-in effect B. FIG. 34 is a diagram for describing a cut-in effect C. Fig. 34 is a diagram for describing a cut-in effect D. It is a figure for explaining decoration symbol fluctuation display production A. It is a figure for demonstrating decoration symbol variation display production B. [FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram for describing a decorative symbol variation display effect C. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a decorative symbol variation display effect D. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a game state suggestion effect A. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a game state suggestion effect B. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a game state suggestion effect C. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a game state suggestion effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating meter presentation A. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a meter effect B. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a meter effect C. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a meter effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating related image display production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating related image display production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating related image display production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating related image display production D. FIG. It is a figure for explaining battle production A. It is a figure for demonstrating battle production B. FIG. It is a figure for explaining battle production C. It is a figure for demonstrating battle production D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the crack production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the crack production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the crack production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the crack production D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating meter button production A. FIG. It is a figure for explaining meter button production B. It is a figure for explaining meter and button production C. FIG. 17 is a diagram for describing a meter / button effect D.

First Embodiment
1. Structure of gaming machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described in agreement with the left-right direction as viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1. Further, the forward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the backward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player to the gaming machine 1.

  The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that causes a game ball to be fired based on a player's firing operation, and when the game ball is won in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player is there. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50. In addition to the front frame (front frame portion) 53, the gaming machine frame 50 includes an outer frame (base frame portion) which forms an outer shell portion of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached Have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertical rectangular unit disposed on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and the handle 60, the ball striking plate supply plate (upper plate) 61, and the surplus ball tray (lower plate ), A presentation button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a frame movable body 600. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the light guide plate 17 is disposed in the opening. The light guide plate 17 is a transparent flat plate member, and can visually recognize the game area 3 of the game board 2 through the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 is configured to be able to display an image on the main surface by being irradiated with light from the end face of the light guide plate 17. The image displayed by the light guide plate 17 will be described later.

  The handle 60 is disposed at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and causes the game ball to be fired with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. A hit ball supply tray (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53, and stores gaming balls. The surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 is disposed below the ball hitting supply plate (upper plate) 61, and stores gaming balls that can not be accommodated in the ball hitting supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit disposed in the vicinity of the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of an effect or the like to be executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation unit that simulates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of an effect or the like that is executed along with the progress of the game. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, at the end of the handle of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of presentation etc. executed as the game progresses. Ru. The sword member 64 is configured to be capable of performing two different operations of a first operation for pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation for pushing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is disposed around the opening of the front frame 53, and performs a light emission effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are disposed on the upper left and the upper right of the front frame 53, and provide sound effects during a game or the like. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the top of the front frame 53. The movable frame 600 is configured to be displaceable from the stored state stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state projecting above the front frame 53.

  The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration 10, a fixed winning device (heso) 19, and a normally variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , A gate (through chucker) 28, a first big prize device (first attacker) 31, a second big prize device (second attacker) 36, a general winning opening 27 (normal winning opening 27), and a general winning A mouth 29 (normal winning opening 29), an out mouth 16 and indicators 40 are provided.

  The game area 3 is an area where game balls fired by the operation of the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game balls are provided in a protruding manner. The rail member 4 is disposed at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game balls fired by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is disposed on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3.

  The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a first image display device 7A and a second image display device 7B. The first image display device 7A includes a display screen 7a. The second image display device 7B includes a display screen 7b. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screens 7a and 7b of the image display device 7 have a first effect symbol display area in which effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, A second effect design display area in which another decorative design different from 8C and 8R is variably displayed, a hold image display area in which the hold images 9A and 9B are displayed, and a hold digest image display in which the hold digest image 9C is displayed And an area. The holding images 9A and 9B are images representing holding, and are also referred to as holding icons 9A and 9B. The reserve digest image 9C is an image representing the reserve, and is also referred to as the reserve image 9C or the reserve icon 9C. The hold icons 9A and 9B and the hold icon 9C are collectively referred to simply as a hold icon.

  The first effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". In the left symbol display area, a left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L is displayed. A middle effect pattern (middle decoration pattern) 8C is displayed in the middle symbol display area. A right effect design (right decoration pattern) 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are constituted by a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The variation display of the rendering symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 is a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b described later by a combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (the jackpot lottery result) can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  For example, when the jackpot is won, the production symbols are stopped and displayed with a target such as "777". In the case of an out of place, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed with a loose eye such as "637". This makes it easy for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display 7 in addition to the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b. The position of the symbol display area may not be fixed. Moreover, as an aspect of the variation display of the effect pattern, it may be an aspect of scrolling in the vertical direction, or may be an aspect other than that. It is not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set as to which combination of effect symbols is to be stopped and displayed according to each lottery result. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is also referred to as "change effect of effect symbol", "change effect of decorative symbol", or simply "change effect". In addition, this variation design of the decorative symbol counts the production in a period (also referred to as a special symbol variation period) from the start of the variation of the special symbol until the stop thereof as one variation production (one cycle of variation production). Therefore, even if there is a case where the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in a period from when the special symbol starts to change until it stops, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the change effect of the decorative symbol.

  The second effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect design (left decoration pattern) not shown is displayed in the left symbol display area. In the middle symbol display area, a middle effect symbol (middle decorative symbol) not shown is displayed. A right effect design (right decoration pattern) not shown is displayed in the right symbol display area. The effect pattern displayed in the second effect pattern display area is the same as the effect pattern 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first effect pattern display area, and is smaller than the decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R Is displayed.

  The image display device 7 can display on the display screens 7a and 7b a jackpot effect performed in parallel to the jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demonstration effect for waiting for customers, etc. in addition to the effect symbol variation effect . In the effect pattern variation effect, in addition to the effect pattern, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Also, the image display device 7 can indicate that the special symbol is changing or can indicate the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (the fourth symbol, not shown) May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

  The hold image display area displays a hold image 9B according to the first hold display area for displaying the hold image 9A according to the number of memories of the first special figure hold described later and the number of memories for the second special view hold described later. And a second reserved display area. By the display of the reserve images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special view reserve displayed on the first special view reserve display 43a described later and the second special view reserve displayed on the second special view reserve display 43b The memory number of can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. The reserve digest image display area includes a reserve digest display area for displaying the reserve digest image 9C. The reserve digest image 9C corresponds to the effect pattern (effect pattern 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and the first special view reserve or the first one is displayed by the display of the reserve digest image 9C. [2] It can be displayed intelligibly for the player that the special figure reserve is digested ("special figure reserve digest" described later).

  In front of the image display device 7, a movable first panel movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable role object 14), which is a movable type so-called gimmick, is provided. In the first movable part 14, four plate-like members (movable light guide plates) are configured to be movable in an oblique direction. The first movable part 14 normally stands still at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) at the four corners of the display device 7, and moves (advances) diagonally from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a and advances It can be stationary in position (FIG. 47). The first movable part 14 covers almost the entire image display 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

  The center decoration 10 is disposed near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. A movable second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable role article 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is attached to the center decoration 10. Further, on the back surface of the center decoration 10, a third board movable body 18 (third movable character 18) not shown is disposed. At the lower part of the center decorative body 10, a stage portion 11 is formed. The stage unit 11 has a shape capable of guiding a gaming ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage unit 11 to a first starting opening 20 described later. A warp unit 12 is provided on the lower left side of the center decoration 10. The warp unit 12 includes an inlet where the gaming balls flow in and an outlet where the gaming balls flow out, and the gaming balls having flowed in from the inlet flow out to the stage 11 from the outlet.

  The fixed winning device (Heso) 19 is disposed below the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3 and the first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first entering ball) in which the ease of entering the gaming ball does not always change The mouth, the fixed start mouth) 20 is provided. The winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 20 is the trigger of the lottery of the first special symbol (big hit lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 20 is a trigger for obtaining a jackpot random number and the like, a jackpot determination, and the like.

  The normally variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is disposed below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3 and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entrance, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 21 is a trigger for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). The electric chow 22 includes the movable member 23 in front of the second start port 21, and opens and closes the second start port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by a power chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). The game ball can enter the second starting opening 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state. The electric chew 22 is only required to easily enter the second start opening 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. Entry into the ball may be possible.

  The gate (through chucker) 28 is disposed above the first big prize device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3 and is configured to allow passage of the game ball. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger of the normal symbol lottery which determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is opened. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for the acquisition of the normal symbol random number (the random number per hit) and the hit determination or the like.

  Here, with "lottery of special symbol", when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21, a random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and this acquired random number is determined in advance. It is the processing which judges whether it is a big hit by comparing with the value corresponding to "big hit". The lottery result of the "big hit" is not immediately notified to the player, but the variation display of the special symbol is performed in the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b described later, and the predetermined fluctuation is made. When the time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game in which the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol is performed, and the lottery result of the big hit is notified to the player more effectively by this symbol matching game.

  In addition, when the game ball passes the gate 28, “random symbol lottery” acquires a random number for ordinary symbol determination, and compares the acquired random number with a value corresponding to a predetermined “hit”. It is a process of determining whether or not a hit is made. Also about the lottery result of this normal symbol, the game ball does not just pass the gate 28 and the lottery result is not notified immediately, but the variation display of the normal symbol is performed in the ordinary symbol indicator 42 to be described later When the time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (turned on or off), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

  The first big prize device (the first attacker, the first special variable prize device) 31 is disposed on the upper right of the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and the first big prize port (the first special prize port) 30 , V region 39, non-V region 70, and V opening and closing member 71. The first large winning opening 30 is provided with an opening / closing member (first special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 which permits or inhibits the reception of the game ball by the swing type opening / closing operation. The opening and closing member 32 is driven by the first big winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). In the first large winning opening 30, when the opening and closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball can enter.

  The first big winning device 31 includes a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (nonspecific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). The first big winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), the V opening and closing member 71, and the V opening and closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured as areas through which gaming balls having passed the first large winning opening 30 can pass inside the first large winning device 31 . The first large winning opening sensor 30a is disposed upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects a winning of the gaming ball to the first large winning opening 30. The V area sensor 39a is disposed in the V area 39 and detects the passage of the gaming ball to the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70 a is disposed in the non-V area 70 and detects the passage of gaming balls to the non-V area 70. The V opening and closing member 71 distributes the gaming balls having passed through the first big winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V open / close member solenoid 73 drives the V open / close member 71. The V opening and closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening and closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to In the first state (rotational state) distributed to the V area 39, when the V open / close member solenoid 73 is not energized, the second state (stop state) is positioned at the origin and distributes the gaming ball to the non-V area 70. . The V opening and closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, as long as it has a function of distributing gaming balls having passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70, for example, You may comprise so that it may move with respect to the game board 2 in the left-right direction. That is, when the V open / close member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is in the retracted state (first state) for distributing the gaming ball to the V area 39. When the V open / close member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed for non-V area 70 It may be configured to be (second state). In the gaming machine 1, passage of the gaming ball to the V area 39 is a trigger for transition to a high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a positive operating hole. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 does not serve as a positive change operation opening. The first big prize device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first big prize device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of gaming balls discharged from the first big prize device 31. The first winning device ejection sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of gaming balls having passed the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

  The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is disposed on the upper right of the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and a second big winning opening (second special winning opening) 35 Is equipped. The second big winning opening 35 is provided with an opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 which inhibits or allows the reception of the game ball by the swing type opening / closing operation. The opening and closing member 37 is driven by the second big winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). The game ball can enter the second large winning opening 35 when the opening and closing member 37 is in the open state.

The general winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The out port 16 is provided at the lower part of the game area 3 and discharges the game balls, which have not been won in any winning port, out of the game area 3. The indicator 40 is disposed near the center of the right side of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later.
The general winning opening 29 is located at the lower right of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right of the first large winning opening 30.

  The game area 3 has a left game area 3A on the left side and a right game area 3B on the right side from the center in the left-right direction. A method of hitting the game ball so that the game ball flows down is referred to as "left-hand strike". On the other hand, how to hit the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called "right-handed". In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for a winning to the first starting opening 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured such that winning to the gate 28, passing to the gate 28, the second starting opening 21, the first large winning opening 30, and the second large winning opening 35 can be aimed at right-handed.

  FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the displays 40. The displays 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, an ordinary symbol display 42, a first special view reserve display 43a, and a second special view reserve display 43b. , And a general drawing reserve display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41 b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays an ordinary symbol. The first special view hold display 43a displays the number of stored operation reserve (first special view hold) of the first special symbol display 41a. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of storage of the operation reserve (the 2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special symbol indicator 41b. The common drawing reserve display 44 displays the number of stored operation reserve (general drawing reserved) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 21. In the following, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbol". In addition, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Also, the first special view hold indicator 43a and the second special view hold indicator 43b are collectively referred to as a "special view hold indicator 43".

  The special symbol display 41 variably displays (varying display) the special symbol (identification information) and then stops it to display a lottery based on the winning of the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 (a special symbol drawing lottery , Announce the result of the jackpot lottery). The special symbols (stop symbols, special symbols derived and displayed as display results of variable display) to be stopped and displayed are one special symbol selected from among a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol lottery. When the stop symbol is a special symbol (big hit symbol) of a predetermined big hit stop mode, the first big winning opening 30 with an open pattern according to the type of the displayed big hit symbol (type of big hit winning) displayed. Alternatively, a special game (big hit game) for opening the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the special winning opening (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and the special symbol according to the result of the lottery per special symbol is displayed according to the lighting mode. For example, when a jackpot (one of a plurality of types of jackpots described later) is won, “○○ ●● ○○ ●●” (○: on, ●: off) and so on from the left 1, 2 , 5,6 display the jackpot symbol that the LED lights up. In the case of a loss, a loss design in which only the LED at the rightmost side is lit, such as "●●●●●●● ○", is displayed. You may employ | adopt the aspect which makes all the LED light-extinguish as a lost design. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display (variable display) of the special symbol is made over a predetermined variation time. In the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may be lighted so that light repeatedly flows from the left to the right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not displayed for stopping (lighting display in a specific mode), and can be any lighting mode. For example, in the variation display mode, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine 1, when there is a winning (entering) of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers obtained for the winning are , And is temporarily stored in the special-image storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a winning to the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special view reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as a first special view reservation, and if it is a winning to the second starting opening 21 , And is stored in the second special view reserve storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as a second special view reserve. There is an upper limit to the number of special view reservations that can be stored in each special view reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is both the first special view reservation storage area 85a and the second special view reservation storage area 85b. It is four. The special figure reservation stored in the special view reservation storage area 85 is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special view reservation becomes possible. "Digestion of special figure reservation" means that a jackpot random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation is determined, and variable display of a special symbol for showing the determination result is performed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 can not be made immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. Even if there is a prize during the middle game or during the execution of the special game, it is possible to reserve the right of the jackpot lottery for the prize, with the predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of special feature reservations is displayed on the special feature reservation display 43. The first special view hold indicator 43a and the second special view hold indicator 43b are each configured of, for example, four LEDs. Each special feature reservation display 43 displays the number of special feature reservations by lighting the LEDs for the number of special feature reservations.

  The variable display of the normal symbol is triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbol display device 42 displays the normal symbol variably (variable display) and then displays it in a stop to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbols stop-displayed (a common figure stop symbol, a normal symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) are one normal symbol selected from among a plurality of types of normal symbols by normal symbol lottery. In the case where the common figure stop symbol is a predetermined specified normal symbol (a normal symbol in a predetermined stop mode, ie, a normal hit symbol), an auxiliary game for opening the second starting opening 21 in the opening pattern according to the current gaming state. Is done. The opening pattern of the second start port 21 will be described later.

  The normal symbol display device 42 is configured of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode. For example, when the lottery result is a hit, a normal hit symbol with both LEDs turned on is displayed as "○○" ((: on, ●: off). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss symbol in which only the right LED is lit is displayed as "● ○". You may employ | adopt the aspect which makes all the LED light-extinguish as normal loss design. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable symbol of the normal symbol is displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time. In the aspect of the variable display, for example, both LEDs may light alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not displayed for stopping (lighting display in a specific mode), and can be any lighting mode. For example, in the variation display mode, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine 1, when there is a passage of the game ball to the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (per random number) acquired for the passage is held as a common drawing reservation in the common drawing reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 5) It is memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of common drawing reservations that can be stored in the common drawing reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit in this embodiment is four. The general drawing reservation stored in the common drawing reservation storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the common drawing reservation becomes possible. Digestion of a common drawing reserve refers to determination of a normal symbol random number (hit random number) corresponding to the common drawing reserve, and execution of variable display of a normal symbol to indicate the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 can not be made immediately after the passage, that is, winning is performed during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the auxiliary game. Even in the case where there is a certain number, the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage can be reserved with the predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of common drawing reservations is displayed on the common drawing reservation display 44. The general drawing hold display 44 is constituted of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common drawing holdings by lighting the LEDs by the number of general drawing holdings.

2. Electrical Configuration of Game Machine The electrical configuration of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 4). 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that performs control relating to the game profit such as the jackpot lottery and the transition of the game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub control board 90 is an effect control board that performs control regarding effects to be executed with the progress of the game, and constitutes a sub control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as at least the sub control substrate 90 is provided.

  The main control board 80 is provided with a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 stores a main ROM 83 storing a program for controlling the progress of a game, a main RAM 84 used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 executing a program stored in the main ROM 83. It contains. Details of data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be incorporated in the game control microcomputer 81.

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from the sensors and outputs signals to the solenoids. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the first start opening sensor 20a, the second start opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, and the V region A sensor 39a, a non-V area sensor 70a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a, 29a are illustrated. As the solenoids connected via the relay substrate 88, the electric chew solenoid 24, the first large winning opening solenoid 33, the second large winning opening solenoid 38, and the V open / close member solenoid 73 are exemplified. The first starting opening sensor 20 a is provided in the inside of the first starting opening 20, and detects a game ball winning the first starting opening 20. The second starting opening sensor 21 a is provided inside the second starting opening 21 and detects a gaming ball that has won a prize in the second starting opening 21. The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects the gaming ball having passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects gaming balls that have won the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball winning in the second large winning opening 35. The V area sensor 39a is provided in the V area 39 in the inside of the first big winning opening 30, and detects gaming balls that have passed through the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big winning opening 30, and detects gaming balls having passed through the non-V area 70. The normal winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the normal winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won the normal winning opening 27. The normal winning opening sensor 29a detects the gaming ball that has passed through the inside of the normal winning opening 29. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first large winning opening solenoid 33 drives the open / close member 32 of the first large winning device 31. The second large winning opening solenoid 38 drives the open / close member 37 of the second large winning device 36. The V open / close member solenoid 73 drives the V open / close member 71 of the first big winning device 31.

  Indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 has a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special view hold indicator 43a, a second special view hold indicator 43b, a general drawing hold Display control of the display 44 is performed.

  A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives a signal from the payout control board 110 for dispensing monitoring. The payout control substrate 110 is connected to the winning ball dispenser 120, the rental ball dispenser 130, and the card unit 135, and the launcher 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball dispensing device 120 dispenses a prize ball. The payout control board 110 drives the winning ball motor 121 of the winning ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the winning balls. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 pays out the rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the rental ball motor 131 of the rental ball payout device 130 based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out the rental balls. The lent balls to be paid out are detected by the lent ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is disposed adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information related to the ball lending based on the information such as the inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launch motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launch volume 115. The launch device 112 detects a touch of the handle 60 by the touch switch 114 when the player operates the handle 60, and detects an amount of rotation of the handle 60 by the launch volume 115. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven so that the gaming ball is fired with a strength according to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

  A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection in which only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 is possible. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90, a not-shown unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) as a communication direction control means is interposed.

  The sub control board 90 includes a presentation control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 for storing a program for controlling effects as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub for executing the programs stored in the sub ROM 93. And the CPU 92. Details of data stored in sub ROM 93 and details of storage areas provided in sub RAM 94 will be described later. Sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another substrate via the input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 91. An image control board 100, an audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input / output circuit 95.

  The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and performs display control of the image display 7 (the first image display 7A and the second image display 7B) according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In the ROM 103, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. Image data such as a background image etc. is stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes a program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to perform display control of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on an instruction from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

  The speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, sound effects from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. And so on. Sound data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may mount a ROM, and may store sound data in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to execute voice control. Furthermore, sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

  A frame lamp 66, a board lamp 5, a first movable character 14, a second movable character 15, and a third movable character 18 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled Do. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (also referred to as data for determining lighting / extinguishing, light emission color, etc., lamp data) for determining the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5. The light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control substrate 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The frame lamp 66 includes an LED for emitting light to the end face of the light guide plate 17. By emitting the LED, an image is displayed on the main surface (image display area) of the light guide plate 17. Moreover, the board | plate lamp 5 contains LED which irradiates light to the end surface of the movable light-guide plate of the 1st movable character article 14, By making this LED emit light, it is on the main surface (image display area) of a movable light-guide plate. Display the image. Based on the command received from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable combination 14, the second movable combination 15, and the third movable combination 18. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of each of the first movable character 14, the second movable character 15, and the third movable character 18; Control the movement of these movable parts according to. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and may have the CPU execute lamp lighting control based on a command and operation control of the movable roles 14, 15, 18. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data on the light emission pattern and the operation pattern.

  The effect button detection switch 63 a and the frame movable body 600 are connected to the relay substrate 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63 a to the sub control substrate 90 via the relay substrate 108. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the top of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the frame movable body 600, and controls the operation of the frame movable body 600 according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create operation pattern data. The relay substrate 108 is provided with a select button detection switch for detecting that the select button 68 (FIG. 1) has been pressed, a touch sensor provided on the front frame 53 and outputting a detection signal when a human body comes in contact It may be connected.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described based on FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. As shown in FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for describing a table stored in sub ROM 93. Referring to FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in sub RAM 94. Referring to FIG.

  In the main ROM 83 (FIG. 5A), a big hit determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a big hit type determination table T5, a variation pattern A determination table T6, a power chew open pattern determination table T7, a special winning opening open pattern determination table T8, and a V open / close member open pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific content of each determination table will be described later.

  The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special view reserve storage area 85, and a common view reserve storage An area 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command output from the main control unit to the sub control unit in the main control main process (described later) is set (output buffer). A change start command, a change stop command, an opening command, a round specification command, an ending command, a game state specification command, a V passage command, a customer wait standby command, etc. are set. The flag setting area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the gaming machine or the gaming state is set in the main control main process (described later), and the jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first winning flag, second winning flag, The V flag, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter setting area 84c is an area where a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set. The special operation status set area 84 d is an area in which the status in the special operation process described later is set. Special feature reserve storage area 85 includes a first special feature reserve storage area 85a in which a first special feature reserve is stored, and a second special feature reserve storage area 85b in which a second special feature reserve is stored. In the first special view reserve storage area 85a, a random number value group (reserve information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to each of the first, second, third and fourth special reserve for the first special figure reserve. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storing are provided. A first special-image retention storage area 85b is used to store a first random number group (retention information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth second special-image retentions. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The common drawing reservation storage area 86 stores a random number value group (holding information) such as a common symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to each of the first, second, third and fourth common drawing reservations. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In the main RAM 84, in addition to the above areas, a hit type set buffer to which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable objects 14 and 15 and the frame movable body 600 are set. Drive data buffer etc. are provided.

  The sub ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51, a core effect pattern determination table T52, a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in sub control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific content of each determination table will be described later.

  The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, a rendering command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which a command input from the main control unit side is stored in the sub control main process (described later), and the a priori determination command, the hold ball number command, the change start command, and the change A stop command, an opening command, a round designating command, an ending command, a game state designating command, a V passing command, a customer waiting standby command and the like are stored. The effect command set area 94 b is an area where commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in sub control main processing (described later) An output buffer), and a change production start command, a change end command, a change production end command, an opening production start command, a round production start command, an ending production start command, etc. are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in the sub control main process (described later). The counter setting area 94d is an area where counters used in sub control main processing (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a first special view hold effect counter, a second special view hold effect counter, and a common view hold effect counter A probability variation effect counter, a time reduction effect counter, etc. are set.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7A shows the random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows the random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. There is. The gaming control microcomputer 81 acquires “big hit random number”, “big hit type random number”, “reach random number”, “variation pattern random number”, and “normal symbol random number (hit random number)” at a timing described later. Is configured as. The “big hit random number” is a random number used for a lottery for deciding whether or not a big hit (big hit determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The “big hit type random number” is a random number used for lottery of the type of the big hit that has won (big hit type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether to generate a reach in the effect design variation effect indicating the result when the big hit determination is a loss, and the value in the range of 0 to 127 Take The reach is a state in which one of the plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols) that are variably displayed among the effect symbols (decorative symbols) is left, and depending on which symbol the variably displayed effect symbols are stopped and displayed It is a state (for example, the state of "7 7 7") which becomes combination of the production design which shows jackpot winning. In addition, the effect pattern stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including a variation time, and has a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) as to whether or not to play an auxiliary game to open the electric chew 22. Normal symbol random numbers take values in the range of 0-255. The “big hit random number”, the “big hit type random number”, the “reach random number”, and the “variation pattern random number” are acquired based on the entry into the starting opening (the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21). The random number value group acquired based on the entry to the first starting opening 20 is stored in the first special view reservation storage area 85a, and the random number value group acquired based on the entry to the second opening 21 is It is stored in the second special view reserve storage area 85b. The “normal symbol random number (per random number)” is obtained based on the passage of the gate 28. The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the common drawing reserve storage area 86.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire the “pre-read effect random number” and the “chance up random number” at timings described later. "Pre-read effect random number" is a random number used to determine pre-read effect at the time of change effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “chance up random number” is a random number used to determine the chance up performance at the time of the change performance, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 127. The “prediction effect random number” is acquired based on the output of the prior determination command from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The acquired random number value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The “chance up random number” is acquired based on the output of the change start command from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The acquired random value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. 8 (A) shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8 (B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8 (C) shows it. Is a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8 (D) is a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

  The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (one of 0 to 65535) acquired by the gaming control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "big hit" or "losing". It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8A, in the “normal probability state”, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164”, it is determined to be “jackpot”, and the jackpot random number value is “numerical value other than 0 to 164 (165 to 65535 In the case of “)”, it is indicated that it is determined as “lost”. Also, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random number value is "0 to 649", it is determined to be "jackpot", and the jackpot random number value is "numerical value other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)" Is shown to be determined as "loss". The contents of the “normal probability state” and the “high probability state” will be described later.

  In the reach determination table T2, in the main control main process (described later) of the gaming control microcomputer 81, whether the reach random number value (one of 0 to 127) acquired corresponds to "reach" or "reach not". Is a table referenced to determine whether In FIG. 8B, when the reach random number is "0 to 13" in the "non-time-saving state", it is determined that "reach is present", and the reach random value is "numerical value other than 0 to 13 (14 to In the case of “127)”, it is indicated that “no reach” is determined. Further, in the “time saving state”, when the reach random number value is “0 to 5”, it is determined that “reach exists”, and the reach random number value is “numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)”. Is shown to be determined as "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, in the time saving state, the reach at the time of losing is less likely to be applied than in the non-time saving state. This is to speed up the speed of digesting the Tokusou reserve by selecting more reachless losses with short fluctuation time in the short time state.

  The normal symbol winning determination table T3 corresponds to whether the normal symbol random number value (one of 0 to 255) acquired by the gaming control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "lost". It is a table referenced to determine whether to In FIG. 8C, in the "non-time-saving state", when the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 2", it is determined as "hit", and the normal symbol random number value is "numerical value other than 0 to 2 (3 In the case of "255", it is shown that it is judged as "lost". Also, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and if the normal symbol random number value is "numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)" It is shown that it is judged as "missing".

  The normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 determines how many seconds the variation period of the normal symbol is in accordance with the gaming state (non-time-short status or time-short status) in the main control main processing (described later). Is a table that is referenced to In (D) of FIG. 8, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be “30 seconds” in the “non-short time state”, and the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be “1 second” in the “time reduction state”. It is shown.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. In the jackpot type determination table T5, according to the jackpot type random number value (one of 0 to 127) acquired by the gaming control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), "class of jackpot" and "special symbol of It is a table referenced to determine the type. In FIG. 9, when winning in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery, if the jackpot type random number value is "0 to 24", it is determined that the jackpot type is "16 RV passage planned jackpot", special figure The stop symbol of 1 (special stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "25 to 49", it is determined that the jackpot type is "16 RV passage planned jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 2". When the jackpot type random number value is "50 to 55", it is determined that the jackpot type is "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled to pass through jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (essentially 13R) V scheduled to pass through jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (essentially 13R) V non-scheduled scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery, if the jackpot type random number value is "0 to 82", it is determined that the jackpot type is "16 RV passage planned jackpot", special figure 2 The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (essentially 13R) V non-scheduled scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5". In addition, by referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special view stop symbol, the "opening (OP) command" of the special game, the "round designated command", the "ending (ED) Commands can also be identified. For specific contents of "16 RV passing jackpot", "16R (15R substantial) V passing jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jacking" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" I will mention later.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-short time state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to by the gaming control microcomputer 81 for determining a variation pattern according to the acquired variation pattern random number value (0 to 127) in the main control main process (described later). . In FIG. 10, for example, the first starting opening 20 is won in the non-short time state, and it is determined as "lost" in the big hit determination table T1, and determined as "reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of holding balls is "1. When the variation pattern random number value is “0 to 60”, it is shown that the variation pattern is determined to be “P7”. In FIG. 11, for example, the second start hole 21 wins in a time saving state, is determined as "big hit" in the big hit determination table T1, is determined as "16 RV passing planned big hit" in the big hit type determination table T5, fluctuation pattern random value It is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61" when "is 0 to 10". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. Also, when reaching, it is also determined whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect where the fluctuation time after reach is longer than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) having different fluctuation times are set. In SP1 to 3, it is evolved through normal reach. The difference between SP1 and SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo run.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew release pattern determination table T7. The electric chew open pattern determination table T7 is used by the gaming control microcomputer 81 to determine the open pattern of the electric chew 22 in accordance with the gaming state (non-short time state or short time state) in the main control main process (described later). It is a table to be referenced. In FIG. 12A, the open pattern of the electric chow 22 is determined to be "open pattern 11" in the "non-short time state", and the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 12" in the "time short state". It is shown. The contents of the release pattern 11 and the release pattern 12 are shown in FIG. In the opening pattern 11, the opening operation is performed once and the opening time 0.2 second is released. In the opening pattern 12, the number of times of opening is three, the opening time per one time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second is performed. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains if there is a predetermined number of game ball winnings (prescribed number of winnings, maximum 10).

  FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the special winning opening open pattern determination table T8. In the special winning opening open pattern determination table T8, the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening according to the special view stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main processing (described later) of the gaming control microcomputer 81. It is a table referenced to determine the 35 open patterns. In FIG. 13A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35 is "open pattern 21. When it is determined that the special pattern stop symbol data is "14H", "15H", "22H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 22", and when the special pattern stop symbol data is "13H", it is open. It is shown that the pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23". FIG. 13B shows the contents of the release pattern 21, the release pattern 22 and the release pattern 23. The opening pattern 21 opens the first large winning opening 30 once for opening times 1 to 29.5 seconds (long opening) at opening times 1 to 13 and 15th, and opening times 1 to 14 times for opening 16th. The second big winning opening 35 is opened (long open) with an open time of 29.5 seconds. The opening pattern 22 opens the first big winning opening 30 (long opening) with the opening number of once and opening time of 29.5 seconds in the 1st to 13th eyes, and in the 14th and 16th eyes, the number of opening once, the opening time The second big winning opening 35 of 0.1 second is opened (short opening), and the opening number of the first big winning opening 30 of 0.1 second is opened (short opening) once at the 15th opening. . The opening pattern 23 opens the first large winning opening 30 (long opening) once for the opening times 1 to 29.5 seconds in the 1st to 13th and 15th eyes, and opens once for the opening number 14th. The second big winning opening 35 of 0.1 second is opened (short open), and the opening number of the second big winning opening 35 of 29.5 seconds is opened (long open) once at the opening frequency of 16R. . However, opening of the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35, even if there is a predetermined number of game ball winning (predetermined number of winning, maximum 9), even if the opening time remains It is closed.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V open / close member open pattern determination table T9. The V open / close member open pattern determination table T9 is for the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 according to the special view stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main process (described later). It is a table to be referenced. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H" or "21H", the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 is determined to be "open pattern 31" and the special figure stop symbol When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 32", and when the special view stop symbol data is "14H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 33" and the special view stop symbol data is When "15H" or "22H", it is shown that the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 34". The contents of the open pattern 31, the open pattern 32, the open pattern 33, and the open pattern 34 are shown in FIG. 14 (B). In the opening pattern 31, the second opening of the V opening and closing member 71 is performed for an opening time of 0.1 second when the first winning opening 30 has a first winning at the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth Rs. In 10th and 12th R, when there is the first winning of the first big winning opening 30, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a short of 0.1 second, and when there is the second winning the opening time The V open / close member 71 is opened long for up to 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the second, fourth, sixth, and 12th eyes, when the first large winning opening 30 has a first winning, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 second. In the 8th and 10th eyes, when the first winning combination 30 has the first winning, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a short of 0.1 second, and when the second winning is found the opening time The V open / close member 71 is opened long for up to 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, when there is the first winning on the first big winning opening 30 at the second and sixth R eyes, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a short of 0.1 seconds for the opening time, and there is the second winning. When this is done, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. At the fourth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth Rs, when the first large winning opening 30 has a first winning, the V open / close member 71 is short-opened for an open time of 0.1 second. In the opening pattern 34, at the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth R, when the first large winning opening 30 has the first winning, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a short of 0.1 second. .

4. Description of jackpot, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpot" and "loss" as a result of a jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 41. When the jackpot is won, the jackpot game is made to open the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) with the opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol (the type of big hitting) stopped and displayed. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit opening game), an opening (OP) before the first round game is started, and an ending (ED) after the final round game is over There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the winning opening during the round game is included in the opening round game before the closing.

  There are several types of jackpots. The type of jackpot is as shown in FIG. Here, there are two major types of jackpots, "V passing scheduled jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". "V passing scheduled jackpot" operates the opening and closing member 32, the opening and closing member 37, and the V opening and closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V passage expected opening pattern) which allows passage of gaming balls to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a jackpot. Here, the jackpot of special figure stop symbol data 11H-14H, 21H corresponds to "V passing planned jackpot (probable variation jackpot)". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening and closing member 32 and the opening and closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (open pattern 21: open pattern 31), (open pattern 22: open pattern 33). Or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), it is possible to pass the gaming ball to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. "V non-passing planned big hit (usually big hit)" is an opening pattern (V non-passing planned open pattern) in which passing of the gaming ball to the V area 39 is impossible during the big hit game, the open / close member 32, open / close member 37 and It is a big hit which operates the V opening and closing member 71. Here, the jackpot of the special figure stop symbol data 15H, 22H corresponds to "V non-passing planned jackpot". When the combination of the open pattern of the open / close member 32 and the open / close member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (open pattern 22: open pattern 34) Passage of the game ball to 39 becomes impossible. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 doubles as the V-passing planned opening pattern and the V-non-passing planned opening pattern.

  "V passing scheduled jackpot" includes "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot". The "16 RV scheduled jackpot" has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. 1R to 13R and 15R open the first large winning opening 30 for up to 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second large winning opening 35 for up to 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 is easily possible.

  Although "16R (essentially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, a substantial total number of rounds is 13R. That is, 1R to 13R opens the first large winning opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but 15R only opens the first large winning opening 30 for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and Even in the 16R, the second large winning opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V scheduled scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and it is a round in which the winning ball can not be expected. That is, "16R (essentially 13R) V passing planned jackpot" is a jackpot of substantially 13R. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and passage to the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 is easily possible.

  Although "16R (15R real) V scheduled jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, a substantial total number of rounds is 15R. That is, 1R to 13R and 15R open the first large winning opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, 16R open the second large winning opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but 14R The second large winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1 R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and it becomes an unforeseeable round of winning balls. That is, "16R (15R in real) V scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot in 15R. In 8R and 10R, the V open / close member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: open pattern 32), and passage to the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 is easily possible.

  The "V non-passing jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" of the opening pattern 22 having a total number of rounds of 16R but a substantial total number of rounds of 13. That is, 1R to 13R opens the first large winning opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but 15R only opens the first large winning opening 30 for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and Even in the 16R, the second large winning opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (effective 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and it becomes an unforeseeable round of winning balls. That is, "16R (13R substantially) V non-passing planned jackpot" is a jackpot of 13R substantially. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V open / close member 71 is open, the open is short open (FIG. 14: open pattern 34) and the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 It is almost impossible for game balls to pass.

  As is clear from the above description, "16R (essentially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (actually 13R) V scheduled planned jackpot" are the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35 The open patterns of the open / close member 32 and the open / close member 37) are the same (open pattern 22), and only the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 is different (open pattern 34 and open pattern 33). In addition, although it mentions later, “16R (essentially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot” and “16R (essentially 13R) V planned passing jackpot” are such that a time-saving game (100 times in this example) is performed after the end of the jackpot game. It has become. That is, it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 in "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", and the gaming state after the jackpot is It becomes a low probability time short state (low probability high base state). On the other hand, “16R (actually 13R) V scheduled to pass the jackpot” allows the game ball to easily pass to the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly probable It becomes time saving state (high probability high base state). From this, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between "16R (essentially 13R) V non-passable jackpot" and "16R (essentially 13R) V scheduled planned jackpot", and the gaming state after that jackpot is low certainty It becomes difficult to determine whether the time saving state (low probability high base state) or high probability time short state (high probability high base state) is reached. In addition, after the time saving game end, game state becomes low certainty low base state (normal state) with “16R (the substance 13R) V non passing scheduled jackpot”, when it is the “16R (the substance 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” game state It looks like the high probability low base state of the normal state apparently. That is, in "16R (essentially 13R) V scheduled scheduled jackpot", when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30, when the time saving state after the jackpot game is over, the gaming state is The high probability and low base state and the high probability result in a latent state (latency certainty changing state), and it is difficult for the player to distinguish this latent certainty state. That is, the low probability time short state (low probability) after the jackpot of "16R (essential 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", "16R (essential 13R) V planned passing jackpot", "16R (essential 13R) V non-planned planning jackpot" High base status) and high probability time short status (high probability high base status) after the big hit game of "16R (real 13R) V scheduled planned hit" and "16R (real 13R) V non-scheduled winning" time saving end The later low probability low base state and the high probability low base state after the short time end of “16R (essentially 13R) V scheduled to pass jackpot” are performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution ratio of the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (approximately 53%) for V-passing planned jackpot and 60/60 for V-not scheduled planned jackpot. It is 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the distribution ratio of the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), V passing planned jackpot 83/128 (about 64.8%), V non passing scheduled jackpot 45/128 (about It is 35.2%). As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot performed with the game ball in the second starting port 21 is performed rather than the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) performed with the game ball in the first starting port 20. The lottery (the second special symbol lottery) is set to be advantageous to the player.

5. Description of gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability fluctuation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. It is. Here, a state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is performing probability variation control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as “high probability state (high probability state, probability variation state, probability variation state)”, probability variation The uncontrolled state is simply referred to as “normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)”. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be a jackpot is higher in the high probability state than the normal probability state as the probability variation control of the special symbol. The high probability state is realized by performing the jackpot determination. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of jackpot than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability variation control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol indicator 41 is used as compared with the case where probability variation control is not executed. There is a high probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol will be a big hit symbol.

  In addition, the state where microcomputer 81 for game control controls the fluctuation time shortening control to the special symbol of special symbol indicator 41 is called “time saving state”, the state where fluctuation time shortening control is not performed is simply “non time saving state”. It is said. In the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of variation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10, FIG. 11) determined so that selection of a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is more frequent than in the non-time-short state when in the time saving state. The variation pattern used is judged. That is, when the microcomputer 81 for game control is executing the fluctuation time shortening control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol can be varied as compared to the case where the fluctuation time shortening control is not executed. It becomes easy to select short fluctuation time as fluctuation time of display. As a result, in the time saving state, the pace of the special figure reserve is increased, and a valid winning to the starting opening (a prize that can be stored as the special figure reserve) is easily generated. Thereby, it is possible to aim for a jackpot under the progress of the smooth game. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute probability variation control and variation time reduction control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 or may execute only one of them.

  The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control on the normal symbol in the case of the time saving state and does not execute it in the non-time shortening state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines the number of normal symbol random number values (hit random number values) determined to be successful as the probability variation control of the normal symbol per unit regular symbol per shot determination table T3 in which the time saving state is larger than the non time saving state. Hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed using FIG. 8 (C). Therefore, in the time saving state, the hit probability is higher than that of the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 is used compared to the case where probability fluctuation control is not executed. The display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the normal symbol hits and the probability of becoming a symbol increases. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than the non-time saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time-short state, but is 1 second in the time-short state (FIG. 8 (D)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the open time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time short state (FIG. 12). That is, the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes open time extension control on the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the power chew 22 in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes the opening count increase control on the power chew 22. Under circumstances where the gaming control microcomputer 81 is executing probability variation control and variation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 and open time extension control and opening number increase control for the electric chew 22, As compared with the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the gaming ball is more frequently won in the second starting opening 21. As a result, the base which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of firing balls becomes high. Therefore, a state in which these controls are being executed is called a "high base state", and a state not being executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, it is possible to aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls on hand. The high base state is a state in which so-called power supply control (control for supporting the winning of the second starting port 21 by the power control 22) is being executed. The high base state (power support control state) may not perform all the control described above. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening frequency increasing control for the elective chew 22 By performing one or more controls, it is only necessary that the electric tube 22 be more easily released than when the controls are not being executed. Further, the high base state (power support control state) may be controlled independently without being associated with the short time state.

In gaming machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning to V passing scheduled jackpot is a high probability state and time saving state and high base state if passage to V area 39 is made during the jackpot game . This gaming state is particularly referred to as "high probability high base state" or "high probability time short state". Specifically, among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9, the jackpots in which the gaming state after the jackpot game becomes a high probability high base state are "16 RV passage planned jackpot", "16R (substantially 15R) V passage planned jackpot", and " 16R (essentially 13R) V scheduled jackpot. The high probability high base state of "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot" and "16R (15R real) 15 passing scheduled jackpot" is won the next jackpot (next jackpot) after the jackpot game and that jackpot game is executed End with "16R (13R real) V passing scheduled jackpot" is a high probability high base state, after the jackpot game, a variable display of special symbols is performed a predetermined number of times (here 100 times), and a high probability low base state (latency probability variation) It becomes a state, or, it is finished by winning the next jackpot (next jackpot) and the jackpot game being executed.
In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning to the V non-scheduled scheduled jackpot, if the passage of V area 39 has not been made during the jackpot game (almost not done), normal probability state (non-high probability States (low probability states) and short and high base states. This gaming state is particularly referred to as "low probability high base state", "low probability time short state". Specifically, the jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game becomes the low probability high base state is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" among the jackpot types shown in FIG. In this jackpot, low probability high base state, after the jackpot game, variable display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (here 100 times) is executed, or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and its jackpot It ends by playing a game.
When the gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is the normal probability state, the non-time-short state and the low base state (non-power-supply control state). This gaming state is particularly called "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state may be referred to as "normal gaming state" or "low probability non-short state (also referred to simply as non-short state)". In addition, the state during the execution of the special game (big hit game) may be referred to as "special game state (big hit game state)". Furthermore, a state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state may be referred to as a "specific game state".

  In a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously if the game ball is made to enter the right gaming area 3B (FIG. 1) by right hitting. The electric support 22 makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 compared to the low base state, and the second start opening 21 is easier to win than the first start opening 20. is there. From this, in the high base state, the game ball is passed to the gate 28 serving as a trigger for the normal symbol lottery, and the right strike is performed to win the game ball to the second starting opening 21. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of start winnings (winnings on the starting opening) rather than hitting the left. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting the right even during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously if the game ball is made to enter the left gaming area 3A (FIG. 1) by left hitting. Since the power support control is not executed, the power chew 22 is less likely to be released compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start opening 20 than to the second start opening 21. It is because it has become. From this, in the low base state, in order to win the game ball to the first starting opening 20, the left strike is performed. This makes it possible to obtain a large number of starting winnings rather than right-handed.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. A counter, a flag, a status, a buffer and the like appearing in the operation explanation of the gaming control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the pass / fail judgment means (FIG. 23) and the pass / fail judgment means (FIG. 18, FIG. 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83. Main Control In the main processing, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, status, counters and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting is performed only once after the power is turned on and is not performed thereafter.

  After the initial setting, the gaming control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (step S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 is configured to receive various random number counter values (big hit random number, big hit type random number value, reach random number value, variation pattern random value) shown in FIG. , Normal symbol random number value) is added 1 and updated. Each random number counter value is returned to "0" and added again when the set upper limit value is reached. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0”, or may be randomly changed. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

  After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 permits an interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is permitted, execution of the main timer interrupt process (step S005) is possible. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, after the end of the main timer interrupt processing, before the start of the main timer interrupt processing next time, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . When an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7A. This random number updating process is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process performed in the above-described main control main process (FIG. 15). That is, the update process of various random number counter values is the execution period of the main timer interrupt process and the other period (period from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process) And both.

  After the random number update process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1 and outputs payout data for the payout of a prize ball according to the type of winning opening to the main RAM 84. Set in buffer. The various sensors include, for example, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the normal winning opening sensor 27a, and the normal winning opening sensor 29a (see FIG. 3).

  After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the start opening sensor detection process (step S103), the normal operation process (step S104), the special operation process (step S105), the V area sensor detection process (step S106), the holding ball The number process (step S107) is sequentially performed. Details of these processes will be described later. After the holding ball number process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs an output process (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs a command or the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above to the sub control board 90. After the output processing, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In the other processing, for example, the second special view suspension indicator 43b is controlled to the display mode indicating the number based on the special diagram 2 suspension ball number described later, and the first special diagram is based on the special view 1 suspension ball number The hold indicator 43a is controlled to a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting mouth sensor detection processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the gaming ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is performed based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the gaming ball passes the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of normal symbol holding balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal symbol holding balls is the number of common drawing holdings, and more specifically, is the value of a counter for counting the number of common drawing holdings provided in the main RAM 84. If the normal symbol holding ball number is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the normal symbol holding ball number is "3" or less (step S202: NO), "1" is added to the normal symbol holding ball number (step S203), and then a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the gaming control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label-TRND-H), and the acquired random number is selected from the first to the first general drawing reserve storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. The fourth storage area is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol holding balls.

  In step S205, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the gaming ball has won in the second starting opening 21. This determination is performed depending on whether or not the gaming ball has been detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. If the gaming ball has not won in the second starting opening 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. If the gaming ball has won (step S205: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the special figure 2 holding ball number is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The special figure 2 holding ball number is the number of second special figure reservations, more specifically, the value of a counter for counting the number of second special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84. If the special figure 2 reservation sphere number is "4" (Step S206: YES), processing will skip to Step S210. When special figure 2 reservation sphere number is below 3 (step S206: NO), after adding 1 to special figure 2 retention sphere number (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is done (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label-TRND-A), the value of jackpot type random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label-TRND-AS), the value of reach random number counter (FIG. 7: label -TRND-value of RC), value of fluctuation pattern random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-T1) is acquired. The gaming control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group out of the first to fourth storage areas of the second special view storage area 85b in a storage area corresponding to the current special map 2 storage ball count. The gaming control microcomputer 81 temporarily suspends the acquired random number value group also to a buffer (prejudging buffer for pre-judging) different from the second special-character drawing storage area 85b for the special drawing 2 prior determination processing (FIG. 18) described later. To remember (hold). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 2 prior determination process (step S209). The details of the special view 2 prior determination process will be described later.

  In step S210, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 20. This determination is made based on whether or not the gaming ball has been detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. If the gaming ball has not won in the first starting opening 20 (step S210: NO), this processing ends. When the game ball is won in the first starting opening 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 1 holding ball number is "4 (upper limit value)" ( Step S211). The special figure 1 holding ball number is the number of first special figure holdings, and more specifically, is the value of a counter for counting the number of first special drawing holdings provided in the main RAM 84. If the special figure 1 holding ball number is "4" (step S211: YES), this processing ends. When the special figure 1 holding ball number is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the special figure 1 holding ball number (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S2) S213). Here, the value of the big hit random number counter, the value of the big hit type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are obtained in the same manner as the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (step S208). The gaming control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group out of the first to fourth storage areas of the first special view storage area 85a in the storage area corresponding to the current special view 1 suspension ball count. The gaming control microcomputer 81 temporarily suspends the acquired random number value group also to a buffer (prejudging buffer for pre-judging) different from the first special-character drawing storage area 85a for the special drawing 1 prior determination process (FIG. 19) described later. To remember (hold). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 1 advance determination process (step S214). The details of the special view 1 prior determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 prior judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special view 2 prior determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S301). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, the predetermination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot prior determination with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Do. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the jackpot random number value to determine in advance whether or not a jackpot has occurred. Here, since the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the high probability state table (big hit determination value “0” to “649”) in the big hit determination table T1. Determine in advance whether it is a jackpot by reference. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", the jackpot is determined in advance as "jackpot", and when the value is any other value, it is determined in advance that it is "loss". In the present embodiment, pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table T1 used in the jackpot judgment process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, it is used for prejudgment different from the jackpot judgment table T1. Prior determination may be performed using the jackpot determination table of

  If the result of the jackpot prior determination is “lost” (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot prior determination is "big hit" (step S304: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type advance determination (step S305). In the jackpot type advance determination, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines the jackpot type random number as a determination value temporarily stored in the advance determination buffer by the special view 2 relationship random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208) To get Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs the preliminary determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random number value is any of “0” to “127”, it is determined in advance that “16 RV passage planned jackpot”. In the present embodiment, pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot type judgment table T5 used in the jackpot judgment process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, the advance judgment different from the jackpot type judgment table T5 Prior determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

  In step S306, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a fluctuation pattern prior determination. More specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines the fluctuation pattern random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). And, get reach random value. Next, here, since the time saving state (time saving flag is ON), the gaming control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time saving state, and the jackpot prior determination result of step S304, The fluctuation pattern is specified from the presence / absence prior determination result of the reach obtained from the reach random number value and the fluctuation pattern random value. In the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern to be selected may differ depending on the difference in the number of holding balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that may be selected due to differences in the number of holding balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot prior determination result and the reach presence / absence prior determination result, the reach presence loss is determined in advance, and when the variation pattern random number value is "60", the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of holding balls is "1-2" In the case of “”, two patterns of the variation pattern “P64” to be selected and the variation pattern “P68” to be selected when the number of holding balls is “3 to 4” are selected. In the present embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 The prior determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for prior determination different from.

  In step S307, the gaming control microcomputer 81 creates an advance determination command. The predetermination command includes a jackpot advance determination result, (in the case of a hit, a jackpot type predetermination result), and a fluctuation pattern predetermination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created prior determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this processing.

[Special figure 1 prior judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special view 1 prior determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-described special view 2 prior determination process, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is ON, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot prior determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). Do. Next, here, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF), the gaming control microcomputer 81 is a table for the normal probability state (big hit determination value “0” to “164” in the big hit determination table T1. It determines beforehand whether it is a jackpot based on "). That is, when the jackpot random number value is “0” to “164”, the jackpot is determined in advance as the “jackpot”, and when the value is any other value, it is determined in advance that the “loss” is made. Note that the jackpot prior determination may use a jackpot determination table for prior determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1. Since the processes of steps S404 to S408 are the same as steps S304 to S308 of the special view 2 advance determination process (FIG. 18) described above, the description will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. If the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the symbol is changing normally (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the variation of the normal symbol is not in progress (step S502: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of holding balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). When the number of holding balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. If there is one or more holding ball number (step S503: NO), the normal symbol holding ball number is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes the gate 28 in the state where the number of balls in the normal symbol is "0", the number of balls in the normal symbol is temporarily "1" in step S203 of the start opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17). After that, in the present step S504, the reserve is digested and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes "0". The same applies to the number of balls held for special symbols. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols temporarily becomes "1", and then step S1404 and steps in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the reserve is digested and the number of reserved balls in the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8C) (step S505). Specifically, first, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the normal symbol random number value (as the determination value) stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the common drawing suspension) of the common drawing suspension storage area 86 Read the random number value). Then, it is determined whether or not a hit is made using the normal symbol random number value, the gaming state (whether the time saving state or not), and the normal symbol hit determination table T3. For example, in the non-time saving state, if the normal symbol random number value is "0" to "2", it is determined to be "hit", and if the normal symbol random number value is other than that, it is determined to be "loss" (See FIG. 8 (C)).

  Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8D) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the gaming state (whether the time reduction state or not), and uses the determination result of the gaming state and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern judgment table T4 to change the normal symbol fluctuation. Select the variation time of the normal pattern as a pattern. Here, in the non-time-short state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time-short state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8D) . The game control microcomputer 81 starts the variation display of the normal symbol by setting the selected normal symbol variation pattern (step S507).

  In step S508, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed and has ended. The normal symbol fluctuation time is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present processing. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time is over (step S508: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and in the case of "losing" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505). (Step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S510: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the power chew open pattern (step S511). The open pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew open pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines the gaming state (whether the time reduction state or not), and uses the determination result of the gaming state and the electric chew open pattern judgment table T7 to use the open pattern of the electric chew 22. Choose Here, the "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time-short state, and the "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time-short state. After the opening pattern is selected, the gaming control microcomputer 81 starts the power-on operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this processing.

  In the above-described step S501, when the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes for the electric chow 22 has reached a prescribed maximum winning number (for example, six), or the time for which the electric chow 22 is closed after the operation time of the electric chow 22 is closed. It is that one of the achievements is satisfied. The operation time of the electric chow 22 is an operation time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and the main processing is performed. Finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is “1” of “special operation status”, Called "2", "3", "4". When the “special operation status” is “1” (step S1301: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, variation pattern selection and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol change process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change processing, the output of the change stop command is executed after the change time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol determination processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination process, output of an opening command or the like is executed at the time of a jackpot. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric combination processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric role processing, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is “1” in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special view 2 holding ball number is "0" (step S1401). When the special figure 2 reservation sphere number is “0” (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1407. If the special figure 2 holding ball number is “1” or more (step S1401: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the special figure 2 holding ball number is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads the storage location of the hold information (various random number values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special view hold storage area 85b to the side where the storage location is read from the current position. While shifting by one, the hold information stored in the farthest place from the side to be read out in the second special-image hold storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If there is, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above-described steps, the second Tokusou reserve is digested in the order in which it is suspended. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the holding image 9B (the leftmost holding image 9B among the four holding images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special It shifts to the reserve digest image display area side and is displayed as a reserve digest image 9C. In addition, the reserve images 9B (the second, third and fourth reserve images 9B from the left among the four reserve images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special view reserve storage area 85b are on the left side, respectively. Shift one (Figure 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one second Tokusetsu reserve has been digested. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process is set in the fluctuation time timer. Further, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". In addition, in the fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, information about the special figure stop symbol data set in the big hit judgment process (step S1402) and the fluctuation pattern selection process ( Information on the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information on fluctuation time) is included.

  In step S1401, when the special figure 2 holding ball number is “0” (step S1401: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the special figure 1 holding ball number is “0” ( Step S1407). When the special figure 1 reservation ball number is “0” (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 20 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the special figure 1 holding ball number is “1” or more (step S1407: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the special figure 1 holding ball number is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of the various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special view storage area 85a to the side read from the current position by one. At the same time, the hold information stored in the farthest place from the side to be read out in the first special image hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above-described steps, the first special map reservation is digested in the order in which it is held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold image 9A (the hold image 9A at the right end of the four hold images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special It shifts to the reserve digest image display area side and is displayed as a reserve digest image 9C. In addition, reserve images 9A (the second, third and fourth reserve images 9A from the left among the four reserve images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special view reserve storage area 85a are on the right side, respectively. Shift one (Figure 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one first Tokusetsu reserve has been digested. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process is set in the fluctuation time timer. Further, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, in the fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, information about the special figure stop symbol data set in the big hit judgment process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process ( Information on the variation pattern set in step S1409) (including information on variation time) is included.

  In step S1407, when the special figure 1 holding ball number is “0” (step S1407: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demonstration screen for waiting for customers. The gaming control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by turning on / off the demonstration screen display flag for waiting for a customer. If it is the standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. When it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a customer waiting standby command for displaying a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after a predetermined standby time has elapsed. (Step S1414), this processing ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variation display of the special symbol based on the first special view suspension is executed only when the second special view suspension is "0". That is, the second special view reserve digest is executed prior to the first special view reserve digest. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the jackpot based on the second special view suspension is a jackpot (V passing scheduled jackpot) for the player with a larger profit for the player than the lottery based on the first special view suspension. It is easy to win the

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). The jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 have the same process flow, and therefore will be collectively described. In the jackpot determination process, first, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). If the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special view 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special view hold) of the second special view hold storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process of the special view 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the first special view hold) of the first special view hold storage area 85a is read. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a jackpot is made using the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. Here, since the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), whether or not the big hit is made based on the high probability state table (big hit determination value is “0” to “649”) in the big hit determination table T1. judge.

  In step S1501, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs jackpot determination with reference to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) Step S1504). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads the jackpot random number value by the same method as step S1502. Next, here, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF), whether the jackpot based on the table for the normal probability state (jackpot determination value “0” to “164”) in the jackpot determination table T1 It is determined whether or not.

  If the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special view 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special view reservation storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process of the special view 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special view reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After the determination of the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) according to the identified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, when the result of the big hit determination is "loss", the special figure stop symbol data (01H) according to the lost symbol is set in the big hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520) , End this process.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 have the same process flow, and therefore will be collectively described. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the gaming state is the short time state (step S1600). The determination as to whether or not the time saving state is made depends on whether the time saving flag is ON. When it is in the time saving state (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. If the time saving state is not set (step S1600: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot is the special view 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is the special view 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always the V-passing scheduled jackpot, so the process skips to step S1605. If the jackpot is special view 1 (step S1603: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is carried out based on the special figure stop symbol data being done.

  If the jackpot type is V passage planned jackpot (step S1604: YES), the microcomputer for gaming control 81 changes with reference to the non-time-short state V passage planned jackpot table of the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random number value as the determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special view 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special view suspension) of the second special view suspension storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the first special figure retention) of the first special figure retention storage area 85a is read out. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the non-time short state V passing scheduled jackpot, a portion corresponding to the V passing scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time short status shown in FIG. 10 (the variation pattern is “P1 in FIG. The part from “P3” to “P3”, and from “P21” to “P23” as the variation pattern in Special Figure 2 is referred to (address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as a variation pattern in Special Figure 1 and any one from "P21" to "P23" is selected in Special Figure 2.

  If the jackpot type is V non-passing planned jackpot (step S1604: NO), the microcomputer for game control 81 refers to the table for non-time-short state V non-passing planned jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). Then, the variation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time short state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, a portion ("P4" to "P6") corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time short status shown in FIG. Part) is referenced. One of “P4” to “P6” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S1602 (step S1602: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random number is a reach establishment random number (step S1607). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads out the reach random number value as the determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special view 2, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special view hold) of the second special view hold storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special view 1, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the first special view hold) of the first special view hold storage area 85a is read. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of the reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8 (B)) and the reach random number value. Here, since it is in the non-time-short state, in the reach determination table T2, the table for the non-time-short state (the reach presence determination value (reach establishment random number value) is a portion of “0” to “13”) Determine the presence or absence.

  If the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, if there is a reach presence loss, the gaming control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time-short state of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The variation pattern is selected with reference to the reach presence loss table (step S1608). Here, as a table for loss with non-time-short status reach, a portion corresponding to reach-with-miss in fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-short status shown in FIG. 10 (the variation pattern is “P7” in In the part "P14", in the special figure 2, the variation pattern is referred to as "P24" to "P31"). In Special Figure 1, any one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current special figure 1 holding ball number (1 to 4). In Special Figure 2, any of "P24" to "P31" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current special figure 2 holding ball number (1 to 4). Since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of holding balls, the function of the shortening variation according to the number of holding balls works. That is, in both of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, when the number of holding balls is “3” to “4”, the fluctuation time is compared with when the number of holding balls is “1” to “2”. Short variation patterns are more likely to be selected. This makes it possible to speed up the speed at which special figures are suspended when the number of balls held is large.

  If the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: NO), that is, if there is no reach loss, the gaming control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time-short state of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The variation pattern is selected with reference to the no reach loss table (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-short time reach non-reach loss, a portion corresponding to non-reach non-reach out of fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for non-time short state shown in FIG. 10 (the fluctuation pattern is “P15” in special figure 1 to In the part "P16", in the special figure 2, the variation pattern is referred to as "P32" to "P33". In Special Figure 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current special figure 1 holding ball number (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current special figure 2 holding ball number (1 to 4). Here also, since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of holding balls, the function of the shortening variation according to the number of holding balls works.

  When it is determined in step S1600 that the gaming state is the short time state, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). The processes in steps S1613 to S1619 are the same as the processes in steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that the portions of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 to be referred to in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619 have already been described in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. It is different from Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, while the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-short time state is referred to, in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the time short state is used. The variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is V passage scheduled jackpot, a portion corresponding to V passage scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for time shortening state shown in FIG. Are referred to as “P41” to “P43”, and the special pattern 2 refers to “P61” to “P63” as the variation pattern. From the read variation pattern random number value, any one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as a variation pattern in Special Figure 1 and any one of "P61" to "P63" is selected in Special Figure 2. Also, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is V non-passing planned jackpot, a portion corresponding to V non-passing planned jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the short time state shown in FIG. "To" P46 "is referred to. One of “P44” to “P46” is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value.

  After selecting the fluctuation pattern as described above, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the selected fluctuation pattern (step S1630) and ends the present processing. The information of the set fluctuation pattern is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). Thereby, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Process during special symbol change]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21: step S1304). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed and has ended (step S1701). The variation time of the special symbol is the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the above-mentioned variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, FIG. 25). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this processing ends. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing in response to the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variation display of the special symbol with a symbol according to the set special symbol stop symbol data. Thereafter, the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of special symbol determination processing (FIG. 21: step S1306). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs gaming state management processing (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of times of ST and the number of times of time reduction, and the contents will be described later. After the gaming state management processing, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808), and the present process is ended. Thereby, the jackpot game is not started, and the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, and the jackpot determination etc. for the next hold is executed.

  If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening / closing member according to the type of the jackpot winning (step S1803). Specifically, with reference to the special winning opening open pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the special winning opening from the special view stop symbol data, and the determined open pattern set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the special winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 from the special view stop symbol data with reference to the V open / close member open pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14) and sets the determined open pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "open pattern 31" is set as the open pattern of the V open / close member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the jackpot which has been won, together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening / closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, “16” is set to the round counter (FIG. 13 (B)).

  After setting the release pattern, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs gaming state reset processing (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, the jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and the process ends.

[Playing state management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of times of variation of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, at the time of transition to the high probability state, “10000” is set in the probability change counter (substantially, the high probability state continues until the next jackpot). The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the probability change counter by 1 (step S2003). If the value of the probability change counter is not “0” (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

  In step S2005, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time saving counter is to count the number of times of variation of the special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, when transitioning to the time saving state, if the low probability high base state, "100" is set in the time reduction counter, and if the high probability high base state is "100" or "10000" is set Set to “100” for “16R (essential 13R) V scheduled planned jackpot” (latency probability variation jackpot), “10000” for “16RV scheduled planned jackpot” and “16R (essential 15R) V scheduled planned jackpot” Will be The microcomputer for game control 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become “0” as a result of decrementing the time reduction counter by 1 (step S2007). If the value of the time saving counter is not “0” (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the value of the time saving counter is “0” (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

  In step S2009, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets a gaming state designating command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and completes this processing. The game state specification command includes information on the currently set game state (whether or not a probability change state, a probability change counter value, a time reduction state, a time reduction counter value, etc.).

[Playing state reset process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. If the probability change flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process ends. If the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched OFF (step S2104). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, the non-high probability state and the non-short time state. In the gaming machine 1, since the low base state is always in the non-time-short state, the low base state is in progress during the jackpot game.

[Special electric role processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric symbol processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) are completely opened based on the opening pattern in the running big hit game. If the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the big hit end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening and closing member operation processing for operating the V opening and closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V open / close member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of gaming balls are won in the first big winning opening 30, and in the V open / close member operation process, according to the V open / close member open pattern T9. The V opening and closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when the predetermined number of game balls are to be won. Details of the V open / close member operation process will be described later. After the V open / close member operation process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) is open (step S2202). If it is open (YES in step S2202), the process proceeds to step S2210.

  When the special winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the special winning opening (step S2203). In the time of opening the big winning opening, for example, when the opening time of the big hit has passed and it has reached the opening start time in the first round game, or the big winning opening which is temporarily closed after opening is reopened It includes the time when the interval time (closing time) has passed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the special winning opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

  If it is time to open the special winning opening (timing) (step S2203: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large winning opening (the first large winning opening 30 or the second large winning opening 35) in accordance with the opening pattern (FIG. 13) corresponding to the type of the big hit. After the special winning opening opening process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets a round designating command (step S2208). The round designating command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the round designating command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In addition, in this embodiment, the opening of the big winning a prize opening of a plurality of times is not made in one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the gaming control microcomputer 81 is configured to open the large winning opening in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first release, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first release. After setting the round designation command, the process ends.

  In step S2202 described above, if the special winning opening is open (YES in step S2202), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes for the special winning opening in the round game has reached the prescribed maximum winning number (for example, 9 per round), or it has reached the time for closing the special winning mouth That is, either (that is, that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the closing condition of the special winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present processing. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the special winning opening (step S2211).

  If it is not the time (timing) to open the special winning opening in the above-described step S2203, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening is closed. As mentioned above, it is because time (interval time) of closing of a big winning opening between round games is included in the opening round game before the closing. The gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the closing of the special winning opening. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends the present process.

  When the round game is over (step S2220: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the round counter to 1 decrement (step S2221), and the value of the round counter is "0" or not A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the defined number of round games has not been digested yet, this processing is ended to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is “0”, the jackpot ending command is set as the jackpot end processing for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when there is a passage of gaming balls to the V region 39 in “16R (essentially 13R) V planned to pass jackpot” is “16R (essentially 13R) V non-passable scheduled It is the same length as the ending time when there is no passage of the gaming ball to the V area 39 in the "big hit". As a result, even if the game ball passes to the V region 39 in the "16R (essential 13R) V scheduled planned jackpot" for the player, the "16R (essentially 13R) V non-scheduled projected jackpot" And the passage of the gaming ball to the V area 39 can be recognized. In addition, the ending time when there is no passage of the game ball to V field 39 in "16R (actually 13R) V passage planned jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and the process ends.

  In the above-mentioned step S2200, when the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), since the last round is finished, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ending time of the big hit has passed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present processing. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns off the big hit end flag (step S2231) and turns off the big hit flag (step S2232), and the special operation status Is set to "1" (step S2233). Thereby, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special operation process. Thereafter, a game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed to complete this process.

[V opening and closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the current round game (the round) is the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71. When the value of the round counter is “15”, “13”, “11”, “9”, “7”, “5”, the gaming control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round. When it is not the open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V open / close member 71 in the round.

  If it is the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The “first winning flag” is a flag indicating that the first big winning opening 30 has a first prize in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether a first winning is detected (step S2503). If the first ball winning combination has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no winning in the first large winning opening 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V opening / closing member 71.

  When the first ball winning combination is detected (step S2503: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 opens the V open / close member 71 for short and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened, regardless of whether “short opening” or “long opening”, the first ball is won Sometimes it is to execute short release (here 0.1 second). Since the open time of the V open / close member 71 is very short in the short open of the V open / close member 71, the first game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 does not pass the V area 39 and is not It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V effective period setting process, while the V open / close member 71 is open and for several seconds after the V open / close member 71 is closed, the V effective period in which the detection of the gaming ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective is set. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V open / close member 71 for short in accordance with the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 (FIG. 14B) and opens the V open / close member 71. And 1 second after closing is set to V effective period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V-effective period (including the case where the jackpot game is not executed) as a V-ineffective period in which the detection of the gaming ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be ineffective. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective" means that the V flag is turned on based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later) Processing (see FIG. 33)). In addition, “determining the detection of the gaming ball by the V area sensor 39a as invalid” means that the V flag is not turned on even when the detection of the gaming ball by the V area sensor 39a is performed. The reason why the V effective period includes a few seconds after the closing of the V open / close member 71 (ball brushing period) is because there is a physical distance between the V open / close member 71 and the V region sensor 39a. It takes into consideration the period until the gaming ball having entered the V area 39 side immediately before the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 is detected by the V area sensor 39a. That is, in this case, the V flag is turned ON only when V passage (V game region passes to V region 39) during the V effective period is detected, and V flag is detected when V passage is detected outside the V effective period (V invalid period). It is decided not to turn it on. When the V flag is ON, the probability change flag is ON, that is, the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the high probability state (see later-described gaming state setting processing (FIG. 32)). By doing this, the V flag is turned on based on the V passage due to the fraudulent action, and the high probability state is not set. After the short open of the V open / close member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

  In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if there is already a first ball winning (step S2502: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the second winning flag is ON or not (Step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that the first large winning opening 30 has a second winning in a case where the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 in the round is long open. If the second winning flag is ON (step S 2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S 2540. If the second winning flag is OFF (step S 2520: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 in the round is long open (step S 2521). If the long release is not performed (step S 2521: NO), that is, if the short release is performed, the process proceeds to step S 2540. On the other hand, if the game player is in the long open state (step S 2521: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball has been detected (step S 2522). If the second winning combination has not been detected (step S 2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S 2540.

  When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 long and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2523). The V open / close member 71 is long open in the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 (FIG. 14B), in the case of “long open”, the long open at the winning of the second ball (here, up to 31.5 seconds) ) To execute. In this case, since one round game time is 31.5 seconds at the longest (29.5 seconds for the big winning opening maximum opening time + 2 seconds for the interval closing time), generally, the second game winning a prize The time from time to the end of the round is less than 31.5 seconds. As described later, since the V open / close member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, the open time of the long open of the V open / close member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the open time of the V open / close member 71 is relatively long, at least a part of the game balls after the second ball winning a prize in the first large winning opening 30 has the V area 39 It is configured to pass. In the V effective period setting process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the V open period as the V open period during the opening and closing of the V open / close member 71 and sets the V inactive period together with the closing of the V open / close member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V open / close member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S 2524), and proceeds to step S 2540.

  In step S 2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V open / close member 71 is open. If the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S 2540: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round game has ended (step S 2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (two seconds in this case) has passed since the closing of the special winning opening. Make a decision.

  When the round game is over (step S 2550: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S 2551), and the V open / close member closing process and the V invalid period A setting process is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V open / close member 71, and after a few seconds (1 second in this case) after the V open / close member 71 is closed, Set and finish this process.

  If the round game has not ended (step S 2550: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S 2560). The closing condition of the V open / close member 71 can be exemplified by, for example, that a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the opening of the V open / close member 71 if the short open is open. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V open / close member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process ends. When the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the processing is ended while the V opening / closing member 71 is in the open state and the V effective period is continued.

  In step S2540, when it is determined that the V opening / closing member 71 is closing (NO in step S2540), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this processing. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), this process ends.

[Playing state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the gaming state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the V flag is ON (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set in the time saving counter (step S2303). As a result, the gaming state after the present jackpot game becomes the "non-high probability state", the "time saving state" and the "high base state" (that is, the low probability high base). This low-probability high-base state ends when either of the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or the next jackpot is won, or the condition is met.

On the other hand, if the V flag is ON in step S2301 (step S2301: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), and sets "10,000" in the probability variation counter (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Further, the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307), and sets “100” or “10000” in the time saving counter (step S2308). More specifically, "100" when "16R (actual 13R) V scheduled planned jackpot" (latency probability variation jackpot) and "10,000" when "16RV scheduled planned jackpot" and "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled planned jackpot" Is set. As a result, the gaming state after the present jackpot game becomes "high probability state" and "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, high probability high base). The high probability high base state ends when either of the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or 10000 times, or the next jackpot is won. When the variable display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the gaming state after that becomes the high probability low base state, the high probability state is hidden.
In the high probability state, the jackpot probability is about 1/10, and practically, it will be about a big jackpot before performing the 10000 jackpot lottery in the high probability high base state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot (special figure stop symbol data 21H) which is a jackpot at the special symbol 2 (via the second starting opening) in the time saving state and which is scheduled to pass V is the jackpot game. If V passes, it is almost guaranteed that the gaming state after that jackpot will be the high probability high base state until the next jackpot.

  In step S2309, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets a gaming state designating command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and completes this processing. The gaming state designation command includes information on the gaming state which has just been set.

[V-area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not there is a detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If there is no detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is during the V-valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V open / close member operation process (FIG. 31). The V validity period is set to the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the opening and closing seconds of the V opening / closing member 71 during the twelfth round (ball brushing period) Be done. If the V effective period is not in progress (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V effective period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V pass command (step S2604), and ends this processing. .

[Holding ball processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the holding ball number process (FIG. 16: step S107). The gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads out the special figure 1 holding ball number, the special figure 2 holding ball number, and the normal symbol holding ball number stored in the main RAM 84 (step S 2701). Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the hold ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The ball holding ball number command is a command for notifying the sub control board 90 of the ball holding number, and includes information about the special figure 1 holding ball number, the special figure 2 holding ball number, and the normal symbol holding ball number . After setting of the holding ball number command, the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present process.

7. Operation of Effect Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub control substrate 90 (FIG. 4) will be described on the basis of FIGS. A counter, a flag, a status, a buffer and the like appearing in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94.

[Sub control main process]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub control main process. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, setting of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, status, counters and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

  After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interruption of the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number updating process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. Each random number counter value is returned to "0" and added again when the set upper limit value is reached. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0”, or may be randomly changed. In addition to adding one by one, two or more random numbers may be added. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

  After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4025). While the interrupt is permitted, execution of the sub timer interrupt processing (step S4035) is possible. The sub timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, after the sub timer interrupt processing ends, the random number updating process is repeatedly executed until the sub timer interrupt processing is started next.

[Sub side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). First, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process during variation effect (step S4305). The processing during fluctuation presentation is processing for setting a command before the end of fluctuation at a specific timing during fluctuation presentation and causing the display screen 7a to execute a particular display presentation, and the details will be described later. After the fluctuation effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display content of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs command transmission processing (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 by the reception command analysis process etc. as the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , Transmit to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands executes display effects corresponding to the received commands using the image display device 7. In addition, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect that outputs voice from the speaker 67 according to the received command. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes lamp effects for controlling the light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends the process. In the other processes, for example, a random number update process or the like is performed.

[Receive command analysis process]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). First, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a predetermination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it is received (step S4415: YES), pre-reading effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). The “pre-reading effect determination process” is a process of determining whether or not pre-reading effect is to be performed, and a pre-reading effect pattern in the case of performing the pre-reading effect. Details of the pre-reading effect determination processing will be described later. On the other hand, when not having received (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned pre-reading effect determination processing is skipped. The preread effect is an effect that indicates that there is a high possibility that a jackpot is included in the hold information newly stored in the special view hold storage area 85, and is executed during the change effect.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it is received (step S4445: YES), a suspension display process is performed (step S4450). In the suspension display process, provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 based on the information about the special figure 1 reserve ball number, the special figure 2 reserve ball number, and the normal symbol reserve ball number included in the reserve ball number command The values of the first special view hold effect counter, the second special view hold effect counter, and the common drawing hold effect counter are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub control board 90 side can hold the information of the number of holding balls. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special view hold effect counter, the second special view hold effect counter, and the general drawing hold effect counter, Update 9B. On the other hand, when the holding ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned holding display process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the change start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it is received (step S4455: YES), the fluctuation effect start process is performed (step S4460). The "variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during special symbol variation. Details of the change production start process will be described later. On the other hand, when not received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned change production start process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the change stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it is received (step S4465: YES), the fluctuation effect end process is performed (step S4470). "Variation production end processing" is processing for stopping the fluctuation production performed during special symbol variation. In the fluctuation effect end process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets a fluctuation effect end command for ending the fluctuation effect. As a result, the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 during the change is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs an advance determination information shift process (FIG. 39) described later. If the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect ending process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If it is received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The “opening effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of the special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets in the sub RAM 94 information related to the special figure stop symbol data set at the big hit winning determination included in the opening command. Then, an effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special view stop symbol data is selected, and an opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is displayed in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94 Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94 b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 ROMs a predetermined opening effect image. , And displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. When the opening command is not received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If it is received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). The “round effect pattern determination process” is a process for selecting an open game effect pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the special winning opening or in the interval between open in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designating command, and sets information relating to the special figure stop symbol data included in the round designating command and information relating to the number of rounds in the sub RAM 94 Do. Then, a special effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is produced by the sub RAM 94 It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and causes the display screen 7a to display the same. When the round designation command is not received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-described round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If it is received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). The “ending effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of the special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets information on special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the type of hit indicated by the special view stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and causes the display screen 7a to display the same. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives a game state designating command, information relating to the game state included in the game state designating command (high probability state or not, time change state or not, definite variation The sub RAM 94 holds the counter, the value of the time reduction counter, and the like. Further, when the V control command is received, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the sub RAM 94 to hold the V-passed information. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (wait for customer wait command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Pre-reading effect determination processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of pre-reading effect determination processing (FIG. 37: step S4420). First, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs predetermination information rewriting processing (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the advance determination command received from the main control board 80, the jackpot advance determination result (jackpot determination information), the jackpot type advance determination result (jackpot type information), The pattern predetermination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the predetermination information storage area 94c.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram for describing the configuration of the prior determination information storage area 94c. In addition to the above-described jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information, the advance determination information storage area 94c stores prefetch presentation effect pattern information. Pre-reading effect pattern information is information which shows the contents of pre-reading effect which is executed during fluctuation production, is selected in step S4604 which it mentions later. FIG. 39 (A) shows the jackpot determination information "losing" and fluctuation pattern information "P72" and "P73" as the first to third special determination results respectively corresponding to the first to third special drawing 2 reservations. It is stored in the storage area, and a state in which the prior determination result corresponding to the change is stored in the area is shown. In FIG. 39 (B), there is a prize in the special figure 2 from the state of FIG. 39 (A), and the preliminary determination information included in the preliminary determination command received from the main control board 80 is the fourth in the special figure 2 reserve. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, as the prior determination information, the big hit determination information “big hit”, the big hit type information “21H”, and the fluctuation pattern information “P61” are stored. In addition, together with the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth special drawing 2 suspension and the corresponding areas corresponding to the fluctuation, “pattern A” as the preread effect pattern information "Is set. FIG. 39C shows a state in which the predetermination information shift process is performed after the change ends from the state of FIG. 39B. Specifically, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the area, and the prior determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, 4 The prior determination information of the storage area is cleared. The prior determination information shift process is executed in the fluctuation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

  Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the prior determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the prior determination information storage area 94 c and the first to fourth storage areas. If pre-reading effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this processing ends. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the prior determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, pre-reading effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is “big hit”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not "reach with loss" (step S4603). Whether the "big hit" or the "reach with loss" can be determined, for example, by the change pattern prior determination result (change pattern information). If the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is “loss without reach” (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends the present process. This is because there is no need to perform pre-reading effects. On the other hand, when the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "big hit" or "reach with loss" (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution determination to determine whether to perform pre-reading effect, And, pre-reading effect pattern selection is done (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the prefetch effect random number, and refers to the acquired random value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect Whether or not to perform, and a pre-reading effect pattern when performing pre-reading effect is decided.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the preliminary determination result is "big hit" and the pre-reading effect random number value is "0 to 55", the pre-reading effect is "none", and the pre-reading effect random number value is "56 to 67" as a pre-reading effect When “pattern A” is selected and the pre-reading effect random number value is “68 to 127”, “pattern B” is selected as pre-reading effect. In addition, when the pre-determination result is “reach with loss” and the pre-reading effect random number value is “0 to 107”, the pre-reading effect is “absent”, and the pre-reading effect random number value is “108 to 114” as the pre-reading effect When “pattern A” is selected and the pre-reading effect random number value is “115 to 127”, “pattern B” is selected as pre-reading effect. The type and content of the pre-reading effect pattern, and the range of the random value to be selected can be set arbitrarily.

  Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the pre-reading effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the prior determination information storage area 94c, among the first to fourth storage areas, not only the storage area corresponding to the received prior determination command but also the storage before the corresponding storage area. The preread effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only “pattern A” is set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received prior determination command, but also the first to third storage areas, and the area concerned Also set "pattern A". Thus, the prefetching effect pattern A is executed also in the fluctuation effect (variation effect corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas) executed before the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed. . In addition, it is based on the progress condition of the said fluctuation production whether the prefetch effect is performed by the fluctuation production corresponding to the said area | region. That is, if the timing to execute the pre-reading effect has already passed in the variation effect, the pre-reading effect is not executed, but if it is before the timing to execute the pre-reading effect, it is executed at that timing. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the pre-reading effect is not performed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Change production start process]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the fluctuation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets information on the special view stop symbol data included in the change start command and information on the change pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes gaming state information indicating the current gaming state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination processing of the special view 1 or the special view 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 as appropriate.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs key effect pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process is based on the basic configuration of the change effect (for example, the display and switching of the background image on the image display device 7, the display and operation of a predetermined character, and the output of melody and sound effect using the speaker 67 , And lighting control of lamps, etc.). The fluctuation effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as chance-up effect and pre-reading effect on this basic effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the main effect pattern with reference to the main effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining a base effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of backbone rendering patterns for performing normal reach rendering, a plurality of types of backbone rendering patterns for performing SP1 rendering, a plurality of types of backbone rendering patterns for performing SP2 rendering, and a plurality of types of backbone rendering patterns for performing SP3 rendering A plurality of basic effect patterns are set to perform a no reach non-stop effect. The type of the core rendering pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P1”, a key effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P72”, a base effect pattern for performing a no reach loss effect is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the main effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the fluctuation effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the chance-up random number counter, and determines the chance-up effect pattern with reference to the acquired random value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only a portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 for determining the change effect pattern of the special view 1 in the non-time-short state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P1” to “P16”. In addition, the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 is a portion that determines the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the variation pattern is “P21” to “P33” “P41” to “P56” “61” to “73”. It may or may not be provided.

  In FIG. 43, as the chance-up effect pattern, “2-NO”, “2-SP1”, “2-SP2”, “2-SP3”, “3-NO”, “3-SP1”, “3-SP2”, “3-SP3” “ “4-NO”, “4-SP1”, “4-SP2”, “4-SP3” and “ANO” are set. These chance presentation patterns correspond to the various chance-up presentation described later.

  Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and combines the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R etc. You may decide By these, it is determined what kind of effect to be performed as the fluctuation effect.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 sets a change effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that a change effect based on the change effect pattern determined in the above steps S5010 to S5015 is realized ( Step S5020). When the fluctuation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 changes the fluctuation effect image. It is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variation effect timer (step S5030), and ends the present process. A fluctuation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is set in the fluctuation production timer. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set to the fluctuation effect timer.

[Processing during variation production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the process (FIG. 36: step S 4305) in the time of the variable effect production. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a change effect is being performed (step S4701). Whether or not the variation effect is being performed can be determined, for example, based on whether or not the variation effect timer is zero. If the variable performance is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the variable effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether it is the timing to set the command before the end of the change in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command to notify the image control board 100 or the like that the effect control microcomputer 91 has a specific timing during the variable stage effect, and the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation end command. Switching of the effect contents, display of a specific image, and the like are performed according to the information included in the command before the end of fluctuation.

  If it is not the timing to set the command before the end of change (step S4702: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is time to set a command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: YES), it is judged whether or not there is prefetch presentation effect pattern information in the area of the prior judgment information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation end command including pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation end command not including pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the sub command generation area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). Thereby, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command including pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the changing effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 causes the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 to start the pre-reading effect for displaying the pre-reading effect image. On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a command before the end of change is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade effect in which the preview image is faded.

8. Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described based on FIG. A buffer or the like appearing in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 is provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after CPU initialization processing, display control processing is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a fluctuation presentation start command has been received from the sub control board 90 (step S5001). If it is received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the fluctuation effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received change effect start command, reads a predetermined change effect image instructed in the change effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Display. On the other hand, when not having received (step S5001: NO), the above-mentioned processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a command before the end of fluctuation is received from the sub control substrate 90 (step S5003). If it is received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the pre-reading effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes a command before the end of change, and when the command before the end of change includes pre-reading effect pattern information, reads out a predetermined pre-reading effect image from the ROM 103, and displays the image display device 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a. In addition, even if the pre-reading effect pattern information is not included in the command before the end of the fluctuation, if the preliminary image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, the preliminary fading effect is to fade the preliminary image. Do. On the other hand, when not having received (step S5003: NO), the above-mentioned processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a fluctuation rendering end command has been received from the sub control board 90 (step S5005). If it is received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads out from the ROM 103 the image on which the change effect is displayed in a stopped state, and displays the changed effect stop display on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if not received (step S5005: NO), the above process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In the other processes, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, it reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined opening effect image instructed in the opening effect start command, and displays the display screen of the image display device 7 Display on 7a. Further, when the round effect start command is received, the predetermined round effect image instructed in the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Also, when the ending effect start command is received, the predetermined ending effect image instructed in the ending effect start command is read out from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and the present process is ended.

9. Operation and display effects of the movable plate body and display effects of the light guide plate 17 The movable plate (first movable character object 14, second movable character object 15, and third movable character object with reference to FIGS. 46 to 52) The operation of 18), the display effect of the first movable combination 14 and the display effect of the light guide plate 17 will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 drives the first movable object 14, the second movable object 15, and the third movable object 18 in an initial operation or the like during game effect (display effect) or power on. Perform control. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is a specific image by irradiating the end faces of the first movable role object 14 and the light guide plate 17 with light in an initial operation during game effect (display effect) or power on. Perform a display effect to display.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory view exemplifying a state in which the first movable part 14 moves.
FIG. 47 is an explanatory view exemplifying the second aspect of the first movable part 14.
The first movable part 14 includes four light transmitting members (movable light guide plates), and each of them is configured to be movable. The four transmissive members (movable light guide plates) have a substantially rectangular shape. The first movable part 14 can stand still at the retracted position (home position) shown in FIG. 1 (first aspect). At this time, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 are respectively located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the first movable role item 14 is visible to the player. As shown in FIG. 16, the first movable character 14 can move to the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 47 by moving upward from the state of FIG. It can be stationary (second aspect). In the second embodiment, the four transmissive members (movable light guide plates) cover substantially the entire display screen 7 a on the front surface of the image display device 7. Further, the first movable part 14 can be moved to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (retracting) the four transmissive members (movable light guide plate) from the state shown in FIG. , There can be rest.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory view exemplifying the first display effect of the first movable role item 14. In the four light transmitting members (movable light guide plates), the main surface is an image display area, and a character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is displayed there. be able to. When the first board movable body 14 is in the second mode, four character partial images BN are close to each other to form a smile face character image as a whole.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory view exemplifying a second display effect of the first movable role item 14. The character image MJ of "S", "MA", "I", and "L" can be displayed in the image display area of the four light transmissive members (movable light guide plates). The first movable role object 14 can switch the four character images MJ of “S”, “M”, “I” and “L” independently to a visually recognizable state and a visually difficult state.

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory view exemplifying the display effect of the light guide plate. The light guide plate 17 can display a plurality of (here, seven) smile images SL at different positions on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 can switch the seven smile images SL into a viewable state and a hard-to-recognize state independently.

FIG. 51 is an explanatory view exemplifying a second mode of the second movable part 15. As shown in FIG.
The second movable character 15 includes a rotating body on which a face is drawn. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable part 15 can stand still at a retracted position (home position) where the rotating body is stored in the center decoration 10 (first aspect). At this time, a part of the lower side of the rotating body is in a visible state. In the second movable part 15, the rotating body advances downward from the state of FIG. 1, and a rotation effect can be performed in front of the display screen 7a (second aspect).

FIG. 52 is an explanatory view illustrating the second mode of the third movable part 18.
The third movable part 18 is configured such that the frame-like member can move up and down and can stand still at the retracted position (home position) (first aspect). When the third movable role item 18 is positioned at the home position, it can not be viewed by the player. By moving (advance) downward from the home position, the third movable character 18 can move to the advanced position (deployed position, deployed position) shown in FIG. 52, and can stand there (second embodiment ). In this second mode, the third movable character 18 covers a part of the image display 7 as seen from the player. In addition, the third movable part 18 can move to the home position by moving (retracting) upward from the state shown in FIG. 52, and can stand there.

  The third movable character 18 has a frame shape and is formed in a rhombus shape. When the third movable role object 18 is in the unfolded position (in the case of the second aspect), the display on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 can be visually recognized from the hollow portion surrounded by the frame portion.

10. An example of effects according to the present embodiment, an example of effects, a modification, and an example of an example of each effect according to the present embodiment (an example of a display effect, an example of a movable object effect). Moreover, the effect example with respect to the presentation example, a modification, and an aspect example are also match | combined and demonstrated. As described above, the effects to be described below are based on various information (such as jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, fluctuation pattern information, and prior determination information) transmitted from the gaming control microcomputer 81, the microcomputer 91 (for presentation control) This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is performed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Moreover, although there may be a case where the hold display (hold icon) is omitted in the display effect example, it is actually displayed unless otherwise noted.

  Next, the next timer value display effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. This next timer value display effect may be performed, for example, during the change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction to execute the next timer value display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. It is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a.

[Next timer value display effect A]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for describing the next timer value display effect A. In the next timer value display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 53A, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In this state, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), the timer image TM1 is displayed. The timer image TM1 includes a two-digit numeric image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, an area image, a pattern image, etc. other than the numeral image. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the timer image TM1 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the display. Here, after “30” is displayed as the timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 53 (C) and 53 (D), the next timer value enlargement display effect is started. Specifically, when the timer value of the timer image TM1 reaches a predetermined value (here, 5 seconds), with the current timer value in a state where the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the timer image TM1 is expanded. It is displayed together. For example, when the timer image TM1 (current timer value) is "5", the value "4" to be displayed next is displayed together with the current timer value "5" in a state of being enlarged. In FIG. 53 (D), the next timer value image NT representing “4” having transparency and overlapping the current timer value “5” is displayed in an enlarged manner. The next timer value image NT has transparency, and the timer image TM1 is visible through the next timer image NT. Since the next timer value image NT is enlarged and displayed, it is larger than the timer image TM1, and the upper end and the lower end of the numeral "4" are images which are out of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53E, a reduction effect of the next timer value image NT is executed. Specifically, the next timer value image NT is reduced in size in a state of overlapping with the timer image TM1, and the size and the display position approach the portion (image area) where the counter value is represented in the timer image TM1. In other words, the next timer value image NT is reduced so as to fall within the image area where the counter value is represented in the timer image TM1. Then, when the next timer value image NT substantially matches the size and the display position of the image area where the counter value is represented in the timer image TM1, as shown in FIG. 53 (F), the timer image TM1 is displayed. Completing is complete. Here, the next timer value image NT representing "4" is reduced so that the size and the display position coincide with the "5" portion of the timer image TM1, and "4" of the next timer value image NT and the timer image Immediately after the size and position of TM1's "5" match, the timer image TM1 is replaced with "4". The timing at which the timer value of the timer image TM1 is replaced with the timer value of the next timer value image NT may be immediately before or after the next timer value image NT matches the timer image TM1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (G), the second timer value enlarged display effect is started for the second time. Similar to FIG. 53 (D), the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the timer image TM1 is displayed together with the current timer value in the expanded state. Here, the timer image TM1 (current timer value) is “4”, and the value “3” to be displayed next is displayed together with the current timer value “4”. The next timer value image NT representing "3" is enlarged and displayed with transparency, overlaps with the current timer value "4", and the upper and lower ends of the number "3" protrude from the display screen 7a. It is in the state. After that, the next timer value image NT is reduced in size in a state of overlapping with the timer image TM1, and the size and the display position approach the numeral part (counter value part) of the timer image TM1. Then, when the next timer value image NT substantially matches the size and the display position of the counter value portion of the timer image TM1, as shown in FIG. 53H, the decrement of the timer image TM1 is completed. Here, the next timer value image NT representing "3" is reduced so that the size and the display position coincide with the portion "4" of the timer image TM1, and the next timer value image NT and "3" and the timer image are reduced. Immediately after the size and position of TM1 “4” match, the timer image TM1 becomes “3”. The timing at which the timer value of the timer image TM1 is replaced with the timer value of the next timer value image NT may be immediately before or after the next timer value image NT matches the timer image TM1.

  As described above, when the countdown is executed while repeating the next timer value enlargement display effect, the next timer value reduction effect, and the decrement completion effect, the timer value becomes 0 (zero) as shown in FIG. 53 (I). Timer zero display effect is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53 (J), at the position where the timer image TM1 has been displayed, an expectation degree suggestion image EI1 indicating the expectation degree of the jackpot in the variation is displayed. After that, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed.

[Next timer value display effect B]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect B. In the next timer value display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 54A, a decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), the timer image TM1 is displayed. At this time, the variable display disappears from the display screen 7a. The variable display may be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The timer image TM1 includes a two-digit numeric image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, an area image, a pattern image, etc. other than the numeral image. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the timer image TM1 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the display. Here, after “30” is displayed as the timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54C, the next timer value enlarged display effect is started. Specifically, the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the timer image TM1 is displayed together with the current timer value in an expanded state. For example, when the timer image TM1 (current timer value) is "30", the value "29" to be displayed next is displayed together with the current timer value "30" in a state of being enlarged. In FIG. 54 (C), the next timer value image NT representing “29” is enlarged and displayed in an inclined state at a position not overlapping with the current timer value “30”. Since the next timer value image NT representing "29" is displayed in an enlarged scale, a part of the next timer value image NT is sometimes out of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (D), a reduction rotation effect of the next timer value image NT is executed. Specifically, the next timer value image NT moves toward the timer image TM1 while being rotated and reduced, and overlaps the timer image TM1. Thereafter, the reduction continues while overlapping the timer image TM1, and the display position approaches the size and direction of the numeral part (counter value part) of the timer image TM1. Then, when the next timer value image NT substantially matches the size and the display position of the counter value portion of the timer image TM1, as shown in FIG. 54E, the decrement of the timer image TM1 is completed. Here, the next timer value image NT representing "29" is reduced so that the size and the display position coincide with the "30" portion of the timer image TM1, and "29" of the next timer value image NT and the timer image Immediately after the size and position of the TM1 “30” match, the timer image TM1 becomes “29”. The timing at which the timer value of the timer image TM1 is replaced with the timer value of the next timer value image NT may be immediately before or after the next timer value image NT matches the timer image TM1.

  In the next timer value display effect B, the content of the next timer value display effect changes at random. As one example, as shown in FIG. 54F, when the timer value is predetermined (here, “5”), the timer image TM1 is decremented as it is without displaying the next timer value. Ru. Further, as another example, as shown in FIG. 54 (G), the same effect as the next timer value display effect A is performed. That is, the next timer value image NT representing "3" having transparency and overlapping the current timer value "4" is enlarged and displayed, and the upper end and the lower end of the numeral "4" protrude from the display screen 7a. Then, the next timer value image NT representing "3" is reduced so that the size and the display position coincide with the "4" portion of the timer image TM1, and "3" of the next timer value image NT and the timer image TM1. As shown in FIG. 54H, the timer image TM1 is replaced with “4” immediately after “4” of “4” matches the size and position. Thus, the decrement of the timer image TM1 is completed.

  As described above, when the countdown is performed while repeating the next timer value display effect with random contents, as shown in FIG. 54I, the timer zero display effect where the timer value becomes 0 (zero) is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (J), at the position where the timer image TM1 has been displayed, an expectation degree suggestion image EI1 indicating the expectation degree of the jackpot in the variation is displayed. After that, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed.

[Next timer value display effect C]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect C. In the next timer value display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), the decorative symbol fluctuation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), the first timer image TM1 is displayed. At this time, the variable display disappears from the display screen 7a. The variable display may be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The first timer image TM1 includes a two-digit numeric image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The first timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, an area image, a pattern image, etc. other than the number image. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the first timer image TM1 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the display. Here, after “30” is displayed as the first timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

  While the countdown of the first timer image TM1 is being performed, as shown in FIG. 54C, the second timer image TM2 is newly displayed. The second timer image TM2 has the same configuration as the first timer image TM1. The second timer image TM2 may have a configuration different from that of the first timer image TM1. The countdown is started immediately after the second timer image TM2 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the display. Here, after “09” is displayed as the second timer image TM2, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, "09" means 9 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 55 (D) to 55 (G), in each of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2, similarly to the next timer value display effect A, the next timer value enlarged display effect The countdown is executed while sequentially repeating the next timer value reduction effect and the decrement completion effect. Specifically, in the next timer value enlargement display effect, when the timer value of the first timer image TM1 reaches a predetermined value (first value), the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the first timer image TM1 Is displayed together with the current timer value in an expanded state. In addition, when the timer value of the second timer image TM2 reaches a predetermined value (second value), with the current timer value in a state where the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the second timer image TM2 is expanded. It is displayed together. The first value and the second value that trigger the start of the next timer value enlarged display effect may be the same value or different values. Further, the next timer value enlarged display effect may be started at the same timing as the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2, or may be started at different timings. Further, when the timings are different, the first timer image TM1 may be started first, and the second timer image TM2 may be started first.

  In FIG. 55 (D), the next timer value enlargement display effect is executed in both of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2. In the state where the first timer image TM1 (the current timer value) is “05” and the next timer value image NT1 representing the value “4” to be displayed next is enlarged, the current timer value “05” It is displayed together. The next timer value image NT1 has transparency, and the first timer image TM1 is visible through the next timer image NT1. Since the next timer value image NT1 is enlarged and displayed, it is larger than the first timer image TM1, and the upper end and the lower end of the numeral "4" are images that are out of the display screen 7a. In the state where the second timer image TM2 (current timer value) is "09" and the next timer value image NT2 representing the value "8" to be displayed next is enlarged, the current timer value "09" and It is displayed together.

  In the first timer image TM1 of FIG. 55 (E), a reduction effect of the next timer value image NT1 is executed. Specifically, the size and the display position of the next timer value image NT1 approach the numeral portion (counter value portion) of the first timer image TM1 while reducing the second timer value image NT1 in a state of overlapping with the first timer image TM1. Then, when the next timer value image NT1 has substantially the same size and display position as the counter value portion of the first timer image TM1, as shown in FIG. 55 (F), the decrement of the first timer image TM1 is completed. .

  The second timer image TM2 of FIG. 55E shows a state in which the reduction effect of the next timer value image NT2 is ended and the decrement is completed. In the second timer image TM2 of FIG. 55 (F), the next timer value enlargement display effect is executed. In the first timer image TM1 of FIG. 55 (G), the next next timer value enlargement display effect is executed. In the second timer image TM2 of FIG. 55 (G), the decrement is completed after the reduction effect of the next timer value image NT1. The timing of decrementing of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2 may be the same or different.

  As described above, in each of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2, when the countdown is executed while repeating the next timer value enlargement display effect, the next timer value reduction effect, and the decrement completion effect, as shown in FIG. As shown in H), in the first timer image TM1, a timer zero display effect is performed in which the timer value becomes 0 (zero). After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (I), the first expected degree suggesting image EI1 is displayed at the position where the first timer image TM1 was displayed, which suggests the expected degree of the jackpot in the variation. In the second timer image TM2 of FIG. 55 (I), the timer zero display effect is performed such that the timer value becomes 0 (zero), and in FIG. 55 (J), at the position where the second timer image TM2 was displayed. Then, a second expectation level suggestion image EI2 is displayed that indicates the expectation level of the jackpot in the variation. The second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is an image that suggests that the expectation degree is higher than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Next timer value display effect D]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect D. In the next timer value display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), the first timer image TM1 is displayed. At this time, the variable display disappears from the display screen 7a. The variable display may be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The first timer image TM1 includes a two-digit numeric image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The first timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, an area image, a pattern image, etc. other than the number image. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the first timer image TM1 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the display. Here, after “30” is displayed as the first timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

  While the countdown of the first timer image TM1 is being performed, as shown in FIG. 54C, the second timer image TM2 is newly displayed. The second timer image TM2 has a configuration different from that of the first timer image TM1. The configuration of each will be described later. The countdown is started immediately after the second timer image TM2 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the display. Here, after “08” is displayed as the second timer image TM2, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, "08" means 8 seconds.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 (C) to 55 (G), the first timer image TM1 is decremented while sequentially repeating the next timer value movement display effect and the decrement completion effect. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 56C, in the next timer value movement display effect, “04” which is the next timer value image NT1 is displayed above “05” which is the first timer image TM1. Be done. The next timer value image NT1 is an image representing a value to be displayed next by the first timer image TM1. As shown in FIG. 56 (D), "04" of the next timer value image NT1 moves downward, and a portion is covered with "05" of the first timer image TM1 and disappears. As shown in FIG. 56E, when "04" of the next timer value image NT1 moves to the position of "05" of the first timer image TM1 and is covered by the first timer image TM1 and completely disappears, The value of the first timer image TM1 is decremented by one. As shown in FIGS. 56 (F) to 56 (G), this procedure is repeated to count down the first timer image TM1.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (C) to FIG. 55 (G), the second timer image TM2 is counted down while sequentially repeating the timer value movement effect and the decrement completion effect. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 56C, “07” which is the next timer value image NT2 is displayed above “08” which is the second timer image TM2, and the second timer image TM2 is displayed. “09” which is the previous timer value image PT2 is displayed below. The next timer value image NT2 is an image representing a value to be displayed next by the second timer image TM2. The previous timer value image PT2 is an image representing the value displayed immediately before the second timer image TM2. A triangular arrow image YG is displayed on the left side of the second timer image TM2. As shown in FIG. 56D, “07” of the next timer value image NT2, “08” of the second timer image TM2, and “09” which is the previous timer value image PT2 are drawn downward while drawing an arc. Moving. Then, as shown in FIG. 56E, the second timer image TM2 is located at the position where the second timer image TM2 was displayed, that is, “07” of the next timer value image NT2 is positioned on the right side of the arrow image YG. The decrement of the image TM2 is completed. As shown in FIGS. 56 (F) to 56 (G), this procedure is repeated to count down the second timer image TM2. The timing of decrementing of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2 may be the same or different.

  As described above, when the countdown is executed in each of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2, as shown in FIG. 56 (H), the timer value is 0 (zero in the first timer image TM1). The timer zero display effect is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (I), the first expected degree suggesting image EI1 is displayed at the position where the first timer image TM1 was displayed, which suggests the expected degree of the jackpot in the variation. In the second timer image TM2 of FIG. 56 (I), the timer zero display effect is performed such that the timer value becomes 0 (zero), and in FIG. 56 (J), at the position where the second timer image TM2 was displayed. Then, a second expectation level suggestion image EI2 is displayed that indicates the expectation level of the jackpot in the variation. The second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is an image that suggests that the expectation degree is higher than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of next timer value display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, in the state where the timer image TM is displayed on the display screen 7a, it is displayed after the first timer value represented by the timer image TM1. It is possible to execute the next timer value display effect in which the next timer image NT representing the second timer value is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the next timer value display effect, the next timer image NT representing the second timer value is displayed overlapping at least one minute of the timer image TM1. Be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the next timer value display effect, the next timer image NT representing the second timer value has transparency, and the timer image TM1 is displayed. Is visible through the next timer image NT. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the next timer value display effect, the next timer image NT representing the second timer value is a timer image TM1 representing the first timer value. After being displayed as a large image, the first timer value is reduced to be included in the displayed image area, and the second timer value becomes the timer image TM1 by replacing the first timer value. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the next timer value display effect, the next timer image NT representing the second timer value has a portion of the second timer value from the display screen 7a. It is displayed as an image that seems to stick out. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, the next timer value display effect is started after the timer value represented by the timer image TM1 becomes a predetermined value. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of next timer value display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the next timer value display effect in FIGS. 53 to 56, the timer image TM has been described as counting down. However, the timer image TM may count up. Also, the count value is not limited to a number, and may be a specific character, figure, symbol or the like. For example, the countdown may be a mode in which images such as rabbits, turtles, and bears are displayed in order. It may also be Roman numerals.

[Modification 2]
The next timer value display effects of FIGS. 53 to 56 may be combined as appropriate. For example, the timer image TM in FIG. 53 may be in the same mode as the second timer image TM2 in FIG. Moreover, each next timer value display production of FIGS. 53-56 does not need to be equipped with a part of production. For example, in FIG. 53, the expectation degree indication image EI1 may not be displayed.
[Modification 3]
In the next timer value display effect of FIGS. 53 to 56, the timer value of the timer image TM is finally zero. However, the timer value of the timer image TM may end at other than zero. For example, after the timer value of the timer image TM becomes a number other than zero (for example, 2), the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 may be displayed.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a timer image representing a timer value,
In a state where the timer image is displayed on the display means, an effect that an image showing a second timer value to be displayed next to the first timer value represented by the timer image is displayed on the display means A game machine characterized by being capable of performing.
[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
In the effect, an image representing the second timer value is displayed overlapping at least one minute of the timer image.
[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-2,
In the effect, an image representing the second timer value is displayed as an image having transparency, and the timer image becomes visible through an image representing the second timer value. Machine.
[Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-3,
In the effect, after the image representing the second timer value is displayed as an image larger than the image representing the first timer value, the image may fall within the image area where the first timer value is displayed. A game machine characterized in that the second timer value becomes the timer image by reducing to and replacing the first timer value.
[Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-4,
In the effect, an image representing the second timer value is displayed as an image in which a part of the second timer value is out of the display means.
態 様 [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-5,
A game machine characterized in that the effect is started after a timer value represented by the timer image reaches a predetermined value.

  The timer display frequency indication effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. The timer indication number suggestive effect may be executed during the change of the special symbol or the like. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and the instruction to execute the timer display frequency indication effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are outputted from the ROM 103. It is an effect of reading out and displaying an image on the display screen 7a. The timer indication number suggestive effect is performed during one change (one change effect) of the special symbol. In addition, the timer display frequency suggestion effect may be performed during a plurality of changes (a plurality of change effects) of the special symbol.

[Timer indication number indication production A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the timer display frequency suggestion effect A.
In the timer display frequency suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the timer display frequency suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), the first timer count suggestion display effect is executed. In the first timer count suggestion display effect, the timer display area XA1 and the character CRA are displayed. The timer display area XA1 is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. In the timer display area XA1, a timer count indication XA2 is displayed in the upper area. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (noticing) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 57 (B), the timer count suggestion display XA2 is shown as "2 times after timer", which suggests that the timer display appears twice after this first timer count suggestion display effect.
The timer count indication XA2 has a function to indicate that the timer display is performed as well as indicating the number of timer displays that may appear in the future.
In addition, the timer display area XA1 is arranged on a fluctuation area in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57C, the first timer display effect is executed. In the first timer display effect, timer display XA3 is executed in the lower area of timer display area XA1. FIG. 57 (C) shows that 70 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After this, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may count up.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (D), chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the character CRA transformed are displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 is displayed with "CHANCE" indicating that the jackpot expectation is medium. There is. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for prompting the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character suggesting the jackpot expectation degree appears newly , A letter indicating the jackpot expectation is displayed anew. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo-sequence effect, a pre-reading effect, a zone effect or the like may be executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (E), the second timer count suggestion display effect is executed. In the second timer count suggestion display effect, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed in the upper area of the timer display area XA1. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (noticing) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 57E, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is shown as “1 time after timer”, which suggests that the timer display appears once after the second timer count suggestion display effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57F, the second timer display effect is executed. In the second timer display effect, timer display XA3 is executed in the lower area of timer display area XA1. FIG. 57F shows that 30 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After this, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may count up.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (G), chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the character CRA transformed are displayed. The chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 displays a display of "super heat" indicating that the jackpot expectation is high. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for prompting the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character suggesting the jackpot expectation degree appears newly , A letter indicating the jackpot expectation is displayed anew. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo-sequence effect, a pre-reading effect, a zone effect or the like may be executed.

[Timer indication number indication production B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the timer display frequency suggestion effect B.
In the timer display frequency indication effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the timer display frequency suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), the first timer count suggestion display effect is executed. In the first timer count suggestion display effect, the timer display area XA1 and the character CRA are displayed. The timer display area XA1 is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. In the timer display area XA1, a timer count indication XA2 is displayed in the upper area. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (noticing) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 58 (B), the timer count suggestion display XA2 is shown as "2 times after timer", which suggests that the timer display appears twice after the first timer count suggestion display effect.
In addition, the timer display area XA1 is arranged on a fluctuation area in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58C, the first timer display effect is executed. In the first timer display effect, the timer count indication XA2 is continuously displayed in the upper area of the timer display area XA1, and the timer display XA3 is executed in the lower area of the timer display area XA1. In this case, since the first timer display effect has been performed, the timer count indication XA2 is indicated as "1 time after timer", and the timer count is suggested compared to the first timer number indication display effect. It is reduced by one, which suggests that the timer display appears one more time. In FIG. 58 (C), it is shown that 70 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After this, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may count up.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (D), chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the timer display area XA1, the button display XA4, and the character CRA transformed are displayed. In the timer display area XA1, the timer count indication XA2 is continuously displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 is displayed with "CHANCE" indicating that the jackpot expectation is medium. There is. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for prompting the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character suggesting the jackpot expectation degree appears newly , A letter indicating the jackpot expectation is displayed anew. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo-sequence effect, a pre-reading effect, a zone effect or the like may be executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (E), the second timer count suggestion display effect is executed. In the second timer count suggestion display effect, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed in the upper area of the timer display area XA1. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (noticing) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future, and in FIG. 58E, the timer count suggestion display XA2 indicates “1 time after timer”. It is suggested that the timer display appears one more time after this second timer number suggestion display effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58F, a second timer display effect is executed. In the second timer display effect, timer display XA3 is executed in the lower area of timer display area XA1. FIG. 58F shows that 30 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After this, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may count up.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (G), chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the character CRA transformed are displayed. The chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 displays a display of "super heat" indicating that the jackpot expectation is high. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for prompting the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character suggesting the jackpot expectation degree appears newly , A letter indicating the jackpot expectation is displayed anew. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo-sequence effect, a pre-reading effect, a zone effect or the like may be executed.

[Timer indication number indication production C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the timer display frequency suggestion effect C.
In the timer display frequency indication effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the timer display frequency suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the first timer count suggestion display effect is executed. In the first timer count suggestion display effect, the timer display area XA1 and the character CRA are displayed. The timer display area XA1 is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. In the timer display area XA1, a timer count indication XA2 is displayed in the upper area. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (noticing) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 59 (B), the timer count suggestion display XA2 is shown as "2 times after timer", which suggests that the timer display appears twice after this first timer count suggestion display effect.
In addition, the timer display area XA1 is arranged on a fluctuation area in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), a timer standby effect is executed. In the timer standby effect, the timer standby indication XA5 is displayed in the lower area of the timer display area XA1. The timer count indication XA2 is continuously displayed. The timer waiting indication XA5 is indicated as "waiting for XX seconds", and indicates that the timer display is waiting and is about to start. In this case, the number of “X” in the timer standby indication XA5 is the same as the number of digits of the initial value of the timer display. For example, if the initial value of the timer display is an integer from 1 to 9, the number of "X" in the timer standby indication display XA5 is one and "X seconds on standby" is displayed, and the initial value of the timer display is If it is an integer of 100 or more, the number of "X" in the timer standby indication XA5 may be three, and "XXX seconds waiting" may be displayed. Moreover, not only "X" but another alphabet may be sufficient, and symbols, such as "(circle)", "(square)", "(triangle | delta)", "?", "!", May be sufficient.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (D), the first timer display effect is executed. In the first timer display effect, the timer count indication XA2 is continuously displayed in the upper area of the timer display area XA1, and the timer display XA3 is executed in the lower area of the timer display area XA1. In this case, since the first timer display effect has been performed, the timer count indication XA2 is indicated as "1 time after timer", and the timer count is suggested compared to the first timer number indication display effect. It is reduced by one, which suggests that the timer display appears one more time. In FIG. 59 (D), it is shown that 70 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After this, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may count up.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the timer display area XA1, the button display XA4, and the character CRA transformed are displayed. In the timer display area XA1, the timer count indication XA2 is continuously displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 is displayed with "CHANCE" indicating that the jackpot expectation is medium. There is. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for prompting the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character suggesting the jackpot expectation degree appears newly , A letter indicating the jackpot expectation is displayed anew. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo-sequence effect, a pre-reading effect, a zone effect or the like may be executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (F), the second timer count suggestion display effect is executed. In the second timer count suggestion display effect, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed in the upper area of the timer display area XA1. Timer number suggestion display XA2 is a indication for suggesting (noticing) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future, and in FIG. 59 (F), timer count suggestion display XA2 indicates "1 time after timer". It is suggested that the timer display appears one more time after this second timer number suggestion display effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (G), a second timer display effect is executed. In the second timer display effect, timer display XA3 is executed in the lower area of timer display area XA1. In FIG. 59 (F), it is shown that 30 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After this, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may count up.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59H, chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the character CRA transformed are displayed. The chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 displays a display of "super heat" indicating that the jackpot expectation is high. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for prompting the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character suggesting the jackpot expectation degree appears newly , A letter indicating the jackpot expectation is displayed anew. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo-sequence effect, a pre-reading effect, a zone effect or the like may be executed.

[Timer indication number indication production D]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the timer display frequency suggestion effect D.
In the timer display frequency indication effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 60A, a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the timer display frequency suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the first timer count suggestion display effect is executed. In the first timer count suggestion display effect, the timer display area XA1 and the character CRA are displayed. The timer display area XA1 is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. In the timer display area XA1, a timer count indication XA2 is displayed in the upper area. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (noticing) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 60 (B), the timer count suggestion display XA2 is shown as "2 times after timer", which suggests that the timer display appears twice after this first timer count suggestion display effect.
In addition, the timer display area XA1 is arranged on a fluctuation area in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), a timer standby effect is executed. In the timer standby effect, the timer standby indication XA5 is displayed in the lower area of the timer display area XA1. The timer count indication XA2 is continuously displayed. The timer waiting indication XA5 is indicated as "waiting for XX seconds", and indicates that the timer display is waiting and is about to start. In this case, the number of “X” in the timer standby indication XA5 is the same as the number of digits of the initial value of the timer display. For example, if the initial value of the timer display is an integer from 1 to 9, the number of "X" in the timer standby indication display XA5 is one and "X seconds on standby" is displayed, and the initial value of the timer display is If it is an integer of 100 or more, the number of "X" in the timer standby indication XA5 may be three, and "XXX seconds waiting" may be displayed. Moreover, not only "X" but another alphabet may be sufficient, and symbols, such as "(circle)", "(square)", "(triangle | delta)", "?", "!", May be sufficient.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60D, the first timer display effect is executed. In the first timer display effect, the timer count indication XA2 is continuously displayed in the upper area of the timer display area XA1, and the timer display XA3 is executed in the lower area of the timer display area XA1. In this case, since the first timer display effect has been performed, the timer count indication XA2 is indicated as "1 time after timer", and the timer count is suggested compared to the first timer number indication display effect. It is reduced by one, which suggests that the timer display appears one more time. FIG. 60D shows that 70 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After this, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may count up.

  Further, during this first timer display effect, an effect effect in which the second movable role object 15 moves to the unfolded position is performed. In this feature presentation, the second movable role 15 is viewed from the player, and at least a part of the timer display area XA1 (timer count indication XA2 and timer display XA3) and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. cover.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60E, chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the timer display area XA1, the button display XA4, and the character CRA transformed are displayed. In the timer display area XA1, the timer count indication XA2 is continuously displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 is displayed with "CHANCE" indicating that the jackpot expectation is medium. There is. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for prompting the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character suggesting the jackpot expectation degree appears newly , A letter indicating the jackpot expectation is displayed anew. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo-sequence effect, a pre-reading effect, a zone effect or the like may be executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60F, the second timer count suggestion display effect is executed. In the second timer count suggestion display effect, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed in the upper area of the timer display area XA1. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (noticing) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future, and in FIG. 60F, the timer count suggestion display XA2 indicates “1 time after timer”. It is suggested that the timer display appears one more time after this second timer number suggestion display effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60G, a second timer display effect is executed. In the second timer display effect, timer display XA3 is executed in the lower area of timer display area XA1. FIG. 60F shows that 30 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After this, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may count up.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60H, chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the character CRA transformed are displayed. The chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 displays a display of "super heat" indicating that the jackpot expectation is high. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for prompting the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character suggesting the jackpot expectation degree appears newly , A letter indicating the jackpot expectation is displayed anew. As the chance-up effect, a pseudo-sequence effect, a pre-reading effect, a zone effect or the like may be executed.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned timer display frequency suggestion effects A to D, other effects (other timer display frequency suggestive effects etc.) may be incorporated as one effect.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of timer indication frequency suggestion production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the timer indication frequency suggestive effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changed, the timer frequency suggestion display XA2 is performed, and the timer frequency suggestion display XA2 is performed. After the timer display XA3 is performed. According to this configuration, since the timer count suggestion display XA2 is performed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fluctuating, the player can look forward to the presentation on what scene the timer display appears. Since the timer display XA3 is performed after the timer count suggestion display XA2 is performed, when the timer display XA3 is displayed, an expectation for future development can be given while considering the remaining number of the timer display. it can. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the timer display frequency suggestive effects A to D, the timer display XA3 is displayed in a variable display area in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the timer display XA3 pay more attention to the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and to allow the player to have a sense of expectation for future development. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the timer display frequency suggestive effects A to D, the timer frequency suggestive display XA2 is displayed in a variable display area in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the timer count indication XA2 pay more attention to the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and to allow the player to have a sense of expectation for future development. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the timer display frequency suggestive effects A to D, the number of times the timer display suggested by the timer frequency suggestive display XA2 is performed in the first timer frequency suggestive display effect is two or more. According to this configuration, when the timer count suggestion display XA2 appears, the timer display is performed a plurality of times, so that the player can increase the attention degree with respect to the timer count suggestion display XA2. . As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the timer display frequency indication effects A to D, after the first timer frequency indication display effect, the first timer display effect is performed, and then the second timer frequency indication display effect is performed, and the second timer frequency indication display In the effect, it is suggested that the timer count suggestion display XA2 performs timer display of the number of times smaller by one than the timer count suggestion display XA2 at the time of the first timer count suggestion display effect. That is, in the second timer count suggestion display effect, "the number of times the timer display is performed from now on" represented by the timer count suggestion display XA2 is "1", and in the first timer count suggestion display effect, the timer count suggestion display XA2 represents “The number of times the timer display is performed from now on” is “2”. According to this configuration, every time the timer display is performed, “the number of times the timer display is performed from now on” represented by the timer count suggestion display XA2 is decremented by 1, so “the timer display is performed in the timer count suggestion display XA2 Can be accurately indicated. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the timer display frequency suggestive effects B to D, in the first timer display effect, the timer frequency suggested display XA2 is continuously displayed while the timer display XA3 is displayed. According to this configuration, the timer count indication XA2 is displayed together with the timer display XA3. Therefore, while enjoying the timer effect of the timer display XA3, the timer count suggestion display XA2 makes a great expectation for the appearance of the next timer effect. It can be granted. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of timer indication frequency suggestion production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the timer indication frequency suggestive effect of the gaming machine of the above-mentioned embodiment,
[Modification 1]
In the timer display frequency suggestion display effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of times suggested by the timer frequency suggestion display XA2 is “2” in the first timer frequency suggestion display effect. The number of times suggested by the timer count indication XA2 is not limited, and may be three or more or one. In the timer display frequency presentation, the timer display for the number of times suggested by the timer frequency suggestion display XA2 is executed. For example, if the number of times indicated by the timer number indication XA2 is “3”, then the timer indication is executed three times.

[Modification 2]
In the timer display frequency suggestion display effect D, the second movable role object 15 is moved to cover the timer display area XA1 by the timer display effect, but also in the timer standby effect, the timer display in the timer standby state You may move so that area | region XA1 may be covered.

[Modification 3]
In the timer display frequency indication display effects A to D, the timer frequency indication display XA2 and the timer display XA3 are displayed in the timer display area XA1, and the timer frequency indication display XA2 and the timer display XA3 are displayed adjacent to each other, The present invention is not limited to this, and the timer count indication XA2 and the timer display XA3 may be displayed separately.

[Modification 4]
In the above-mentioned timer indication count suggestion indication production A-D, when the timer value of timer indication XA3 reaches specified value (zero), it tried to do the chance improvement production, but it is not limited to this, it substitutes the chance improvement production The effect of may be performed. The predetermined effects may include pseudo-sequence effects, preview effects, zone effects, reach effects, super reach effects, mini game effects, and mission effects.

[Modification 5]
In the above timer indication number suggestion indication effects A to D, the timer number suggestion indication XA2 and the timer indication XA3 are displayed on the variation areas of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, but the invention is not limited thereto. The XA2 and / or the timer display XA3 may be displayed in an area different from the fluctuation area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XA-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of changing a decoration pattern,
The second display effect is an effect of performing timer display,
The third display effect is an effect of performing a timer number indication indicating that the timer display is performed a predetermined number of times,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and the third display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, and the third display effect is performed. , The second display effect is performed,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-1,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is displayed in a decorative symbol display area where the decorative symbol is displayed,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XA-3]
A game machine according to aspect XA-1 or aspect XA-2, wherein
In the combination effect, the third display effect is displayed in a decorative symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is displayed,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XA-4]
A game machine according to any one of aspects XA-1 to XA-3, wherein
The predetermined number of times the timer display is performed in the third display effect is two or more.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XA-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-4,
In the combination effect, when the second display effect is performed after the third display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed again, and the third display effect is performed. The timer count suggestion display implies that the timer display is performed a number of times smaller than the predetermined number.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XA-6]
A game machine according to any one of aspects XA-1 to XA-5, wherein
In the combination effect, the timer count indication in the third display effect is continuously displayed during the second display effect.
A game machine characterized by

  The timer count effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This timer count effect is an effect that can be executed in connection with the variation display of the decoration symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "special symbol"), for example, special At the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol, at the start of the fluctuation effect of the decoration symbol, during the fluctuation effect of the decoration symbol, during the reach effect (super reach effect) or the like. More specifically, in this timer count effect, a display for counting a timer value using a timer image and movably controlling the movable body in a predetermined mode every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, or a specific image is specified By changing to the aspect of, it is an effect that indicates that the timer value has been counted for a predetermined time.

[Timer count effect A]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect A.
In the timer count effect A, first, reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 61 (A). On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L in the left symbol display area, and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the symbol display area in the middle The right decoration pattern 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In the reach effect of FIG. 61A, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement, and the decorative symbol 8C indicates that it is in the process of changing (scrolling downward). In this example, the reach symbol arrangement "7 示 7" is shown, and the letters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, in this reach effect, at the four corners of the display screen 7a, the upper right first movable character 14a, the lower right first movable character 14b, the lower left first movable character 14c, and the upper left first movable character 14d The state in which the first movable part 14 is located at the home position (origin) is shown (see FIG. 1).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), the timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, during the reach effect shown in FIG. 61 (A), the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a. In the timer image display area TMH, a part of the effect screen (the display screen of the battle effect) being displayed on the display screen 7a is broken (broken) and can be seen from the torn area, the back of the effect screen being displayed on the display screen 7a It is formed on the side (rear side). The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 61 (B), characters and numbers “fifty seconds” indicating 50 seconds as the timer initial value are displayed with the numbers enlarged from the characters. Further, in this timer display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of reach effect shown in FIG. 61A are erased, and on the display screen 7a, the player-side friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle. An image is displayed, and a battle effect is performed. In this timer display effect, the upper right first movable part 14a, the lower right first movable part 14b, the lower left first movable part 14c, and the upper left first movable part 14d are shown in FIG. 61 (A). As with the reach effect, they are waiting at their home locations (origin).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), on the display screen 7a, a count suggestion upper right character effect is executed. With this timer indication effect shown in FIG. 61B, 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed on the timer image TM and 2 seconds have elapsed (counting down) in the timer indication effect shown in FIG. It shows a state of 48 seconds. Therefore, when the timer value reaches 48 seconds, only the upper right first movable combination 14a of the first movable combination 14 located in the home position is moved, and the first exit position on the display screen 7a is displayed. Advance to That is, the upper right first movable combination 14a is moved when counted down by two seconds from the timer value of the timer display effect shown in FIG. 61 (B). The upper right first movable movable object 14a retracts to the home position immediately after advancing to the first advancing position. In addition, in this count suggestion upper right feature presentation, battle presentation is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), on the display screen 7a, a count suggestion lower right character presentation effect is executed. In this count suggestion lower right feature presentation, in the count suggestion upper right feature presentation shown in FIG. 61C, 2 seconds have elapsed (counting down) after 48 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM It shows the second has been reached. Therefore, when the timer value reaches 46 seconds, only the lower right first movable combination 14b of the first movable combination 14 located in the home position is moved, and the second advance on the display screen 7a is made. Advance to the position. That is, the lower right first movable role object 14b moves when counted down by two seconds from the timer value of the count suggestion upper right object effect shown in FIG. 61 (C). Here, the fluctuation range of the lower right first movable combination 14b is larger than the fluctuation range of the upper right first movable combination 14a shown in FIG. 61 (C). That is, the distance from the home position to the second exit position is larger than the distance from the home position to the first exit position. In addition, the lower right first movable role item 14b retracts to the home position immediately after advancing to the second advancing position. In addition, in this count suggestion lower right feature presentation, battle presentation is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), on the display screen 7a, a count suggestion lower left feature effect is executed. In this count suggestive lower left feature effect, with the count suggest lower right feature effect shown in FIG. 61D, after 46 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM, 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown), and the timer value is 44 It shows the second has been reached. Therefore, when the timer value reaches 44 seconds, only the lower left first movable combination 14c of the first movable combination 14 located in the home position is moved, and the third exit position on the display screen 7a Advance to That is, the lower left first movable role object 14c moves when counted down for 2 seconds from the timer value of the count suggestion lower right object effect shown in FIG. 61 (D). Here, the variation width of the lower left first movable part 14c is larger than the variation width of the lower right first movable part 14b shown in FIG. 61 (D). That is, the distance from the home location to the third exit position is larger than the distance from the home location to the first and second exit positions. The lower left first movable part 14c covers the timer image display area TMH and a part of the timer image TM in a viewable manner in the state of being positioned at the third exit position. That is, the first movable part 14 changes the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM so as to be visible. In addition, after advancing to the 3rd advancing position, the lower left 1st movable movable item 14c is retracted | saved to home positioning immediately. In addition, in this count suggested lower left feature presentation, battle presentation is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), on the display screen 7a, a count suggestion upper left feature effect is executed. In this count suggestion upper left feature effect, with the count suggestion lower left feature effect shown in FIG. 61 (E), 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) after 44 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value is 42 seconds It shows the state of becoming. Therefore, when the timer value reaches 42 seconds, only the upper left first movable combination 14d of the first movable combination 14 located in the home position is moved, and the fourth advanced position on the display screen 7a Advance to That is, the upper left first movable role object 14d moves when it is counted down for 2 seconds from the timer value of the count suggestion lower left object effect shown in FIG. 61 (E). Here, the variation width of the upper left first movable part 14d is larger than the variation width of the lower left first movable part 14c shown in FIG. 61 (E). That is, the distance from the home location to the fourth exit position is larger than the distances from the home location to the first, second, and third exit positions. The upper left first movable role object 14d covers the timer image display area TMH and a part of the timer image TM so as to be visible when in the state of being located at the fourth exit position. That is, the first movable part 14 changes the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM so as to be visible. Note that the upper left first movable role object 14d immediately retracts to the home position after advancing to the fourth advancing position. In addition, in this count suggested lower left feature presentation, battle presentation is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (G), on the display screen 7a, the count suggestion all-features presentation is executed. In this count suggestion whole feature presentation, 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) after 42 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM in the count suggestion upper left feature presentation shown in FIG. 61 (F), and the timer value is 40 seconds. It shows the state of becoming. Thus, when the timer value reaches 40 seconds, all of the first movable combination 14 located at the home position is movable, and advances on the display screen 7a to the fourth exit position. That is, the upper right first movable part 14a, the lower right first movable part 14b, the lower left first movable part 14c, and the upper left first movable part 14d have the count suggested upper left part effect shown in FIG. Movable when counted down 2 seconds from the timer value. That is, in the timer display effect shown in FIG. 61 (B), when 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed on the timer image TM and 10 seconds elapse (countdown), all the first movable role objects 14 move. . In addition, after advancing to the 4th advancing position, all the 1st movable roles 14 are retracted | saved to home positioning immediately. In addition, in this count suggestion all-features rendering, battle rendering is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Thus, in the timer count effect A shown in FIG. 61, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (in this example, every time the timer value is counted for 2 seconds), the first movable part 14 as the movable body is Is movably controlled in a predetermined manner. That is, for example, every time it is counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point for 2 seconds, the upper right first movable combination 14a, the lower right first movable combination 14b, the lower left first The movable part 14c and the upper left first movable part 14d are sequentially (clockwise) moved to indicate that the timer value has been counted for a predetermined time (two seconds). Moreover, each of the first movable characters 14 can advance in four stages from the first advancing position to the fourth advancing position, and the upper right first movable character 14 a is in the first advancing position, the lower right first movement position. 1) The movable character 14b is in the second position, the lower left first movable character 14c is in the third position, the upper left first movable character 14d is in the fourth position, and the fluctuation range on the display screen 7a is different. As it is supposed to fluctuate. Thus, from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point, it is counted for a predetermined time (2, 4, 6, 8 seconds), and both the movable character and its fluctuation range It is possible to suggest by Furthermore, every time it is counted 10 seconds from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point, all the first movable roles 14 move, and the fourth exit on the display screen 7a is made. It is set to advance to the position. In this way, it is suggested that both the number of movable parts and the fluctuation range thereof indicate that the timer value is displayed when the timer is displayed or that a predetermined period of time (10 seconds) is counted from the timer value as the starting point. Is possible.

[Timer count effect B]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect B.
In the timer count effect B, first, although illustration is omitted, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), reach effect is executed. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L in the left symbol display area, and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the symbol display area in the middle The right decoration pattern 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In the reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop at the reach symbol arrangement, and the decorative symbol 8C is in a state of being in motion (in the process of scrolling). Further, in this reach effect, at the four corners of the display screen 7a, the upper right first movable character 14a, the lower right first movable character 14b, the lower left first movable character 14c, and the upper left first movable character 14d The first movable roles 14 are respectively located at home positions (origins) (see FIG. 1).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62A, timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the timer display effect, during the reach effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the center of the left side of the display screen 7 a. In the timer image display area TMH, a part of the effect screen (the display screen of the battle effect) being displayed on the display screen 7a is broken (broken) and can be seen from the torn area, the back of the effect screen being displayed on the display screen 7a It is formed on the side (rear side). The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 62 (A), characters and numbers “fifty seconds” indicating 50 seconds as the timer initial value are displayed with the numbers enlarged from the characters. Further, in this timer display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of reach effect are erased, and on the display screen 7a, an image in which the player-side friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed. Is executed. In this timer display effect, the upper right first movable character 14a, the lower right first movable character 14b, the lower left first movable character 14c, and the upper left first movable character 14d are each home formation as in the reach effect. Waiting at (origin).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), on the display screen 7a, a count suggestion upper right lower left feature effect is executed. With this timer indication effect shown in FIG. 62A, in the timer indication effect shown in FIG. 62A, 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed on the timer image TM, and two seconds have elapsed (counting down). Indicates that 48 seconds have been reached. Thus, when the timer value reaches 48 seconds, the first movable movable object 14a and the lower left, which are disposed diagonally on the display screen 7a, of the first movable character 14 located in the home position. The movable movable object 14c is moved and advanced on the display screen 7a to the first advanced position. That is, the upper right first movable combination 14a and the lower left first movable combination 14c move as a pair when counted down for 2 seconds from the timer value of the timer display effect shown in FIG. 62 (A). The upper right first movable part 14a and the lower left first movable part 14c are immediately retracted to the home position after advancing to the first advancing position. In addition, in the count suggestion upper right lower left feature presentation, the battle presentation is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62C, on the display screen 7a, a count suggestion lower right upper left feature effect is executed. In this count suggestion lower right upper left feature effect, in the count suggestion upper right lower left feature effect shown in FIG. 62 (B), 2 seconds have elapsed (counting down) after 48 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM. Indicates that 46 seconds have been reached. Therefore, when the timer value reaches 46 seconds, the first lower movable first movable object 14b and the upper left of the first movable combination 14 located in the home position are arranged diagonally on the display screen 7a. The first movable part 14d is moved and advanced on the display screen 7a to the second advanced position. That is, the lower right first movable part 14b and the upper left first movable part 14d move in pairs when counted down for two seconds from the timer value of the suggested upper right lower part role effect shown in FIG. 62 (B). Do. Here, the fluctuation width of the lower right first movable part 14b and the upper left first movable part 14d is based on the fluctuation width of the upper right first movable part 14a and the lower left first movable part 14c shown in FIG. 62 (B). Is also getting bigger. That is, the distance from the home position to the second exit position is larger than the distance from the home position to the first exit position. The lower right first movable part 14 b and the upper left first movable part 14 d are retracted to the home position immediately after advancing to the second advancing position. In addition, in this count suggestion lower right upper left feature effect, battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), on the display screen 7a, the count suggestion all-characters rendering is executed. In this count suggestion whole role effect production, 2 seconds have elapsed (counting down) after 46 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM in the count suggestion lower right upper left role effect shown in FIG. 62C. It shows 44 seconds. Thus, when the timer value reaches 44 seconds, all of the first movable combination 14 located at the home position is movable, and advances on the display screen 7a to the fourth exit position. That is, the upper right first movable character 14a, the lower right first movable character 14b, the lower left first movable character 14c, and the upper left first movable character 14d have the count suggested lower right upper left character shown in FIG. It moves when it is counted down 2 seconds from the timer value of the effect. Here, all the fluctuation ranges of the first movable combination 14 are larger than the fluctuation ranges of the lower right first movable combination 14 b and the upper left first movable combination 14 d shown in FIG. 62 (C). That is, the distance from the home location to the fourth exit position is larger than the distance from the home location to the first and second exit positions. In the state where the lower left first movable part 14c and the upper left first movable part 14d are positioned at the fourth advanced position, the timer image display area TMH and a part of the timer image TM are visibly covered. That is, the first movable part 14 changes the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM so as to be visible. In addition, after advancing to the 4th advancing position, all the 1st movable roles 14 are retracted | saved to home positioning immediately. In addition, in this count suggestion all-features rendering, battle rendering is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (E), on the display screen 7a, the skip count suggestion all feature presentation is executed. In this jump count suggested whole feature effect, the timer value displayed on the timer image TM in the count suggested all feature effect shown in FIG. 62 (D) shows a state where it has been changed from 44 seconds to 34 seconds . That is, although 10 seconds have not actually passed since the count suggestion all-effects presentation shown in FIG. 62D (actually, for example, about 2 seconds have passed), the timer value is suddenly set from 34 seconds to 34 seconds. It shows the flight state. Thus, when the timer value reaches 34 seconds, all of the first movable role objects 14 located at the home position move, and fluctuate on the display screen 7a in a predetermined manner. The variation of this predetermined mode is performed as follows. That is, the upper right first movable character 14a, the lower right first movable character 14b, the lower left first movable character 14c, and the upper left first movable character 14d move from the home position to the first advancing position, and then immediately The operation of moving back from the first advancing position to the home position is repeated at high speed a predetermined number of times. That is, as shown by arrows A, B, C and D, the upper right first movable part 14a, the lower right first movable part 14b, the lower left first movable part 14c and the upper left first movable part 14d are homes. It fluctuates by a predetermined amount of time by going back and forth between the position and the first exit position. Here, in FIG. 62 (E), the first advancing position is indicated by a two-dot chain line. It should be noted that all of the first movable roles 14 are positioned at the home position when the variation of the predetermined mode is finished. Further, in this jump count suggested all-features presentation, battle presentation is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), on the display screen 7a, a long count indication upper right lower left combination effect effect is executed. In this long count suggested upper right lower left feature presentation, 14 seconds have elapsed (counting down) after 34 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM in the jump count suggested whole feature presentation shown in FIG. It becomes 20 seconds, and the first upper movable first movable object 14a and the lower left first movable object 14c, which are arranged diagonally on the display screen 7a, of the first movable combination 14 located at the home location are moved The state where the display screen 7a is advanced to the first advance position is shown. That is, when the timer value shown in FIG. 62 (F) reaches 20 seconds, the upper right first movable part 14a and the lower left first movable part 14c move as a pair and advance to the first exit position. Maintain its advanced position. In addition, in the long count suggested upper right lower left role effect, battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (G), on the display screen 7a, the long count suggested lower right upper left feature effect is executed. In this long count suggested lower right upper left feature effect, in the long count suggested upper right lower left feature effect shown in FIG. 62 (F), although 20 seconds have been displayed on the timer image TM, although 2 seconds have elapsed. The timer value indicates that 20 seconds are maintained. Therefore, when 2 seconds have passed from the long count suggested upper right lower left part effect shown in FIG. 62 (F), the upper right first movable part 14a which has advanced to the first advanced position and maintained its advanced state The lower left first movable part 14c retracts to the home position. At the same time, in the first movable combination 14 located at the home location, the lower right first movable combination 14b and the upper left first movable combination 14d, which are arranged diagonally on the display screen 7a, move , Advance to the second exit position on the display screen 7a. That is, the lower right first movable part 14b and the upper left first movable part 14d move as a pair when two seconds have elapsed since 20 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM, until the second exit position Make a fork and maintain that foray. In addition, in the long count suggested lower right upper left feature effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62H, on the display screen 7a, a long count suggested all-features presentation is executed. In this long count suggested all role effect production, 4 seconds have elapsed since 20 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM in the long count suggested upper right lower left role effect shown in FIG. 62 (F) (FIG. 62 (G) Even though 2 seconds have passed since the long count suggested lower right upper left role effect shown, the timer value indicates that 20 seconds are maintained. Therefore, when 4 seconds have passed from the long count suggested upper right lower left part effect shown in FIG. 62 (F), the lower right first movable part 14 b and the upper left first movable part 14 d are maintained second Advance to the fourth advance position from the advance position. At the same time, the upper right first movable combination 14a and the lower left first movable combination 14c, which were located at the home position, respectively advance to the fourth advancing position. That is, when 4 seconds have passed from the long count suggested upper right lower left part effect shown in FIG. 62 (F), the lower right first movable part 14b and the upper left first movable part 14d move in pairs again. , And further advance from the second advance position to the fourth advance position to maintain the advanced state, while the upper right first movable role 14a and the lower left first movable role 14c move again as a pair and move home Advance from the Hoshon to the fourth advance position and maintain that advance status. Thereby, on the display screen 7a, all the first movable roles 14, ie, the upper right first movable roles 14a, the lower right first movable roles 14b, the lower left first movable roles 14c, the upper left first movable role The object 14d is advanced to the fourth advance position, and the advance state is maintained. In addition, in this long count suggestion all-features presentation, battle presentation is still performed on the display screen 7a. After that, although illustration is omitted, 2 seconds have passed from the long count suggestion all-features presentation shown in FIG. 62 (H), that is, 6 seconds have passed from the long count suggestion upper right lower left feature presentation shown in FIG. When this happens, all the first movable roles 14 are retracted from the maintained fourth advance position to the home position, and 14 seconds are displayed as the timer value on the timer image TM.

  As described above, in the timer count effect B shown in FIG. 62, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (every time the timer value is counted for 2 seconds in this example), the first composed of a plurality of movable bodies The predetermined two movable bodies of the movable part 14 are movably controlled in a predetermined manner. That is, for example, the upper right first movable part 14a and the lower left first movable part 14c, or the lower right, are counted every two seconds from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point. The first movable combination 14b and the upper left first movable combination 14d move in a pair to indicate that the timer value has been counted for a predetermined time (two seconds). Moreover, the variation width of the upper right first movable combination 14a, the lower left first movable combination 14c, the lower right first movable combination 14b, and the upper left first movable combination 14d in a pair is different on the display screen 7a. As it is supposed to fluctuate. In this way, it is suggested that both the movable character and its fluctuation range indicate that it has been counted for a predetermined time (2, 4 seconds) from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point. Is possible. In addition, as a special effect in the timer count effect, when the effect that the timer value is counted in the time shorter than the actual elapsed time is performed, or the effect that the timer value is counted in the time longer than the actual elapsed time The movable body is movable in a special variation mode (FIG. 62 (E), FIG. 62 (F) to (H)). This makes it possible to indicate that the movable body has moved in a special fluctuation manner that the timer value has been counted at a time different from the actual elapsed time.

[Timer count effect C]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect C.
In the timer count effect C, first, reach effect is performed as shown in FIG. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L in the left symbol display area, and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the symbol display area in the middle The right decoration pattern 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In the reach effect of FIG. 63 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the reach symbol arrangement, and the decorative symbol 8C indicates that it is in motion (scrolling downward). In this example, the reach symbol arrangement "7 示 7" is shown, and the letters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, in this reach effect, at the four corners of the display screen 7a, the upper right first movable character 14a, the lower right first movable character 14b, the lower left first movable character 14c, and the upper left first movable character 14d The state in which the first movable part 14 is located at the home position (origin) is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, during the reach effect shown in FIG. 63 (A), the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a. In the timer image display area TMH, a part of the effect screen (the display screen of the battle effect) being displayed on the display screen 7a is broken (broken) and can be seen from the torn area, the back of the effect screen being displayed on the display screen 7a It is formed on the side (rear side). The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 63 (B), characters and numbers “fifty seconds” indicating 50 seconds as the timer initial value are displayed with the numbers enlarged from the characters. Further, in this timer display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the reach effect shown in FIG. 63A are erased, and on the display screen 7a, the player-side friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle. An image is displayed, and a battle effect is performed. In this timer display effect, the upper right first movable part 14a, the lower right first movable part 14b, the lower left first movable part 14c, and the upper left first movable part 14d are shown in FIG. 63 (A). As with the reach effect, they are waiting at their home locations (origin).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), on the display screen 7a, a count suggestion upper right character effect is executed. With this timer indication effect shown in FIG. 63 (B), 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed on the timer image TM and 2 seconds elapse (counting down) in the timer indication effect shown in FIG. 63 (B). It shows a state of 48 seconds. Therefore, when the timer value reaches 48 seconds, only the upper right first movable combination 14a of the first movable combination 14 located in the home position is moved, and the fourth advanced position on the display screen 7a Advance to That is, the upper right first movable combination 14a is moved when counted down by two seconds from the timer value of the timer display effect shown in FIG. 63 (B), moves to the fourth advancing position, and maintains the advancing state. In addition, in this count suggestion upper right feature presentation, battle presentation is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), on the display screen 7a, a count suggestion lower right character presentation effect is executed. In this count suggestion lower right feature presentation, in the count suggestion upper right feature presentation shown in FIG. 63 (C), 2 seconds have elapsed (counting down) after 48 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value is 46 It shows the second has been reached. Thus, when the timer value reaches 46 seconds, only the lower right first movable combination 14b of the first movable combination 14 moves and advances on the display screen 7a to the fourth advanced position. That is, the lower-right first movable role 14b moves when it is counted down for 2 seconds from the timer value of the count suggestion upper-right effect shown in FIG. 63C, and moves forward to the fourth exit position. maintain. Thereby, on the display screen 7a, the upper right first movable role 14a and the lower right first movable role 14b of the first movable roles 14 advance to the fourth advanced position and maintain the advanced state It becomes a state. In addition, in this count suggestion lower right feature presentation, battle presentation is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), on the display screen 7a, the count suggestion lower left part effect is executed. In this count-prompt lower left part effect, two seconds have elapsed (counting down) after 46 seconds have been displayed on the timer image TM in the count suggested lower right part effect shown in FIG. 63 (D). It shows the second has been reached. Therefore, when the timer value reaches 44 seconds, only the lower left first movable combination 14c of the first movable combination 14 moves and advances on the display screen 7a to the fourth advanced position. That is, the lower left first movable role 14c is moved when it is counted down for 2 seconds from the timer value of the count suggested lower right side effect shown in FIG. 63 (D), and moves forward to the fourth exit position. maintain. As a result, on the display screen 7a, the first upper movable first object 14a, the lower right first movable object 14b, and the lower left first movable object 14c of the first movable objects 14 advance to the fourth exit position. Then, it will be in the state which maintained the advance state. Further, in the state where the lower left first movable part 14c is positioned at the fourth advanced position, the timer image display area TMH and a part of the timer image TM are visibly covered. That is, the first movable part 14 changes the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM so as to be visible. In addition, in this count suggestion lower left feature presentation, battle presentation is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (F), on the display screen 7a, a count suggestion upper left feature effect is executed. In this count suggested upper left feature effect, with the count suggested lower left feature effect shown in FIG. 63 (E), 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) after 44 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value is 42 seconds It shows the state of becoming. Thus, when the timer value reaches 42 seconds, only the upper left first movable combination 14d of the first movable combination 14 moves and advances on the display screen 7a to the fourth advanced position. That is, the upper left first movable role 14d moves when it is counted down for 2 seconds from the timer value of the count suggested lower left effect shown in FIG. 63 (E), and moves forward to the fourth position and maintains its advanced state Do. Thereby, on the display screen 7a, all the first movable roles 14, ie, the upper right first movable roles 14a, the lower right first movable roles 14b, the lower left first movable roles 14c, the upper left first movable role The object 14d is advanced to the fourth advance position, and the advance state is maintained. Further, in the state where the upper left first movable role object 14d is positioned at the fourth advanced position, the timer image display area TMH and a part of the timer image TM are visibly covered. That is, the first movable part 14 changes the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM so as to be visible. In addition, in this count suggestion lower left feature presentation, battle presentation is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), on the display screen 7a, count suggestion first and second feature effects are executed. In the count suggestion first and second feature effects, in the count suggestion upper left feature effect shown in FIG. 63 (F), two seconds have elapsed (counting down) after 42 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM. Indicates that 40 seconds have been reached. Thus, when the timer value reaches 40 seconds, the second movable combination 15 (see FIG. 1) located at the home position advances on the display screen 7a to the center advanced position. That is, the second movable combination 15 moves when it is counted down for 2 seconds from the timer value of the count suggested upper left combination effect shown in FIG. 63 (F). That is, with the timer display effect shown in FIG. 63 (B), when 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed on the timer image TM and 10 seconds have elapsed (countdown), all the first movable role objects 14 are the fourth. In the state of advancing to the advancing position, the second movable character 15 moves and advances to the central advancing position approximately at the center of the display screen 7a. With the second movable combination 15 advanced to the center advancing position, the second movable combination 15 is the upper right first movable combination 14a on the right and the lower right first movable combination 14b, and the lower left first movable on the left It is located between the character 14c and the upper left first movable character 14d, that is, stopped at a position not overlapping all the first movable characters 14, and visually recognizes a part of the timer image display area TMH and the battle effect Impossible covering (the timer image TM is not covering). In addition, in the count suggestion first and second feature effects, battle effects are continuously executed on the display screen 7a. Thus, after advancing to the central advance position, the second movable role 15 immediately retracts to the home position. At the same time, all of the first movable movable items 14 advanced to the fourth advanced position are retracted to the home position. In addition, in this count suggested lower left feature presentation, battle presentation is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Thus, in the timer count effect C shown in FIG. 63, the first movable combination whose type is different as the movable body every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (every time the timer value is counted for 2 seconds in this example) The object 14 and the second movable part 15 are movably controlled in a predetermined manner. That is, for example, every time it is counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point for 2 seconds, the upper right first movable combination 14a, the lower right first movable combination 14b, the lower left first The movable part 14c, the upper left first movable part 14d, and the second movable part 15 are sequentially moved, indicating that the timer value has been counted for a predetermined time (two seconds). In addition, each of the first movable prizes 14 is made to advance to the predetermined advancing position (the fourth advancing position) and then maintain the advanced state until the second movable prize 15 is moved. As a result, it is counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point for a predetermined time (2, 4, 6, 8 seconds), and both the movable character and its advanced state It is possible to suggest by Furthermore, every time it is counted 10 seconds from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point, all the first movable role objects 14 advance to the predetermined exit position (the fourth exit position). In this state, the second movable character 15 is movable and advanced to a predetermined advancing position (central advancing position). Thereby, from the timer value when the timer is displayed, or from the timer value as the starting point, it is counted for a predetermined predetermined time (10 seconds) from the timer value as the type of movable movable object and its advancing state It is possible to suggest by both.

[Timer count effect D]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect D.
In the timer count effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), the decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 64 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward). Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, at the four corners of the display screen 7a, the upper right first movable character 14a, the lower right first movable character 14b, the lower left first movable character 14c, and the upper left first movable character 14d The first movable objects 14 to be played are respectively located at home positions (origins) (see FIG. 1).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the timer / character display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer / character display effect, the character image CA1 as the specific image is displayed in the character image display area CAH at the left center of the display screen 7a during the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 64 (A). In the character image display area CAH, a part of the effect screen (the display screen of the battle effect) being displayed on the display screen 7a is broken (broken) and can be seen from the broken area. It is formed on the side (rear side). Further, a timer image TM is displayed on the lower right side on the front side of the character image display area CAH. The timer image TM is displayed so as to cover a part of the character image display area CAH (character image CA1) across the character image display area CAH and the effect screen being displayed on the display screen 7a. The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 64 (B), letters and numbers “fifty seconds” indicating 50 seconds as the timer initial value are displayed with the numbers enlarged from the letters. Further, in this timer character display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 64A are erased, and on the display screen 7a, the player side friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB The image which battles with is displayed, and battle production is performed. In this timer / character display effect, the upper right first movable part 14a, the lower right first movable part 14b, the lower left first movable part 14c, and the upper left first movable part 14d are as shown in FIG. Similar to the reach effect shown, each stands by at home location (origin).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64C, a character fade-out effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character fade out effect is the timer character display effect shown in FIG. 64 (B), and the character image CA1 fades out with time immediately after 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed on the timer image TM (in the illustration, The character image CA1 is shown by a dashed line). In this character fade-out effect, the upper right first movable part 14a, the lower right first movable part 14b, the lower left first movable part 14c, and the upper left first movable part 14d are shown in FIG. 64 (B). As with the timer and character display effects, each stands by at home location (origin). In the character fade-out effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), on the display screen 7a, a count suggestion character elimination combination effect is executed. In the timer character display effect shown in FIG. 64 (B), this count suggestion character elimination role product effect is one second after 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed on the timer image TM. It shows that the timer value has reached 49 seconds. Thus, when the timer value reaches 49 seconds, the character image CA1 which has faded out in the character image display area CAH is completely erased. That is, the count of the timer value is decremented by one second at the timing when the character image CA1 disappears. In other words, the character image CA1 becomes difficult to visually recognize every one second, and the timer image TM is switched at the timing when it becomes difficult to visually recognize. In addition, since the character image CA1 fades out from the display mode which can be visually recognized in 1 second to the display mode which is difficult to visually recognize, the visual condition of the character image CA1 during this period suggests the number of seconds of 1 second or less of the timer value. ing. Furthermore, in this count suggestion character elimination role thing production, when the timer value reaches 49 seconds, all of the first movable combination 14 located in the home location is movable, and the second advance on the display screen 7a is made. Advance to the position. In other words, the upper right first movable part 14a, the lower right first movable part 14b, the lower left first movable part 14c, and the upper left first movable part 14d are timers of the timer character display effect shown in FIG. Moves when one second is counted down from the value. In addition, after advancing to the 2nd advancing position, all the 1st movable roles 14 are retracted | saved to home positioning immediately. Further, in this count suggestion character elimination role thing effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64E, on the display screen 7a, a timer / multi-character display effect is executed. The timer / multi-character display effect is an effect to be performed immediately after the character image CA1 is erased by the count suggestion character eraser combination shown in FIG. 64 (D). In this timer / multi-character display effect, character images CA1 and CA2 as specific images are displayed in the character image display area CAH. That is, a plurality of character images are displayed in the character image display area CAH. In this timer / multiple character display effect, the upper right first movable part 14a, the lower right first movable part 14b, the lower left first movable part 14c, and the upper left first movable part 14d are each home formation (origin ), And the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), on the display screen 7a, a count suggestion character reduction effect is executed. This count suggestion character decrease production is the count suggestion character deletion combination production shown in FIG. 64 (D), and one second elapses (counts down) after 49 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value is 48 seconds. It shows the state of becoming. Although illustration is omitted, while one second elapses after 49 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM, only the character image CA2 of the character images CA1 and CA2 fades out with time. Thus, when the timer value reaches 48 seconds, the character image CA2 which has faded out in the character image display area CAH is completely erased. That is, the count of the timer value is decremented by one second when the character image CA2 disappears. In this count suggestion character decrease effect, the upper right first movable part 14a, the lower right first movable part 14b, the lower left first movable part 14c, and the upper left first movable part 14d are each home formation (origin). In the display screen 7a, the battle effect is still executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (G), on the display screen 7a, a count suggestion character elimination combination thing effect is executed. This count suggestion character elimination role thing production is count suggestion character decrease production which is shown in figure 64 (F), 1 second passes (counting down) after 48 seconds are indicated in timer picture TM, the timer value is 47 seconds It shows the state of becoming. Although illustration is omitted, the character image CA1 fades out with the lapse of time while 1 second elapses after 48 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM. Thus, when the timer value reaches 47 seconds, the character image CA1 faded out in the character image display area CAH is completely erased. That is, the count of the timer value is decremented by one second at the timing when the character image CA1 disappears. In other words, when 2 seconds pass after 49 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM, both the character images CA1 and CA2 are completely erased, and the timer value count is 2 at the timing when both the character images CA1 and CA2 disappear. Seconds are subtracted. That is, the count of the timer value is decremented by the number of seconds of the number of erased character images (for example, when three character images are erased, the count of the timer value is decremented by 3 seconds). Further, in this count suggestion character elimination combination product effect, when the timer value reaches 47 seconds, all of the first movable combination 14 located in the home location is movable, and the fourth entry on the display screen 7a is made. Advance to the position. That is, the upper right first movable part 14a, the lower right first movable part 14b, the lower left first movable part 14c, and the upper left first movable part 14d are timers for the count suggestion character reduction effect shown in FIG. Moves when one second is counted down from the value. In addition, after advancing to the 4th advancing position, all the 1st movable roles 14 are retracted | saved to home positioning immediately. Further, in this count suggestion character elimination role thing effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64H, the reach effect is performed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, after all the first movable roles 14 shown in FIG. 64 (G) return to the home position, the timer image TM, the character image display area CAH, and the battle effect displayed on the display screen 7a. The screen of is switched, and the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 64 (A) is displayed, indicating that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. That is, in this reach effect, a plurality of character images are displayed by the timer / multi-character display effect shown in FIG. 64 (E) or the count suggestion character elimination character object effect shown in FIG. 64 (G), This is performed when all the first movable characters 14 advance to the fourth advancing position, that is, a plurality of character images are displayed and the first movable characters 14 advance to the fourth advancing position. , It has become a chance up production.

  Thus, in the timer count effect D shown in FIG. 64, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (in this example, every time the timer value is counted for one second), the character image as the specific image is in a predetermined mode. Is supposed to change. That is, for example, the display mode is changed from the display mode in which the character image can be recognized to the display mode in which the character image is difficult to be viewed from the timer value when the timer is displayed or one second after the timer value serving as the starting point. . In addition, when the character image changes to a display mode in which the visual recognition is difficult, all the first movable role objects 14 are advanced to a predetermined advanced position. As a result, counting from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point for a predetermined time (one second) is a change in the display mode of the character image as a specific image and a predetermined bonus item It is possible to suggest both by the movement of Furthermore, effects such as displaying a plurality of character images or changing the advancing position of the first movable character 14 are performed. As a result, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation of the variation of the decorative symbol depending on the number of displayed character images and the advancing position of the movable character.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of timer count production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, the movable body is movably controlled in a predetermined manner each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time. In addition, the movable body is formed of a highly permeable member, and is configured to move the timer value so as to be visible regardless of how it is controlled to move. According to this configuration, even if the player does not watch the timer value, it is counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point for a predetermined time only by looking at the movable body. It will be understood. As a result, for example, in such an effect that an advantageous benefit is likely to be awarded when the player is counted up to a specific timer value (the jackpot expectation increases), the timer value to which the advantageous benefit is likely to be awarded. Will be easily understood. In addition, by moving the movable body in various manners, it is possible to perform not only the timer value but also an effect that suggests provision of an advantageous benefit (big hit expectation). For example, every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, any one of the plurality of movable bodies can be moved in a predetermined manner, or at least two or more of the plurality of movable bodies can be moved in a predetermined manner It also becomes possible to As a result, the player gazes with expectation to see which of the plurality of movable bodies has moved, or how many of the plurality of movable bodies have moved. Become. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, the plurality of movable bodies are sequentially (clockwise) moved each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, and each of the movable bodies is moved. The range of fluctuation from the home position is configured to be different. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest that both the movable movable body and the fluctuation range thereof count from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point for a predetermined time. It has become. Furthermore, every time the specific number of seconds is counted, the movable body is all movable, and is advanced to the advanced position having the largest fluctuation range. Thereby, from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point, it is counted that a specific number of seconds (for example, the number of seconds such as 10 seconds with a good break) of the movable movable body It is possible to suggest both by the number and the fluctuation range. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, one pair of movable bodies of the plurality of paired movable bodies is moved, Moreover, the plurality of pairs of movable bodies are configured such that the variation range from the home position when moving in pairs is different. According to this configuration, it is suggested that both of the movable body in the movable pair and its fluctuation range indicate that the timer is counted for a predetermined time from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point. It becomes possible. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, when a timer value is counted in a time shorter than the actual elapsed time as a special effect in the timer count effect, or When an effect in which the timer value is counted is performed in a time longer than the elapsed time, the movable body is configured to move in a special variation manner. According to this configuration, the movable body has a special variation mode different from the normal variation mode when suggestion of provision of an advantageous benefit (big hit expectation degree) in a special effect in such timer count production is performed. Since it is movable, this makes it easy for the player to easily see that the suggestion of the provision of the advantageous benefit has been made only by seeing that the movable body has made a special variation. That is, the player gazes with a sense of expectation whether or not the movable body moves in a special variation mode. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, the plurality of movable bodies are sequentially (clockwise) moved, and each of the plurality of movable bodies is After sequentially advancing to a predetermined advancing position, the advancing state is maintained until all movable bodies move. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest that both the movable movable body and its advancing state indicate that the timer has been counted for a predetermined time from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point. Become. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, movable bodies of different types are simultaneously moved each time the specific number of seconds is counted. According to this configuration, it is possible to move from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point to a specific number of seconds (for example, a good number of seconds such as 10 seconds of a break). It is possible to suggest by the type of movable body. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, the character image as the specific image is changed to a predetermined mode each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time. More specifically, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, it is configured to change from a display mode in which the character image as the specific image can be viewed to a display mode in which the character image is difficult to view. According to this configuration, it is suggested that the display mode of the character image as the specific image is changed from the timer value at the time the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point being counted for a predetermined time. Becomes possible. Furthermore, when the character image changes to a display mode in which the visual recognition is difficult, the movable body is advanced to a predetermined advancing position. Thus, it is suggested that both the change in the display mode of the character image as the specific image and the movement of the movable body indicate that the timer is counted for a predetermined time from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point. It will be possible to As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of timer count production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 64, the movable body is disposed so as to be visible from the player in the state of being positioned at the home position, but the present invention is limited thereto. It is not a thing. For example, the movable body may be arranged so as not to be visible to the player when in the home position. Alternatively, only a specific movable combination of the plurality of movable bodies may be arranged so as to be visible to the player. With this configuration, every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, the movable body suddenly appears from a position invisible to the player, so that the motion of the movable body can be impressed on the player, and as a result, the game Can improve the interest of The movable bodies are provided at the four corners of the display screen, but this is not a limitation. For example, the movable bodies may be provided symmetrically in the vertical and horizontal directions other than the four corners of the display screen.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, in the timer display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of reach effect are erased, but the present invention is limited thereto It is not a thing. For example, in the timer display effect, the reach symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed behind the movable bodies (the upper right first movable character 14a and the upper left first movable character 14d) located at the home position. You may do it. In this case, the entire reach symbol may be displayed on the rear side of the movable body. According to this structure, since the movable body has high permeability, it is possible to produce an effect in which the movable body and the reach symbol are related to the eyebrows, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, the effect displayed in place of the decorative symbol by the timer display effect may not be a battle effect, and may be, for example, a step-up effect or a story effect.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 64, a timer image consisting of characters and numbers is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image may be displayed using only numbers. In addition, the timer image may be displayed in various characters and colors, and the characters and colors may indicate the expectation with which the benefit is given. Furthermore, although the timer image shows what is displayed by the countdown system which a timer value counts down, this may be displayed by the count up system which a timer value counts up.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, the movable body is moved every time the timer value is counted for 2 seconds, but the movable body has the timer value other than 2 seconds. It may be movable each time it is counted in time. Further, as shown in FIG. 64, when one character image is displayed as the specific image, the timer value is erased each time when it is counted for one second, and when two characters are displayed, the timer value is counted for two seconds. Each time the character image is erased, the time for which the character image is erased can be arbitrarily set.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, when a plurality of (two) character images are displayed as the specific image, the timer value is incremented by one every predetermined time (for example, one second). Although the information is erased one by one, a plurality (two) may be erased together every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). When the character images are erased one by one, the displayed character image may be associated with the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation may be suggested by the deletion order of the character images. For example, if a character image with a low jackpot expectation disappears before a character image with a high jackpot expectation, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when it later disappears.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, the timer image is displayed in the timer image display area, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image may be displayed so as to cover a part of the timer image display area across the timer image display area and the effect screen being displayed according to the display mode of the timer image shown in FIG. Good.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A3-1]
Movable movable body,
Control means for movably controlling the movable body in a predetermined manner;
Display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects;
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means displays a predetermined timer image as one of the plurality of display effects, and performs an effect including display for counting a timer value using the timer image.
The control means may movably control the movable body in a predetermined manner each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time.
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect A3-2]
A plurality of movable bodies are provided,
Every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, any one of the plurality of movable bodies may move in a predetermined manner.
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1, characterized in that
[Aspect A3-3]
A plurality of movable bodies are provided,
Each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, at least two or more of the plurality of movable bodies may move in a predetermined manner,
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2.
[Aspect A3-4]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
The display means is capable of executing a first predetermined effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is an effect including a display for displaying a predetermined timer image and counting a timer value using the timer image,
The second effect is an effect of changing the specific image into a predetermined mode,
The display means may change the specific image into a predetermined mode each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time.
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect A3-5]
The display unit may change from a display mode in which the specific image can be viewed to a display mode in which the specific image is difficult to view each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time.
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-4, characterized in that

  The timer effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68. This timer effect is an effect that can be executed in connection with the variation display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "special symbol"), for example, the special symbol At the start of the variable display of, the start of the change effect of the decorative symbol, the change effect of the decorative symbol, the reach effect (super reach effect), etc. are executed. More specifically, the timer effect is an effect including a display for counting the timer value using a timer image and a display for stopping or digesting the timer value at a predetermined value, and the timer value is stopped or digested at the predetermined value. This is an effect of simultaneously displaying the specific image in the first display mode and the second display mode when the display effect is performed.

[Timer production A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect A.
In the timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the timer effect executability is performed. In this timer effect executability effect, the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and on the display screen 7a of the image display 7, the left decorative symbol 8L in the left symbol display area, the symbol in A middle decoration pattern 8C is displayed in the display area, and a right decoration pattern 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 65 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).
Further, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, an image in which the ally character CRA on the player side and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed. This battle effect is an effect for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect, and as a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA wins, and the timer is executed when the ally character CRA is eliminated The production is not performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), a timer effect suggestive effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer effect suggestive effect, as a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 65 (A), the character “wins!” Indicating that the teammate character CRA has won is largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying this character "winning!", It is suggested that the timer effect is executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R this time.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (C), the timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the center of the left side of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 65 (A). The timer image display area TMH is displayed on the display screen 7a which is partially broken in the effect screen (the decoration display patterns 8L, 8C and 8R) while being displayed on the display screen 7a and can be seen from the broken area. It is formed on the back side (rear side) of the inside effect screen. The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 65C, 10 seconds as the timer initial value is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the timer digest effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer digestion effect, the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 65 (C) is counted down to 0 seconds during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the timer value is digested. It is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65E, a timer image change presentation is performed on the display screen 7a. The timer image change effect is an effect to be performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this timer image change effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the timer image display area TMH instead of the erased timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is displayed as a specific image related to the awarding of an advantageous benefit to the player, and the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the variation (the jackpot type) according to the type of the specific image (character MKE) Is also suggested). In FIG. 65E, the character MKE "chance" is displayed at substantially the same position as the position at which the timer image TM was displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65F, the specific image superposition effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image superimposing effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are erased from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. 65 (E), and instead of the erased decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, The characters MLG are displayed on the display screen 7a. This character MLG is displayed as a specific image associated with the advantageous award to the player, and includes the jackpot expectation of the variation (the jackpot type expectation according to the type of the specific image (character MLG). Is supposed to suggest. Here, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), the character MLG is constituted by the same character as the character MKE, and is displayed larger than the character MKE behind the character MKE, and a part thereof is displayed by the character MKE. Readable. That is, the character MLG is displayed larger than the character MKE (for example, three to five times larger) substantially at the center of the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH (for example, three to five times) The TMH and the effect image display area EGH are superimposed, and a part thereof is displayed in a mode that can be read by the characters MKE. By displaying the character MLG with the same character as the character MKE, the player can have great expectation for the subsequent development.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), reach effect is performed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the screen of the specific image superposition effect shown in FIG. 65 (F) is switched and performed. That is, the character MLG and the character MKE shown in FIG. 65F are erased, and reach effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in the reach symbol arrangement is executed on the display screen 7a. In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement.

[Timer production B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect B.
In timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), timer effect executability is performed. In this timer effect executability effect, the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and on the display screen 7a of the image display 7, the left decorative symbol 8L in the left symbol display area, the symbol in A middle decoration pattern 8C is displayed in the display area, and a right decoration pattern 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 66 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).
Further, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, an image in which the ally character CRA on the player side and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed. This battle effect is an effect for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect, and as a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA wins, and the timer is executed when the ally character CRA is eliminated The production is not performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), a timer effect suggestive effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer effect suggested suggestion effect, as a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 66 (A), the characters “Win! By displaying this character "winning!", It is suggested that the timer effect is executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R this time.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), the timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the center of the left side of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 66 (A). The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down. The timer image TM shown in FIG. 66 (C) shows 10 seconds as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), the timer stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop effect, the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 66 (C) is counted down to 5 seconds while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fluctuating display, and the timer value is stopped halfway It is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66E, a timer image change presentation is performed on the display screen 7a. The timer image change effect is an effect that is performed when the timer value of the timer image TM is stopped in 5 seconds. In this timer image change effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the timer image display area TMH instead of the erased timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is displayed as a specific image related to the awarding of an advantageous benefit to the player, and the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the variation (the jackpot type) according to the type of the specific image (character MKE) Is also suggested). In FIG. 66E, the character MKE "chance" is displayed at substantially the same position as the position at which the timer image TM was displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66F, the specific image superposition effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image superposition effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are deleted from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. 66 (E), and instead of the erased decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, The characters MLG are displayed on the display screen 7a. This character MLG is displayed as a specific image associated with the advantageous award to the player, and includes the jackpot expectation of the variation (the jackpot type expectation according to the type of the specific image (character MLG). Is supposed to suggest. Here, as shown in FIG. 66 (F), the character MLG is constituted by the same character as the character MKE, and is displayed larger than the character MKE behind the character MKE, and a part thereof is displayed by the character MKE. Readable. That is, the character MLG is displayed larger than the character MKE (for example, three to five times larger) substantially at the center of the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH (for example, three to five times) The TMH and the effect image display area EGH are superimposed, and a part thereof is displayed in a mode that can be read by the characters MKE. By displaying the character MLG with the same character as the character MKE, the player can have great expectation for the subsequent development.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (G), the specific image independent effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image single effect, of the characters MLG and MKE displayed in the specific image superposition effect shown in FIG. 66 (F), the character MKE is erased and only the character MLG is displayed alone on the display screen 7a. Ru. That is, the timer image display area TMH is erased. At this time, the display mode of the character MLG changes in an oblique manner (falling to the right) from the display mode displayed horizontally in the specific image superimposing effect, and is entirely displayed on the display screen 7a. By displaying the entire character MLG, the player can completely visually recognize the character MLG displayed as a specific image related to the advantageous award to the player, and the current gaming state can be more accurately determined. You can grasp and have great expectations for further development.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66H, the reach effect is performed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the screen of the specific image independent effect shown in FIG. 66 (G) is switched and performed. That is, the character MLG shown in FIG. 66 (G) is erased, and reach effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in the reach symbol arrangement is executed on the display screen 7a. In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement.

[Timer production C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect C.
In the timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), the timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the timer display effect, the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L in the left symbol display area, the symbol display area in A middle decoration pattern 8C and a right decoration pattern 8R are displayed in the right symbol display area. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 67 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).
In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed at a predetermined timing in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down. The timer image TM shown in FIG. 67A shows 10 seconds as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the timer digest effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer digestion effect, the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 67 (A) is counted down to 0 seconds while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fluctuating display, and the timer value is digested. It is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), a timer image change presentation is performed on the display screen 7a. The timer image change effect is an effect to be performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this timer image change effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the timer image display area TMH instead of the erased timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is displayed as a specific image related to the awarding of an advantageous benefit to the player, and the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the variation (the jackpot type) according to the type of the specific image (character MKE) Is also suggested). In FIG. 67C, the character MKE "chance" is displayed at substantially the same position as the position at which the timer image TM was displayed. Further, in the timer image change effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are erased, and a plurality of characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3 are displayed on the display screen 7a instead of the erased decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. . The characters MSG1, MSG2 and MSG3 are displayed as specific images related to the advantageous award to the player, and depending on the type of the specific image (characters MSG1, MSG2 and MSG3), the jackpot expectation of the variation It is supposed to indicate (including the expectation of the jackpot type) (jackpot expectation: character MSG1> character MSG2> character MSG3). Here, as shown in FIG. 67C, the characters MSG1, MSG2 and MSG3 are different from the characters MKE (character MSG1 of "superheat", character MSG2 of "hold change", character MSG3 of "NEXT") And is displayed in the same size as the character MKE behind the character MKE. These characters MSG1, MSG2 and MSG3 move the display position so as to rotate in a predetermined direction, and when overlapping with the character MKE during movement, part or all of them pass through the back side of the character MKE to the character MKE It is displayed in a covered manner. That is, the characters MSG1, MSG2 and MSG3 are displayed in the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), the specific image superposition effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image superposition effect, the characters MSG1, MSG2 and MSG3 are erased from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. 67C, and the specific image is substituted for the erased characters MSG1, MSG2 and MSG3. The character MLG is displayed in the effect image display area EGH. This character MLG is the same character as the character MKE, is displayed larger than the character MKE behind the character MKE, and a part of the character MLG is covered by the character MKE so as to be readable. That is, the character MLG is displayed larger than the character MKE (for example, three to five times larger) substantially at the center of the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH (for example, three to five times) The TMH and the effect image display area EGH are superimposed, and a part thereof is displayed in a mode that can be read by the characters MKE. That is, in the timer image change effect (FIG. 67C), the characters MSG1, MSG2 and MSG3 displayed as the specific image do not have the same character ("chance") as the character MKE, and the subsequent specific image superimposition effect ( In FIG. 67 (D), a character MLG as a specific image of the same character as the character MKE is displayed in place of the characters MSG1, MSG2 and MSG3. As described above, when the same character MLG as the character MKE displayed in the timer image display area TMH is displayed in the effect image display area EGH, the jackpot expectation of the variation becomes highest (big hit expectation: character MLG> character MSG1> character MSG2> character MSG3). By displaying the same character MLG as the character MKE, the player can have great expectation for the subsequent development.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67E, the specific image independent effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image single effect, of the characters MLG and MKE displayed in the specific image superposition effect shown in FIG. 67 (D), the character MKE is erased and only the character MLG is displayed alone on the display screen 7a. Ru. That is, the timer image display area TMH is erased. At this time, the display mode of the character MLG changes in an oblique manner (falling to the right) from the display mode displayed horizontally in the specific image superimposing effect, and is entirely displayed on the display screen 7a. By displaying the entire character MLG, the player can completely visually recognize the character MLG displayed as a specific image related to the advantageous award to the player, and the current gaming state can be more accurately determined. You can grasp and have great expectations for further development.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67F, on the display screen 7a, the probability change reach effect is executed. In this probability change reach effect, the screen of the specific image independent effect shown in FIG. 67 (E) is switched and performed. That is, the character MLG shown in FIG. 67E is erased, and on the display screen 7a, the probability variation reach effect in which the left decoration symbol 8L and the right decoration symbol 8R stop at the reach symbol arrangement of the probability variation jackpot is executed. In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. In the present example, the jackpot symbol array "777" is "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot" (probable jackpot), and after the jackpot game is over, the high probability time short state (high probability high base state until the next jackpot) It is a jackpot to become).

  On the other hand, in the specific image superimposing effect, it is assumed that “NEXT” is displayed as the character MLG as shown in FIG. 67 (G) instead of FIG. 67 (D). That is, in the specific image superposition effect shown in FIG. 67 (G), characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3 are erased from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. 67 (C), and the erased characters MSG1, MSG2 , And MSG3, the character MLG is displayed in the effect image display area EGH as a specific image. The character MLG is not the same character as the character MKE ("chance"), but is displayed as a character obtained by enlarging the character MSG3 ("NEXT") (for example, three to five times). That is, in this specific image superimposing effect, MSG3 is selected from the characters MSG1, MSG2 and MSG3 displayed in the timer image change effect (FIG. 67C), and the back side of the timer image display area TMH as the character MLG. The character MKE is displayed larger than the character MKE substantially at the center of the effect image display area EGH located at. As described above, when the character MLG that is not the same as the character MKE displayed in the timer image display area TMH is displayed in the effect image display area EGH, the variation is compared to the case where the same character MLG is displayed. The jackpot expectation is low (jacket expectation: character MLG> character MSG1> character MSG2> character MSG3). By displaying the character MLG which is not identical to the character MKE, the player can not have much expectation for the subsequent development.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67H, the normal reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As described above, when the same character MLG as the character MKE is displayed in the specific image superimposing effect, the specific image independent effect shown in FIG. 67E is performed as an effect to give the player an expectation. However, when a character MLG that is not identical to the character MKE is displayed in the specific image superposition effect, the specific image independent effect is omitted, and the normal reach effect shown in FIG. 67 (H) is executed. In this normal reach effect, the screen of the specific image superposition effect shown in FIG. 67 (G) is switched, and the normal reach effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R normally stop in the reach symbol array of the big hit is displayed on the display screen 7a. To be executed. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "8 ↓ 8". In this example, the jackpot symbol array "888" is "16R (13R substantially) V non-passing jackpot" (usually a jackpot), and after the jackpot game is completed, the number of times of variation of the special symbol is performed 100 times. It is a jackpot that the gaming state becomes the low probability time short state (low probability high base state) and thereafter becomes the low probability low base state (normal state).

[Timer production D]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect D.
In the timer effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 68A, the timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the timer display effect, the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L in the left symbol display area, the symbol display area in A middle decoration pattern 8C and a right decoration pattern 8R are displayed in the right symbol display area. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 68A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).
In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed at a predetermined timing in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down. The timer image TM shown in FIG. 66 (C) shows 10 seconds as the timer initial value. Further, when the timer image TM is displayed, a battle effect is performed in place of the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R at the center of the display screen 7a. Although the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not shown, they are displayed small in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a or the like.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the timer digest effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer digesting effect, the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 68 (A) is counted down to 0 seconds while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fluctuating display, and the timer value is digested. It is shown. Also, on the display screen 7a, battle rendition is continued. In this battle effect, an image in which the ally character CRA on the player side and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68C, a timer image change presentation is performed on the display screen 7a. The timer image change effect is an effect to be performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this timer image change effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the timer image display area TMH instead of the erased timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is displayed as a specific image related to the awarding of an advantageous benefit to the player, and the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the variation (the jackpot type) according to the type of the specific image (character MKE) Is also suggested). In FIG. 68C, the character MKE "chance" is displayed at substantially the same position as the position at which the timer image TM was displayed. Further, in the timer image change effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are erased, and a plurality of characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3 are displayed on the display screen 7a instead of the erased decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. . The characters MSG1, MSG2 and MSG3 are displayed as specific images related to the advantageous award to the player, and depending on the type of the specific image (characters MSG1, MSG2 and MSG3), the jackpot expectation of the variation It is supposed to indicate (including the expectation of the jackpot type) (jackpot expectation: character MSG1> character MSG2> character MSG3). Here, as shown in FIG. 67C, the characters MSG1, MSG2 and MSG3 are characters different from the character MKE (character MSG1 of "participation", character MSG2 of "hold change", character MSG3 of "NEXT") In addition to being configured, the character MKE is displayed behind the character MKE in substantially the same size as the character MKE. These characters MSG1, MSG2 and MSG3 move the display position so as to rotate in a predetermined direction, and when overlapping with the character MKE during movement, part or all of them pass through the back side of the character MKE to the character MKE It is displayed in a covered manner. That is, the characters MSG1, MSG2 and MSG3 are displayed in the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the specific image superposition effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image superposition effect, the characters MSG2 and MSG3 are erased from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. 68C, and the characters MSG1 ("participation") are enlarged and displayed substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. Ru. That is, the display mode of the character MSG1 changes to the character MLG as the specific image, and the character MSG1 is displayed in the effect image display area EGH. Furthermore, the character MKE displayed in the timer image display area TMH changes from “chance” to “join” and is enlarged and displayed. That is, the character MKE as the first display mode of the specific image and the character MLG as the second display mode of the specific image are displayed with the same character. Thus, the character MLG is displayed larger than the character MKE behind the character MKE, and a part of the character MLG is covered by the character MKE so as to be readable. That is, as shown in FIG. 68D, the character MLG is displayed larger than the character MKE substantially at the center of the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH (for example, 2) The timer image display area TMH and the effect image display area EGH are superimposed on each other, and a part of the effect image display area EGH is displayed in a mode that can be read by the character MKE. As described above, when the same character MLG as the character MKE displayed in the timer image display area TMH is displayed in the effect image display area EGH, the jackpot expectation of the variation becomes highest (big hit expectation: character MLG> character MSG2> character MSG3). By the fact that the character MLG identical to the character MKE is displayed and the character MKE being displayed at the beginning is changed and enlarged to be displayed in the same character as the character MLG, the player subsequently The development of can have more expectations.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68E, on the display screen 7a, the specific image character presentation is performed. In this specific image character effect, of the characters MLG and MKE displayed in the specific image superimposed effect shown in FIG. 68D, the character MKE is erased and only the character MLG is displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, the timer image display area TMH is erased. At this time, the display mode of the character MLG changes diagonally (falling to the right) from the display mode displayed horizontally in the specific image superimposing effect, and the entire display mode is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. In addition, the character CRC is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the name CNA ("OARO") of the character CRC is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. This character CRC is displayed based on the display of "participation" as the character MLG, and in the above-mentioned battle effect (FIG. 68 (B)), the enemy character CRB together with the player side friend character CRA It is a character to battle. The character CRC displayed in the specific image character effect is of a plurality of types, and the type of the character CRC indicates the jackpot expectation of the variation (including the expectation of the jackpot type). Note that "OARO" as the character CRC displayed here is a character with a relatively high jackpot expectation. The player can see the character MLG completely displayed as the specific image related to the advantageous award to the player by displaying the character MLG in its entirety, and more accurately the current gaming state With the appearance of the character CRC “OARO” that can be grasped and has a relatively high jackpot expectation, it is possible to have great expectations for further development.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68F, on the display screen 7a, the probability change reach effect is performed. In this probability change reach effect, the screen of the specific image character effect shown in FIG. 68 (E) is switched. That is, the character MLG, the character CRC, and the name CNA shown in FIG. 68E are erased, and in the display screen 7a, the probability variation reach effect is executed in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop at the reach symbol array of probability variation jackpot Be done. In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. In the present example, the jackpot symbol array "777" is "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot" (probable jackpot), and after the jackpot game is over, the high probability time short state (high probability high base state until the next jackpot) It is a jackpot to become).

  On the other hand, in the specific image character effect, it is assumed that the name CNA (“ZERO”) is displayed as the character CRC as shown in FIG. 68 (G) instead of FIG. 68 (E). The character “ZERO” as the character CRC is a character having a relatively low jackpot expectation, and has a jackpot expectation lower than the above “OARO”. That is, from the display state of the specific image character effect shown in FIG. 68 (E), the specific image character effect shown in FIG. 68 (G) is a character CRC instead of the character “OARO” having a relatively high jackpot expectation. A character "ZERO" having a relatively low jackpot expectation is displayed. As described above, by displaying the character CRC whose jackpot expectation is relatively low in the specific image character presentation, the player can not have much expectation for the subsequent development.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68H, the normal reach effect is performed on the display screen 7a. In this normal reach effect, the screen of the specific image character effect shown in FIG. 68 (G) is switched, and the normal reach effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R normally stop in the reach symbol array of the big hit is displayed on the display screen 7a. To be executed. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "8 ↓ 8". In this example, the jackpot symbol array "888" is "16R (13R substantially) V non-passing jackpot" (usually a jackpot), and after the jackpot game is completed, the number of times of variation of the special symbol is performed 100 times. It is a jackpot that the gaming state becomes the low probability time short state (low probability high base state) and thereafter becomes the low probability low base state (normal state).

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of timer production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the first effect displays a predetermined timer image, and displays the timer value using the timer image, and the timer value. The second effect is an effect including the display of a specific image related to the provision of an advantageous benefit to the player, and the timer value is a predetermined value in the first effect. When the display effect to be stopped or digested is performed, an effect of simultaneously displaying the specific image in the first display mode and the second display mode as the second effect is performed. According to this configuration, when the timer value is stopped or digested at the predetermined value, the specific image related to the advantageous privilege giving to the player is displayed, so the player increases the timer value that changes every moment. You can enjoy the game while watching with expectation. In addition, since the specific image is simultaneously displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode, the player's expectation for development of the subsequent game is changed by variously changing the combination of the display modes. It can be done. This makes it possible to make the player feel better. Furthermore, it is possible to associate the specific image with the timer value to be stopped, and to change the expectation of the player according to the numerical value of the stopped timer value. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the first display mode of the specific image is a display mode displayed in place of the timer image at the display position of the timer image. The second display mode is a display mode in which a part displayed behind the timer image is covered by the specific image of the first display mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player guess the specific image displayed in the second display mode. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the specific image is a predetermined character, and the same characters are displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode of the specific image. In the display mode, the characters in the second display mode partially covered by the characters in the first display mode are configured to be readable display modes. According to this configuration, although the characters of the specific image displayed in the second display mode are partially covered, the display mode is the same as the characters displayed in the first display mode and can be read. Thus, the player can correctly guess the characters of the specific image displayed in the second display mode, and enjoy the game with great expectation. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66 to 68, when the characters of the first display mode are erased, the display mode of the characters of the second display mode is changed and displayed as a whole. It is configured. According to this configuration, since the characters of the second display mode that are partially covered are entirely displayed, the player verifies whether the characters of the second display mode that he has inferred are correct or not. Can. Furthermore, since the display mode changes when the characters of the second display mode are displayed as a whole, it is possible to change the expectation of the player by, for example, changing the display mode variously. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66 to 68, the decoration symbol is displayed in a reach state when the entire display of the second display mode is erased. According to this configuration, when the characters of the second display mode are displayed in full, the game is always reached. Therefore, the player will be at ease whether the characters of the second display mode are displayed in full. Furthermore, the character of the second display mode can be associated with the jackpot expectation, and the character of the second display mode displayed as a whole can change the jackpot expectation. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of timer presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the specific image displayed in place of the timer value in the timer image display area displays a predetermined character, but the present invention It is not limited to this. For example, the specific image may be an image of a symbol, a mark, a pattern, a character, or an object or article having a specific shape.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65 to FIG. 68, the timer display effect is shown by the countdown method in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is limited to this. Absent. For example, the timer display effect may cause the timer value to change irregularly (randomly change). Alternatively, the timer display effect may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up. Further, in the timer display effect, 10 seconds is set as the initial value of the timer, but this is not limited to 10 seconds and is arbitrary. Furthermore, in the timer stop effect shown in FIG. 66, the timer image change effect is executed when the timer value is stopped for 5 seconds, but this is not limited to 5 seconds and is arbitrary.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, when a specific image independent effect (FIG. 65, FIG. 66) or a specific image character effect (FIG. 68) is executed from the specific image superposition effect, Although the characters as the specific image are displayed in an oblique manner (falling to the right) from the display manner displayed horizontally, the display manner is changed and displayed as a whole, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the display mode may be changed into an arc shape, a vertical shape, a zigzag shape, or the like instead of the oblique state so that the entire display is performed. And in this case, the color may also be changed. Furthermore, a plurality of types of display modes may be changed, and the jackpot expectation may be made different depending on which type of display mode changes.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67 and FIG. 68, in the timer image change effect, three characters MSG1, MSG2 and MSG3 are displayed as specific images in the effect image display area. The invention is not limited to this. For example, these specific images may be other than three, and at least two or more. Further, these specific images may be other than characters, and may be images of symbols, marks, patterns, characters, or objects or articles having a specific shape. Furthermore, among these specific images, an image (for example, “chance”) identical to the specific image displayed in the timer image display area may be displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, in the specific image character effect, one character is made to participate, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the specific image character effect, a plurality of characters may participate in the battle. In addition, the character who entered the battle battles against the enemy character CRB with the player-side friend character CRA, but on the contrary, it may be made to battle against the player-side friend character CRA with the enemy character CRB. May be In this case, a plurality of character colors of the character MLG of "participation" may be provided, and it may be determined whether the participating character is to be attached to the teammate character CRA or the enemy character CRB according to the character color.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
The display means is capable of executing a first predetermined effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is an effect including a display for displaying a predetermined timer image and counting the timer value using the timer image, and a display for stopping or digesting the timer value at a predetermined value,
The second effect is an effect including the display of a specific image related to the award of an advantageous benefit to the player,
When the display effect is performed in which the timer value is stopped or digested at a predetermined value in the first effect, the display means performs the first display mode and the second display mode as the second effect. Make an effect to display at the same time,
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect A4-2]
The first display mode of the specific image is a display mode displayed in place of the timer image at the display position of the timer image,
The second display mode of the specific image is a display mode in which a part displayed behind the timer image is covered by the specific image of the first display mode.
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1, characterized in that
[Aspect A4-3]
The specific image is a predetermined character, and the first display mode and the second display mode of the specific image are display modes in which the same character is displayed,
The characters of the second display mode partially covered by the characters of the first display mode are display modes that can be read,
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-2, characterized in that
[Aspect A4-4]
When the characters of the first display mode are erased, the characters of the second display mode are changed and the entire display mode is displayed.
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-3, characterized in that
[Aspect A4-5]
It has a decorative symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol,
The decorative symbol display means displays the decorative symbol in a reach state when the entire display of the second display mode is erased.
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-4, characterized in that

  The image transmission display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72. This image transparent display effect can be performed, for example, during the change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction for executing the image transmission display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen is displayed. It is an effect of displaying an image on 7a.

[Image transmission display effect A]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining an image transmission display effect A. As shown in FIG. 69A, a light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. In addition, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retraction position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. In the image transmission display effect A, a specific image (some image) IZ of “SMILE I WINE !!” is displayed on the display screen 7 a during the change effect. This image is visible through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions of the light guide plate 17 in a state where the image IZ is displayed. In other words, an effect of making the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 visually recognizable at random is performed. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position in the light guide plate 17, as shown in FIG. 69C, some images IZ of the display screen 7a and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and are visually recognized The superimposing effect that will be possible is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (C) to FIG. 69 (E), the advancing movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, the character images MJ of "S", "MA", "I", and "L" are visible in each of the four members having transparency. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, a movable combination of effects in which substantially the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second aspect). At this time, each of the four permeable members may be in contact with each other, or may be slightly spaced. As shown in FIG. 69 (D), when the first movable part 14 is moving, the character image MJ is still displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed randomly on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable character 14 and the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible A presentation is performed.

  In the second mode in which the movement of the first movable part 14 to the advanced position is completed, the first movable part 14 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the first movable part 14. It will be The image IZ is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, the character image MJ is continuously displayed on the first movable part 14, and the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at a random position. The combined effect to be displayed is executed. At this time, the screen image Ia displayed on the display screen 7a moves in the display screen 7a, and the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes the display position, so the character image MJ, the screen image IZ, Two or three of the smile images SL sometimes overlap and become visible.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 69F and 69G, the random display of the character image MJ of the first movable part 14 is performed. Specifically, an effect of repeating switching between a state in which each of the character images MJ of “s”, “ma”, “i” and “le” can be visually recognized at random and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize is performed. At this time, the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at random positions. In addition, there are cases where a plurality of images IZ of the display screen 7a are displayed in a plurality on the display screen 7a and a case where they are displayed singly, and there are cases where each moves and stops. As a result, two or three of the character image MJ, the some image IZ, and the smile image SL sometimes overlap and become visible.

  Next, as shown in (H) to (J) in FIG. 69, the retraction movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a from the state in which the four transparent members cover the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in the direction away from each other. At this time, the character images MJ of "s", "ma", "i" and "ru" are switched to a state in which visual recognition is possible at random and a state in which visual recognition is difficult to each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed randomly on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable character 14 and the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible A presentation is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (J), each of the four transmissive members is moved to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be viewed without passing through the first movable part 14. (1st aspect).

[Image transmission display effect B]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the image transmission display effect B. As shown in FIG. 70A, the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. In addition, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retraction position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. In the image transmission display effect B, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), while the variable display is being performed, the timer image TM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. The timer image TM1 becomes visible through the light guide plate 17. The timer image TM1 includes a two-digit numeric image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, an area image, a pattern image, etc. other than the numeral image. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the timer image TM1 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the display. Here, after “30” is displayed as the timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of mutually different positions of the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect of making the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 visually recognizable at random is performed. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposing effect in which the timer image TM1 of the display screen 7a and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and can be visually recognized is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (C) to FIG. 70 (E), the advancing movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, the character images MJ of "S", "MA", "I", and "L" are visible in each of the four members having transparency. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, a movable combination of effects in which substantially the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second aspect). At this time, each of the four permeable members may be in contact with each other, or may be slightly spaced. As shown in FIG. 70 (D), when the first movable part 14 is moving, the character image MJ remains displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed randomly on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable character 14 and the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible A presentation is performed.

  In the second mode in which the movement of the first movable part 14 to the advanced position is completed, the first movable part 14 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the first movable part 14. It will be The timer image TM1 is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, the character image MJ is continuously displayed on the first movable part 14, and the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at random positions. The combined effect is performed. At this time, the timer image TM1 displayed on the display screen 7a continues to count down, and the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. The character image MJ, the timer image TM1, the smile image SL, and two or three of these sometimes overlap and become visible.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (F) and FIG. 70 (G), the random display of the character image MJ of the first movable part 14 is executed. Specifically, an effect of repeating switching between a state in which each of the character images MJ of “s”, “ma”, “i” and “le” can be visually recognized at random and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize is performed. At this time, the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at random positions. Further, the timer image TM1 of the display screen 7a is visible through the first movable part 14 and the light guide plate 17, and two or three of the character image MJ, the display screen 7a, and the smile image SL. One of them sometimes overlaps and becomes visible.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70H to FIG. 70J, the retraction movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a from the state in which the four transparent members cover the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in the direction away from each other. At this time, the character images MJ of "s", "ma", "i" and "ru" are switched to a state in which visual recognition is possible at random and a state in which visual recognition is difficult to each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed randomly on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable character 14 and the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible A presentation is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (J), each of the four transmissive members is moved to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be viewed without passing through the first movable part 14. (2nd aspect). In the timer image TM1, when the timer zero display effect is performed such that the timer value becomes 0 (zero), the expectation degree suggesting image EI1 indicating the expectation of the jackpot in the fluctuation is displayed at the position where the timer image TM1 is displayed. Be done. After that, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed.

[Image transmission display effect C]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the image transmission display effect C. As shown in FIG. 71A, a light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. In addition, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retraction position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. In the image transmission display effect C, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the decorative symbol repeats the variable display and the stop display, and a state in which the display is stopped and displayed is shown here. As described above, when the decorative pattern repeats the variable display and the stop display, the timer image TM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, this timer image TM1 is executed as one of the pre-reading effects. The timer image TM1 can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. The timer image TM1 includes a two-digit numeric image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, an area image, a pattern image, etc. other than the numeral image. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the timer image TM1 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the display. Here, after “30” is displayed as the timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71C, after the stop display of the decorative symbol, a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions of the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect of making the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 visually recognizable at random is performed. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposing effect is performed in which the decoration image stopped and displayed and the timer image TM1 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and can be visually recognized. Be By this superimposed effect, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the decorative symbol stopped and displayed explodes and disappears. That is, the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 randomly appears on the stop-displayed decoration symbol, so that it is possible to produce an effect such that the decoration symbol is destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 71C and 71D, the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the timer image TM1 is displayed together with the current timer value in a state where the value is to be displayed next. For example, when the timer image TM1 (current timer value) is "5", the value "4" to be displayed next is displayed together with the current timer value "5" in a state of being enlarged. In FIG. 70 (D), the next timer value image NT representing "4" having transparency and overlapping with the current timer value "5" is enlarged and displayed. The next timer value image NT has transparency, and the timer image TM1 is visible through the next timer image NT. Since the next timer value image NT is enlarged and displayed, it is larger than the timer image TM1, and the upper end and the lower end of the numeral "4" are images which are out of the display screen 7a. The next timer value image NT is reduced in size in a state of overlapping with the timer image TM1, and the size and the display position approach the portion (image area) where the counter value is represented in the timer image TM1. Then, when the next timer value image NT substantially matches the size and the display position of the image area where the counter value is represented in the timer image TM1, the decrement of the timer image TM1 is completed. Here, the next timer value image NT representing "4" is reduced so that the size and the display position coincide with the "5" portion of the timer image TM1, and "4" of the next timer value image NT and the timer image Immediately after the size and position of TM1's "5" match, the timer image TM1 is replaced with "4".

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (D) and FIG. 71 (E), the advancing movement effect of the first movable combination 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, the character images MJ of "S", "MA", "I", and "L" are visible in each of the four members having transparency. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, a movable combination of effects in which substantially the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second aspect). At this time, each of the four permeable members may be in contact with each other, or may be slightly spaced. As shown in FIG. 71 (D), when the first movable part 14 is moving, the character image MJ remains displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed randomly on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable character 14 and the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible A presentation is performed.

  In the second mode in which the movement of the first movable part 14 to the advanced position is completed, the first movable part 14 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the first movable part 14. It will be The timer image TM1 is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, the character image MJ is continuously displayed on the first movable part 14, and the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at random positions. The combined effect is performed. At this time, the timer image TM1 displayed on the display screen 7a continues to count down, and the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. In the character image MJ, the timer image TM1, and the smile image SL, two or three of these sometimes overlap and become visible.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (F) and FIG. 71 (G), random display of the character image MJ of the first movable part 14 is executed. Specifically, an effect of repeating switching between a state in which each of the character images MJ of “s”, “ma”, “i” and “le” can be visually recognized at random and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize is performed. At this time, the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at random positions. Further, the timer image TM1 of the display screen 7a is visible through the first movable part 14 and the light guide plate 17, and two or three of the character image MJ, the display screen 7a, and the smile image SL. One of them sometimes overlaps and becomes visible.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (H) to FIG. 71 (J), the retraction movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a from the state in which the four transparent members cover the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in the direction away from each other. At this time, the character images MJ of "s", "ma", "i" and "ru" are switched to a state in which visual recognition is possible at random and a state in which visual recognition is difficult to each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed randomly on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable character 14 and the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible A presentation is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (J), each of the four transmissive members is moved to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be viewed without the first movable part 14 (2nd aspect). In the timer image TM1, when the timer zero display effect is performed such that the timer value becomes 0 (zero), the expectation degree suggesting image EI1 indicating the expectation of the jackpot in the fluctuation is displayed at the position where the timer image TM1 is displayed. Be done. After that, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed.

[Image transmission display effect D]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the image transmission display effect D. As shown in FIG. 72A, a light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. In addition, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retraction position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. In the image transmission display effect C, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72C, a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions of the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect of making the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 visually recognizable at random is performed. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposing effect is performed in which the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random, superimposed on the stop-displayed decorative pattern. As shown in FIG. 72 (D), the decorative symbol stopped and displayed explodes and disappears due to this superimposed effect. That is, the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 randomly appears on the stop-displayed decoration symbol, so that it is possible to produce an effect such that the decoration symbol is destroyed by the smile image SL. As shown in FIG. 72 (E), after the decorative symbol explodes and disappears, as shown in FIG. 72 (F), the next variable display is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (G), an advancing movement effect of the first movable character 14 and random display of the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are performed. These effects are similar to the image transmission display effect C. That is, in the advancing movement effect of the first movable role 14, the four transparent members constituting the first movable position 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, the character images MJ of "S", "MA", "I", and "L" are visible in each of the four members having transparency. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, a movable combination of effects in which substantially the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second aspect). At this time, each of the four permeable members may be in contact with each other, or may be slightly spaced. When the first movable character 14 is moving, the character image MJ remains displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed randomly on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable character 14 and the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible A presentation is performed. In the second mode in which the movement of the first movable part 14 to the advanced position is completed, the first movable part 14 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the first movable part 14. It will be The variation display of the decorative symbol is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, the character image MJ is continuously displayed on the first movable character 14, and the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at a random position. Is displayed. At this time, the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. The character image MJ, the variation display of the decorative symbol, the smile image SL, and two or three of these sometimes overlap and become visible. After that, the withdrawal movement effect of the first movable combination 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a from the state in which the four transparent members cover the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in the direction away from each other. As a result, almost the entire display screen 7a can be viewed without passing through the first movable role item 14 (second aspect).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72I, a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions of the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect of making the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 visually recognizable at random is performed. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposing effect is performed in which the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random, superimposed on the stop-displayed decorative pattern. As shown in FIG. 72 (J), the decorative symbol stopped and displayed explodes and disappears due to this superimposed effect. That is, the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 randomly appears on the stop-displayed decoration symbol, so that it is possible to produce an effect such that the decoration symbol is destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started. Although the above description is given over a plurality of variable displays, it may be performed with one change. That is, it may be performed at the time of the pseudo-series effect. In this case, FIG. 72 (B) and FIG. 72 (H) may be temporary stop display.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of image transparent display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the light guide plate 17 capable of switching the smile image SL into the visible state and the visual hard state, and the character image MJ in the visible state and the visual difficulty And the light guide plate 17 has transparency, and the character image MJ represented on the first movable case 14 via the light guide plate 17 is provided. It is possible to execute an image transparent display effect that makes it possible to visually recognize. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, in the image transparent display effect, the character image MJ represented on the first movable combination 14 can be viewed through the light guide plate 17, An effect that makes the smile image SL visible on the light guide plate 17 is included. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, in the image transmission display effect, the smile image SL represented on the light guide plate 17 and the character image MJ represented on the first movable combination 14 are included. It includes effects that overlap and become visible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, in the image transmission display effect, the smile image SL can be visually recognized alternately and the visual hard-to-recognize at a plurality of different positions of the light guide plate 17. It includes an effect that repeats. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the first movable role object 14 is configured to be movable, and in the image transparent display effect, the first movable character is visible in a state in which the character image MJ is visible. An effect of moving the movable part 14 is included. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the first movable role object 14 has transparency, and the gaming machine 1 is further capable of visually recognizing the image IZ. The display screen 7a that can be switched to the difficult state is provided, and in the image transmission display effect, the image IZ displayed on the display screen 7a is visually recognized via the light guide plate 17 and the first movable role member 14. It includes effects that will be possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, the light guide plate 17 which can switch between the visible state and the hard-to-visible state of the smile image SL; The light guide plate 17 has transparency, and the image through which the timer image TM1 displayed on the display screen 7a can be viewed through the light guide plate 17 Transparent display effects can be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of an image permeation | transmission display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In FIG. 69, it is assumed that an image IZ is displayed on the display screen 7a. However, on the display screen 7a, an image having contents different from the image IZ may be displayed in the same manner as the image IZ. For example, it may be a specific character image or a specific character, figure, symbol or the like.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the image transmission display effect of each of FIGS. 69 to 72 may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the image transmission display effect A of FIG. 69, the variation display of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 72 and the explosion effect after the smile image SL display may be combined. Further, the timer image TM1 of FIG. 70 or FIG. 71 may be displayed on the image transmission display effect D of FIG.
[Modification 3]
In the image transparent display effect of FIGS. 70 and 71, the timer value of the timer image TM1 is finally zero. However, the timer value of the timer image TM1 may end at other than zero. For example, after the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes a number other than zero (for example, 2), the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 may be displayed. In the image transmission display effect in FIGS. 70 and 71, the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 may not be displayed.
[Modification 4]
In the image transmission display effect of FIGS. 69 to 72, the smile image SL and the timer image TM1 are randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17 and the first movable role item 14. However, these images may be displayed with a certain regularity.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A5-1]
A first image display area that can be switched between a state in which the first image can be viewed and a state in which the first image is not visible;
It is a gaming machine provided with a second image display area that can be switched to a state in which the second image can be visually recognized and a state in which the second image can not be visually recognized,
The first image display area has transparency, and it is possible to execute a specific effect that allows the second image represented in the second image display area to be visible through the first image display area. A game machine characterized by
態 様 [Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
For the specific effect, the first image is viewed in the first image display area in a state in which the second image represented in the second image display area can be viewed through the first image display area. A game machine characterized by including effects that become possible.
[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-2,
The specific effect includes an effect in which the first image represented in the first image display area and the second image represented in the second image display area overlap and become visible. A gaming machine to be.
[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-3,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific effect includes an effect of alternately repeating a state in which the first image can be viewed and a state in which the first image is difficult to be viewed at a plurality of different positions of the first image area.
態 様 [Aspect 5-5]
A game machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-4, wherein
The second image display area is configured to be movable,
A game machine characterized in that the specific effect includes an effect of moving the second image display area while the second image is visible.
[Aspect A5-6]
A game machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-5, wherein
The second image display area has transparency.
The gaming machine further includes:
A third image display area that can be switched between a state in which the third image can be visually recognized and a state in which the third image is difficult to visually recognize;
The specific effect includes an effect that enables the third image represented in the third image display area to be visible through the first image display area and the second image display area. Gaming machine.
態 様 [Aspect A5-7]
A game machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-4, wherein
The second image is a timer image.

  The image combination effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This image combination presentation may be performed, for example, during variation presentation of a decorative symbol. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction for executing the image combination effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a is displayed. Is an effect that causes an image to be displayed.

[Image combination effect A]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the image combination effect A. The light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7 a, but the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when describing the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. In addition, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retraction position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four light transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each have an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be viewed and a state in which the image is difficult to view. As shown in FIG. 73 (A), in the image combination effect A, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. . This variable display can be visually recognized through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the advancing movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, a character partial image BN representing a part (1⁄4 part) of the smile face character image is visible to each of the four transparent members. As shown in FIG. 73 (C), the movable character combination effect in which substantially the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed by moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position (second embodiment ). At this time, each of the four permeable members may be in contact with each other, or may be slightly spaced. The movable character combination image effects the four character partial images BN close to each other to form a smile face character image as a whole. That is, by collecting the four members of the first movable part 14 at the advanced position, it is possible to form an image (a smile face character image) representing one specific object in all of the four character partial images BN.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), a related image display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, on the smile face character image formed by the whole of the character partial image BN represented on the four members of the first movable character 14, and on the display screen 7a on the rear side of the smile face character image, the smile face character image is displayed. An image associated with the face character image is displayed. Here, the effect image EF is displayed in accordance with the outline of the smile face character image. Here, the effect image EF is a ring-shaped light image that matches the contour of the smile face character image, and it is an effect that light is emitted from the smile face character image. Thus, a character image representing one target (here, a smiley face) is constituted by the plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable role 14, and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect images EF, it is possible to perform a display effect in which many elements are intertwined in a complex manner. This allows the player to be entertained.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (E) and FIG. 73 (F), the retraction movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a from the state in which the four transparent members cover the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in the direction away from each other. At this time, the character partial image BN is visible to each of the four members having transparency. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (F), each of the four transmissive members is moved to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be viewed without passing through the first movable part 14. (1st aspect).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (G), the advancing movement effect of the first movable role thing 14 is executed again. That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the character images MJ of "S", "MA", "I", and "L" are visible in each of the four members having transparency. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, a movable combination of effects in which substantially the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second aspect). As shown in FIG. 73 (G), when the first movable part 14 is moving, the character image MJ is still displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed randomly on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable character 14 and the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible A presentation is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (H) to FIG. 73 (J), the retraction movement effect of the first movable combination 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a from the state in which the four transparent members cover the display screen 7a. At this time, the character images MJ of "s", "ma", "i" and "ru" are switched to a state in which visual recognition is possible at random and a state in which visual recognition is difficult to each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed randomly on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable character 14 and the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible A presentation is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (J), each of the four transmissive members is moved to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be viewed without passing through the first movable part 14. (1st aspect). In addition, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed.

[Image combination effect B]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the image combination effect B. The light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7 a, but the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when describing the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. In addition, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retraction position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four light transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each have an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be viewed and a state in which the image is difficult to view. As shown in FIG. 74A, in the image combination effect B, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. . Further, the effect image EF is displayed on the display screen 7a. The variable display and the effect image EF can be viewed through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), the advancing movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, a character partial image BN representing a part (1⁄4 part) of the smile face character image is visible to each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), a movable combination of effects in which substantially the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second embodiment ). At this time, each of the four permeable members may be in contact with each other, or may be slightly spaced. The movable character combination image effects the four character partial images BN close to each other to form a smile face character image as a whole. That is, by collecting the four members of the first movable part 14 at the advanced position, it is possible to form an image (a smile face character image) representing one specific object in all of the four character partial images BN.

  An effect image EF is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and a smile face character image formed of the whole of the character partial image BN represented on the four members of the first movable character 14, and the effect image The image combination presentation is performed by the EF. Specifically, the effect image EF is a ring-shaped light image that matches the contour of the smile face character image, and it is an effect that light is emitted from the smile face character image. Therefore, the effect image EF can be said to be an image associated with the smile face character image. Thus, a character image representing one target (here, a smiley face) is constituted by the plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable role 14, and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect images EF, it is possible to perform a display effect in which many elements are intertwined in a complex manner. This allows the player to be entertained.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (D) and FIG. 74 (E), the retraction movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a from the state in which the four transparent members cover the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in the direction away from each other. At this time, the character partial image BN is visible to each of the four members having transparency. The effect image EF and the variable display are continuously displayed, and can be viewed without passing through the first movable role object 14. After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (F), the effect image EF disappears.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 74 (G) and 74 (H), the advancing movement effect of the first movable role object 14 is executed again. That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a follow-up image TJ that follows (interlocks with) the movement of the four transmissive members is displayed on the display screen 7a. The follow-up image TJ is an image displayed on the area of the display screen 7a that is the back surface of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14, and the shape of the four transmissive members and It has almost the same shape. That is, the follow-up image TJ has the same shape as the area on the back surface of the four transmissive members in the display screen 7a. Here, the four transmissive members each have a rectangular shape, and the follow-up image TJ also has the same rectangular shape as that. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the follow-up image TJ appears to be displayed on the four transmissive members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, substantially the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). In addition, four follow-up images TJ are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, the follow-up images TJ each include a face image of a character, and the effect button 63 is used to execute a selection effect of the player selecting one character.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74I, the retraction movement effect of the first movable combination 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a from the state in which the four transparent members cover the display screen 7a. At this time, the follow-up image TJ moves toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movement of the four transmissive members. That is, when the four transmissive members are retracted, the area on the back of the four transmissive members of the display screen 7a is reduced, so the display region of the follow-up image TJ is also reduced. By such an effect, when viewed from the player, the follow-up image TJ appears to be displayed on a member having four transparency. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74 (J), each of the four transmissive members is moved to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be viewed without passing through the first movable part 14. (1st aspect). In addition, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed.

[Image combination effect C]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the image combination effect C. The light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7 a, but the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when describing the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. In addition, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retraction position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four light transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each have an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be viewed and a state in which the image is difficult to view. As shown in FIG. 75 (A), in the image combination effect C, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R. . This variable display can be visually recognized through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), with the smile image DS being displayed on the display screen 7a, the advancing movement effect of the first movable role object 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, a character partial image BN representing a part (1⁄4 part) of the smile face character image is visible to each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four members having transparency to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), a movable combination of effects in which substantially the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second embodiment ). The movable character combination image effects the four character partial images BN close to each other to form a smile face character image as a whole. That is, by collecting the four members of the first movable part 14 at the advanced position, it is possible to form an image (a smile face character image) representing one specific object in all of the four character partial images BN. The smile face character image formed by the four character partial images BN is an image of the same size and the same content as the smile image DS displayed on the display screen 7a, and these two images overlap. From this, it can be said that the smile image DS displayed on the display screen 7a is an image associated with the smile face character image. Thus, a character image representing one target (here, a smiley face) is constituted by the plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable role 14, and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the character images DS, it is possible to perform a display effect in which a large number of elements are intertwined in a complex manner. This allows the player to be entertained.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), a withdrawal movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a from the state in which the four transparent members cover the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in the direction away from each other. At this time, the character partial image BN is visible to each of the four members having transparency. The smile image DS is continuously displayed on the display screen 7 a and can be viewed without the first movable role object 14.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (E), the smile image DS disappears, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), a plurality of smile images SL are displayed randomly at a plurality of different positions of the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect of making the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 visually recognizable at random is performed. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposing effect is performed in which the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random, superimposed on the stop-displayed decorative pattern. By this superimposed effect, as shown in FIG. 75 (G), the decorative symbol stopped and displayed explodes and disappears. That is, the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 randomly appears on the stop-displayed decoration symbol, so that it is possible to produce an effect such that the decoration symbol is destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, as shown in FIG. 75 (H), the next variable display is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (I), an advancing movement effect of the first movable character 14 and random display of the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are performed. In the advancing movement effect of the first movable character 14, the four transparent members constituting the first movable character 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, the character images MJ of "S", "MA", "I", and "L" are visible in each of the four members having transparency. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, a movable combination of effects in which substantially the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second aspect). When the first movable character 14 is moving, the character image MJ remains displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed randomly on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable character 14 and the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible A presentation is performed. In the second mode in which the movement of the first movable part 14 to the advanced position is completed, the first movable part 14 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the first movable part 14. It will be The variation display of the decorative symbol is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, the character image MJ is continuously displayed on the first movable character 14, and the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at a random position. Is displayed. At this time, the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. The character image MJ, the variation display of the decorative symbol, the smile image SL, and two or three of these sometimes overlap and become visible. After that, the withdrawal movement effect of the first movable combination 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a from the state in which the four transparent members cover the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in the direction away from each other. As a result, almost the entire display screen 7a can be viewed without passing through the first movable role item 14 (second aspect). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. Although the above description is given over a plurality of variable displays, it may be performed with one change. That is, it may be performed at the time of the pseudo-series effect. In this case, FIG. 75 (E) and FIG. 75 (J) may be temporary stop display.

[Image combination effect D]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the image combination effect D. The light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7 a, but the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when describing the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. In addition, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retraction position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four light transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each have an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be viewed and a state in which the image is difficult to view. As shown in FIG. 76 (A), in the image combination effect D, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R. . This variable display can be visually recognized through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), the advancing movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, a character partial image BN representing a part (1⁄4 part) of the smile face character image is visible to each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four members having transparency to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), a movable combination of effects in which substantially the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second embodiment ). At this time, each of the four permeable members may be in contact with each other, or may be slightly spaced. The movable character combination image effects the four character partial images BN close to each other to form a smile face character image as a whole. That is, by collecting the four members of the first movable part 14 at the advanced position, it is possible to form an image (a smile face character image) representing one specific object in all of the four character partial images BN.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), a related image display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, on the smile face character image formed by the whole of the character partial image BN represented on the four members of the first movable character 14, and on the display screen 7a on the rear side of the smile face character image, the smile face character image is displayed. An image associated with the face character image is displayed. Here, the effect image EF is displayed in accordance with the outline of the smile face character image. Here, the effect image EF is a ring-shaped light image that matches the contour of the smile face character image, and it is an effect that light is emitted from the smile face character image. Thus, a character image representing one target (here, a smiley face) is constituted by the plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable role 14, and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect images EF, it is possible to perform a display effect in which many elements are intertwined in a complex manner. This allows the player to be entertained.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75E, a light guide plate display change presentation is performed. Specifically, the image displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes from the character partial image BN to the character image MJ. That is, the character images MJ of "s", "ma", "i" and "ru" are visible to each of the four members having transparency. At this time, since the character image MJ of each of the four transparent members and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are displayed at random, the character image MJ of the first movable part 14 and the light guide plate 17 The superimposing effect is performed in which the smile image SL sometimes overlaps and becomes visible.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), the image displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes from the character image MJ to the character partial image BN. That is, a character partial image BN representing a part (1⁄4 part) of the smile face character image is visible to each of the four transparent members. Thus, a smile face character image is formed as a whole by the four character partial images BN.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (G), the image displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes from the character partial image BN to the character image MJ. That is, the character images MJ of "s", "ma", "i" and "ru" are visible to each of the four members having transparency. At this time, since the character image MJ of each of the four transparent members and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are displayed at random, the character image MJ of the first movable part 14 and the light guide plate 17 The superimposing effect is performed in which the smile image SL sometimes overlaps and becomes visible.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (H) and FIG. 75 (I), the retraction movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a from the state in which the four transparent members cover the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in the direction away from each other. At this time, the character images MJ of "s", "ma", "i", and "le" are in a state in which they can be visually recognized at random in each of the four transparent members. Further, since the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 is displayed randomly, the superimposing effect is performed in which the character image MJ of the first movable part 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. . Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (J), each of the four transmissive members is moved to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be viewed without passing through the first movable part 14. (1st aspect). In addition, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of image combination production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the first movable combination 14 including the four transmissive and movable image display areas (movable light guide plates) has four image display areas. It is possible to transit to a first state relatively close to each other and to a second state relatively separated from each other, and switchable between a state in which the character partial image BN can be visually recognized and a state in which the character partial image BN can be visually recognized In the first state, the first effect of forming one smile face character image with the whole of the four character partial images BN is executed by making the character partial images BN visible. Can. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the display screen 7a that can be switched between the visual recognition state and the visual recognition state of the image is provided. The image represented on the display screen 7a can be visually recognized through the (movable light guide plate), and in the first effect, the effect image EF associated with the smile face character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the four first image display areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable part 14 are respectively in the display screen 7a in the second state. They are arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners, and move toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a when transitioning from the second state to the first state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, after the first effect, the four first image display areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable combination 14 transition to the second state. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the four first image display areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable character 14 respectively have character images MJ different from the character partial image BN. It is possible to switch between a visible state and a hard-to-visible state, and while transitioning from the first state to the second state, repeats the visible and hard-to-view states of the character image MJ, respectively. A presentation can be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the light guide plate 17 is provided which can be switched to a state in which an image can be visually recognized and a state in which visual recognition is difficult. Thus, a smiley face character image formed of four character partial images BN can be viewed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of an image combination production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In FIG. 73, it is assumed that a smiley face character image is formed as a whole by four character partial images BN represented on four members (movable light guide plates) of the first movable combination 14. However, the target of the entire image represented by the whole of the partial images displayed on the four members (movable light guide plates) is not limited to the character image. For example, the entire image may be a specific character, figure, symbol or the like.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the image combination effects of FIGS. 73 to 76 may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the image combination effect A of FIG. 73, the variation display of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 75 or the explosion effect after displaying the smile image SL may be combined. Further, a follow-up image TJ as shown in FIG. 74 may be displayed.
[Modification 3]
In the image combination effect in FIGS. 73 to 76, the smile image SL and the character image MJ are randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17 and the first movable role item 14. However, these images may be displayed with a certain regularity.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine comprising: a plurality of transparent and movable first image display areas;
The plurality of first image display areas are
Transitionable between a first state relatively close to each other and a second state relatively separated from each other,
It is possible to switch between a state in which a predetermined image can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize each.
In the first state, by making the predetermined image visible, it is possible to execute a first effect of forming an image representing one specific target among a plurality of the predetermined images. A game machine characterized by
態 様 [Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1 further includes
It has a second image display area that can be switched to a state in which the image can be viewed and a state in which the image can not be viewed.
The image represented in the second image display area can be viewed through the one image display area.
In the first effect, an image associated with an image representing the specific object is displayed in the second image display area.
[Aspect A6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-2,
The plurality of first image display areas are arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners of the second image display area in the second state, respectively, from the second state to the first state. When making a transition, each moves toward the vicinity of the center of the second image display area.
[Aspect A6-4]
A game machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-3, wherein
After the first effect, the plurality of first image display areas transition to the second state.
態 様 [Aspect A6-5]
A game machine according to any one of modes A6-1 to A6-4, wherein
The plurality of first image display areas are
Each can be switched between a state in which an image different from the predetermined image can be visually recognized and a state in which the image is difficult to visually recognize,
While transitioning from the first state to the second state, it is possible to execute a second effect of repeating a state in which an image different from the specific image can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize. Gaming machine.
[Aspect A6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-5 further includes
It has a third image display area that can be switched to a state in which the image can be viewed and a state in which the image can not be viewed.
In the first effect, it is possible to visually recognize an image representing the specific object through the third image display area.

  The interlocking effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. This interlocking effect can be performed, for example, during the change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction for executing the interlocked effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. It is an effect of displaying an image.

[Linked production A]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the interlocking effect A. The light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7 a, but the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when describing the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. The first movable part 14 is retracted at the retraction position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four light transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each have an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be viewed and a state in which the image is difficult to view. Further, the four transmissive members are each configured to be movable in front of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 77 (A), in the interlocking effect A, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. This variable display can be visually recognized through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the advancing movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, a character partial image BN representing a part (1⁄4 part) of the smile face character image is visible to each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four members having transparency to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), a movable combination of effects in which substantially the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second embodiment ). At this time, each of the four permeable members may be in contact with each other, or may be slightly spaced. The movable character combination image effects the four character partial images BN close to each other to form a smile face character image as a whole. That is, by collecting the four members of the first movable part 14 at the advanced position, it is possible to form an image (a smile face character image) representing one specific object in all of the four character partial images BN.

  At this time, the related image display effect may be performed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, on the smile face character image formed by the whole of the character partial image BN represented on the four members of the first movable character 14, and on the display screen 7a on the rear side of the smile face character image, the smile face character image is displayed. An image associated with the face character image may be displayed. For example, the effect image EF may be displayed in accordance with the outline of the smile face character image. If the effect image EF is a ring-shaped light image that matches the contour of the smile face character image, the effect is that light is emitted from the smile face character image. Thus, a character image representing one target (here, a smiley face) is constituted by the plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable role 14, and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect images EF, it is possible to perform a display effect in which many elements are intertwined in a complex manner. This can further entertain the player.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (D) and FIG. 77 (E), the retraction movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a from the state in which the four transparent members cover the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in the direction away from each other. At this time, the character partial image BN is visible to each of the four members having transparency. Thereafter, each of the four transmissive members is moved to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be viewed without passing through the first movable part 14 (first aspect).

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 77 (F), 77 (G), and 74 (H), the advancing movement effect of the first movable role object 14 is executed again. That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a (transition from the first mode to the second mode). At this time, a follow-up image TJ that follows (interlocks with) the movement of the four transmissive members is displayed on the display screen 7a. The follow-up image TJ is an image displayed on the area of the display screen 7a that is the back surface of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14, and the shape of the four transmissive members and It has almost the same shape. That is, the follow-up image TJ has the same shape as the area on the back surface of the four transmissive members in the display screen 7a. Here, the four transmissive members each have a rectangular shape, and the follow-up image TJ also has the same rectangular shape as that. In other words, the four follow-up images TJ have a shape along the outline of each of the four transmissive members. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the follow-up image TJ appears to be displayed on the four transmissive members. In this interlocking effect, when the four (members having transparency) transmission areas transition from the first aspect to the second aspect, the four follow-up images TJ move in conjunction with the respective movements of the four transmission areas, Each of the following images TJ in motion becomes visible through each of the four transmitting regions in motion. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, substantially the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). In addition, four follow-up images TJ are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, the follow-up images TJ each include a face image of a character, and the effect button 63 is used to execute a selection effect of the player selecting one character.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (I), the retraction movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a from the state in which the four transparent members cover the display screen 7a. At this time, the follow-up image TJ moves toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movement of the four transmissive members. That is, when the four transmissive members are retracted, the area on the back surface of the four transmissive members in the display screen 7a is reduced, so the display region of the follow-up image TJ is also reduced. By such an effect, when viewed from the player, the follow-up image TJ appears to be displayed on a member having four transparency. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in the area visible on the display screen 7a without the first movable character 14. Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (J), a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions of the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect of making the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 visually recognizable at random is performed. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposing effect is performed in which the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random, superimposed on the stop-displayed decorative pattern. Due to this superimposed effect, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed explode and disappear. That is, the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 randomly appears on the stop-displayed decoration symbol, so that it is possible to produce an effect such that the decoration symbol is destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started.

[Linked production B]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the interlocking effect B. The light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7 a, but the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when describing the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. In addition, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retraction position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four light transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each have an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be viewed and a state in which the image is difficult to view.

  As shown in FIG. 78A, in the interlocking effect B, on the display screen 7a, a face image KG that follows (moves in conjunction with) the movement of the four members having transparency is displayed. At least a portion of the face image KG is displayed on the area of the display screen 7 a which is the back surface of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the face image KG is visible in part through the four transmissive members. In addition, on the display screen 7a, a decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The face image KG and the variable display can be visually recognized through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), the advancing movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, the four face images KG of the display screen 7a move (following interlocking) with the movement of the four permeable members of the first movable part 14. Thereby, the four face images KG are continuously visible through the four transmissive members while moving the four transmissive members, and the other portion is four transmissive. It will be in the state which can be visually recognized without passing through the member which has.

  During the movement of the four transmissive members, a character partial image BN representing a part (1⁄4 portion) of the smile face character image is visible to each member. By moving each of the four members having transparency to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), a movable combination of effects in which substantially the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second embodiment ). At this time, each of the four permeable members may be in contact with each other, or may be slightly spaced. The movable character combination image effects the four character partial images BN close to each other to form a smile face character image as a whole. That is, by collecting the four members of the first movable part 14 at the advanced position, it is possible to form an image (a smile face character image) representing one specific object in all of the four character partial images BN.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78C, the related image display effect is performed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, on the smile face character image formed by the whole of the character partial image BN represented on the four members of the first movable character 14, and on the display screen 7a on the rear side of the smile face character image, the smile face character image is displayed. An image associated with the face character image is displayed. Here, the effect image EF is displayed in accordance with the outline of the smile face character image. The effect image EF is a ring-shaped light image that matches the outline of the smile face character image, and is an effect such that light is emitted from the smile face character image. Thus, a character image representing one target (here, a smiley face) is constituted by the plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable role 14, and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect images EF, it is possible to perform a display effect in which many elements are intertwined in a complex manner. This can further entertain the player. The four face images KG are displayed continuously.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (D) and FIG. 78 (E), the retraction movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a from the state in which the four transparent members cover the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in the direction away from each other. At this time, the four face images KG of the display screen 7a move (following interlocking) with the movement of the four permeable members of the first movable part 14. Thereby, the four face images KG are continuously visible through the four transmissive members while moving the four transmissive members, and the other portion is four transmissive. It will be in the state which can be visually recognized without passing through the member which has.

  During the movement of the four transmissive members, a character partial image BN representing a part (1⁄4 portion) of the smile face character image is visible to each member. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78E, each of the four transmissive members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be viewed without the first movable part (1st aspect).

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 78F, 78G, and 78H, the advancing movement effect of the first movable role object 14 is executed again. That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, on the display screen 7a, a frame image WG that follows (interlocks with) the movement of the four transmissive members is displayed. The frame image WG is an image displayed on the back surface of the display screen 7 a that is the back of the four transmissive members of the first movable part 14, and has an outer shape of the four transmissive members. It has almost the same shape. That is, the frame image WG has a shape along the outer shape of the area to be the back surface of the four transmissive members in the display screen 7a. Here, the four members having transparency each have a rectangular shape, and the frame image WG is also the same rectangular frame image as that. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, substantially the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). In addition, four frame images WG are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, a combination effect is performed inside the frame image WG such that the character image MJ represented by the four transmissive members can be viewed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (I), the retraction movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a from the state in which the four transparent members cover the display screen 7a. At this time, the frame image WG moves toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movement of the four transmissive members. That is, when the four transmissive members are retracted, the area on the back surface of the four transmissive members of the display screen 7a is reduced, so only a part of the frame image WG is displayed and displayed. The part shrinks. By such an effect, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on a member having four transparency when viewed from the player. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in the area visible on the display screen 7a without the first movable character 14. Then, a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions of the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect of making the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 visually recognizable at random is performed. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposing effect is performed in which the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random, superimposed on the stop-displayed decorative pattern. By this superposition effect, as shown in FIG. 78 (J), the decorative symbol stopped and displayed explodes and disappears. That is, the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 randomly appears on the stop-displayed decoration symbol, so that it is possible to produce an effect such that the decoration symbol is destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started.

[Linked production C]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the interlocking effect C. The light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7 a, but the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when describing the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. In addition, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retraction position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four light transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each have an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be viewed and a state in which the image is difficult to view.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 (A), 79 (B) and 79 (C), in the interlocking effect C, the advancing movement effect of the first movable role object 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in a direction approaching each other. On the display screen 7a, four timer images TM that follow (move in conjunction with) the movement of the four transmissive members are displayed. The timer image TM is an image displayed on a region on the back surface of the four transmissive members of the first movable part 14 in the display screen 7 a, and is a two-digit number representing a timer value (count value) The digital image (digital display image) is included. The timer image TM has a frame image of substantially the same shape as the outline of the four transmissive members. The frame image has a shape along the outline of the area on the back of the four transmissive members of the display screen 7a. Here, the four transmissive members each have a rectangular shape, and the frame image also has the same rectangular shape. The timer image TM appears to be displayed on the four transparent members when viewed from the player. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, substantially the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). In addition, four timer images TM are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the four timer images TM are displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) time has elapsed after the display. Here, the four timer images TM have different timer values “10”, “14”, “15” and “12”, respectively, and the timer values are decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 79D and 79E, when the timer value of one of the timer images TM (here, upper left) becomes 0 (zero), the timer image TM, and A retreat movement effect of a member having transparency corresponding to the timer image TM in the first movable role object 14 is executed. Specifically, from the state in which one of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable character 14 (upper left here) covers the display screen 7a, the retracted positions of the four corners of the display screen 7a Move towards The other three permeable members do not move. The upper left timer image TM in which the timer value becomes 0 (zero) moves following the movement of the upper left transparent member (cooperatively). As a result, when viewed from the player, the timer image TM is displayed on the transparent member and appears to move as it is. Then, in the portion of the display screen 7a where the timer image TM disappears, part of the variable display becomes visible.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 79F and 79G, when the timer value of the next one (here, the lower right) in the timer image TM becomes 0 (zero), the timer image is displayed. A retreat movement effect of a member having transparency corresponding to the timer image TM among the TM and the first movable part 14 is executed. Specifically, the display is performed from the state in which one of the remaining three covering the display screen 7a among the four transparent members constituting the first movable part 14 covers the display screen 7a. It moves toward the retracted position of the four corners of the screen 7a. The remaining two permeable members do not move. The lower right timer image TM in which the timer value becomes 0 (zero) moves following (cooperating with) the movement of the lower right transparent member. As a result, when viewed from the player, the timer image TM is displayed on the transparent member and appears to move as it is. Then, in the portion of the display screen 7a where the timer image TM disappears, part of the variable display becomes visible.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79H, when the timer value of the next one (here, upper right) in the timer image TM becomes 0 (zero), the timer image TM and the first movable are generated. A retreat movement effect of the member of the accessory 14 having transparency corresponding to the timer image TM is executed. Specifically, the display is performed from the state in which one of the remaining two covering the display screen 7a among the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 covers the display screen 7a. It moves toward the retracted position of the four corners of the screen 7a. The remaining one permeable member does not move. The timer image TM in the upper right where the timer value is 0 (zero) moves following the movement of the transparent member in the upper right (in conjunction). As a result, when viewed from the player, the timer image TM is displayed on the transparent member and appears to move as it is. Then, in the portion of the display screen 7a where the timer image TM disappears, part of the variable display becomes visible.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 79 (I) and 79 (J), when the timer value of the last one (here, the lower left) in the timer image TM becomes 0 (zero), the timer image TM is selected. And, the retraction movement effect of the member having the transparency corresponding to the timer image TM among the first movable roles 14 is executed. Then, after the entire variable display becomes visible, as shown in FIG. 79 (J), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Linked production D]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the interlocking effect D. The light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7 a, but the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when describing the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. In addition, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retraction position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four light transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each have an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be viewed and a state in which the image is difficult to view.

  In the interlocking effect D, as shown in FIGS. 80 (A), 80 (B), and 80 (C), the advancing movement effect of the first movable role object 14 is executed. That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, on the display screen 7a, a frame image WG that follows (interlocks with) the movement of the four transmissive members is displayed. The frame image WG is an image displayed on the back surface of the display screen 7 a that is the back of the four transmissive members of the first movable part 14, and has an outer shape of the four transmissive members. It has almost the same shape. That is, the frame image WG has a shape along the outer shape of the area to be the back surface of the four transmissive members in the display screen 7a. Here, the four members having transparency each have a rectangular shape, and the frame image WG is also the same rectangular frame image as that. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, substantially the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). In addition, four frame images WG are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. In addition, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is additionally executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. It has become.

  During the movement of the four transmissive members, a character partial image BN representing a part (1⁄4 portion) of the smile face character image is visible to each member. Here, a combination effect that makes the character partial image BN visible is performed inside the frame image WG. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, four character partial images BN are close to each other to form a smile face character image as a whole. That is, by collecting the four members of the first movable part 14 at the advanced position, it is possible to form an image (a smile face character image) representing one specific object in all of the four character partial images BN.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (D) and FIG. 80 (E), the retraction movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a from the state in which the four transparent members cover the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in the direction away from each other. At this time, the four frame images WG of the display screen 7a move toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movement of the four transmissive members. That is, when the four transmissive members are retracted, the area on the back surface of the four transmissive members of the display screen 7a is reduced, so only a part of the frame image WG is displayed and displayed. The part shrinks. By such an effect, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on a member having four transparency when viewed from the player.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (D), in the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed on the area visible without the first movable character 14 Be done. Then, a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions of the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect of making the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 visually recognizable at random is performed. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposing effect is performed in which the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random, superimposed on the stop-displayed decorative pattern. As shown in FIG. 80 (E), the decorative symbol stopped and displayed explodes and disappears due to this superimposed effect. That is, the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 randomly appears on the stop-displayed decoration symbol, so that it is possible to produce an effect such that the decoration symbol is destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative symbol explodes and disappears, the next variation display is started as shown in FIG. 80 (F).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80F, FIG. 80G, and FIG. 80H, the advancing movement effect of the first movable role object 14 is executed again. That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, on the display screen 7a, a frame image WG which continuously follows (links with) the movement of the four transmissive members is displayed. Due to the same configuration as described above, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on the four transparent members when viewed from the player. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, substantially the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). In addition, four frame images WG are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, a combination effect is performed inside the frame image WG such that the character image MJ represented by the four transmissive members can be viewed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (I), the retraction movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a from the state in which the four transparent members cover the display screen 7a. At this time, the frame image WG moves toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movement of the four transmissive members. That is, when the four transmissive members are retracted, the area on the back surface of the four transmissive members of the display screen 7a is reduced, so only a part of the frame image WG is displayed and displayed. The part shrinks. By such an effect, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on a member having four transparency when viewed from the player. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in the area visible on the display screen 7a without the first movable character 14. Then, a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions of the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect of making the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 visually recognizable at random is performed. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposing effect is performed in which the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random, superimposed on the stop-displayed decorative pattern. As shown in FIG. 80 (J), the decorative symbol stopped and displayed explodes and disappears due to this superimposed effect. That is, the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 randomly appears on the stop-displayed decoration symbol, so that it is possible to produce an effect such that the decoration symbol is destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of interlocking production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, a first movable combination 14 having transparency and movable and a display screen 7a capable of displaying an image are provided. 14 is movable in front of the display screen 7a, and the first movable part 14 and the following image TJ displayed on the display screen 7a move in conjunction with each other to move the first movable part in movement. It is possible to execute an interlocking effect in which the following image TJ in motion can be visually recognized through 14. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the first movable part 14 includes four transmissive regions (movable light guide plates) each having transparency and being movable. The transmissive area can be transitioned to a first mode in which the two are relatively close to each other, and a second mode in which the relative areas are relatively separated, and in the interlocking effect, the four transmissive areas are transitioned from the first to the second mode When the four follow-up images TJ move in conjunction with the respective movements of the four transmission areas, the follow-up images TJ being moved can be viewed through the respective four transmission areas in movement. Become. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the four transmission areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable part 14 correspond to the four corners of the display screen 7a in the second mode, respectively. It is disposed at a position, and moves toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a when transitioning from the second mode to the first mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the follow-up image TJ has a shape along the outer shape of each of the four transmission areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable part 14. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the four transmissive areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable character 14 can each display the character partial image BN, and the transmissive areas are displayed. A combined effect can be performed by the character partial image BN to be displayed and the effect image EF displayed by the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, is provided with a light guide plate 17 which has transparency and is disposed on the front of the first movable part 14 and the display screen 7a. Smile image SL can be displayed, and a combined effect can be performed by the smile image SL displayed by the light guide plate 17 and the decorative pattern displayed by the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of interlocking production is shown.
[Modification 1]
The follow-up image TJ in FIG. 77 is not limited to the above configuration. The follow-up image TJ may be, for example, an image having a shape substantially along the outline of the four members (movable light guide plate) of the first movable part 14 or a part of the outline of the four members (movable light guide plate) It may be an image of a shape along the The shape generally along means a shape that allows the player to recognize that the shapes of the four members (movable light guide plates) correspond to the shapes of the follow-up image TJ image.

[Modification 2]
The content of each interlocking effect of FIGS. 77 to 80 may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the interlocking effect A of FIG. 77, a timer image TM as shown in FIG. 79, an advance movement effect of the first movable role object 14, and a withdrawal movement effect may be combined.
[Modification 3]
The smile image SL and the character image MJ displayed on the light guide plate 17 and the first movable role object 14 may be displayed at random or have certain regularity in each of the interlocking effects of FIGS. 77 to 80. May be displayed.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A7-1]
Permeable and movable movable parts;
An image display area capable of displaying an image;
The movable part is movable in front of the image display area,
An interlocking effect in which the specific image in motion can be viewed through the movable character by moving the movable character and the specific image displayed in the image display area in conjunction with each other. A game machine characterized by being executable.
態 様 [Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-1,
The movable parts each include a plurality of permeable and movable permeable areas,
The plurality of transmission regions can be transitioned to a first state relatively close to each other and a second state relatively separated from each other,
In the interlocking effect, when the plurality of transmission areas transit from the first state to the second state, the plurality of specific images move in conjunction with the movement of the plurality of transmission areas, and move A game machine characterized in that each of the specific images in motion can be viewed through each of the plurality of transparent areas in the game.
[Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-2,
The plurality of transmission areas are disposed at positions corresponding to the four corners of the image display area in the second state, respectively, and when transitioning from the second state to the first state, Each game machine is characterized by moving toward the center of the image display area.
[Aspect A7-4]
A game machine according to aspect A7-2 or aspect A7-3, wherein
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific image has a shape along an outer shape of each of the plurality of transmission areas.
態 様 [Aspect A7-5]
A game machine according to any one of Aspects A7-2 to A7-4, wherein
Each of the plurality of transmission areas can display an image;
It is possible to execute a combined effect by an image displayed by the transparent area and an image displayed by the image display area.
態 様 [Aspect A7-6]
In the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-5,
Permeable, comprising the movable part and a front area arranged in front of the image display area;
The front area can display an image;
It is possible to execute a combined effect by an image displayed by the front area and an image displayed by the image display area.

  The on-hold icon image matching effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. The reserved icon image matching effect may be executed during the movement of the special symbol. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction to execute the icon image coincidence effect on hold is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are outputted from the ROM 103. It is an effect of reading out and displaying an image on the display screen 7a. The reserved icon image matching effect is performed during one change (one change effect) of the special symbol. It should be noted that the pending icon image matching effect may be performed during a plurality of changes (a plurality of change effects) of the special symbol.

[Hold icon image matching effect A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon image matching effect A.
In the pending icon image matching effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the timer display frequency suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), a specific image display effect is executed. In this specific image display effect, the specific image XB1 and the character CRA are displayed. The specific image XB1 is displayed near the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the rhombus image XB11 is disposed in the rectangular image XB12. In the rhombus image XB11, a brick-like pattern is applied, and the letter "S" is shown in the middle.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81C, a specific image suction effect is executed. In this specific image suction effect, the character CRA stores the specific image XB1 in the character CRA so as to suck it. Therefore, the specific image XB1 disappears from the display screen 7a once.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (D), the pending icon change presentation is executed. In this hold icon change effect, the diamond image XB11 of the specific image XB1 sucked by the character CRA is extracted in the direction of the hold icon display area where the hold icon is displayed, whereby one of the hold icons 9A is Hold change (one of pre-reading effects) to the same shape as the rhombus image XB11. The size of the holding icon 9A changed to the same shape as the rhombus image XB11 is smaller than that of the rhombus image XB11.
That is, in the hold icon image matching effect A, one of the hold icons changes to the same shape as a part of the specific image XB1 (the rhombus image XB11) is reduced.

[Hold icon image matching effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon image matching effect B.
In the pending icon image matching effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 82 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the timer display frequency suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), a specific image display effect is executed. In this specific image display effect, the specific image XB1 and the character CRA are displayed. The specific image XB2 is displayed near the approximate center of the display screen 7a. The specific image XB2 has a rhombus shape, a brick-like pattern, and the letter "S" is shown in the middle.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), a specific image suction effect is executed. In this specific image suction effect, the character CRA stores the specific image XB2 in the character CRA so as to suck it. Therefore, the specific image XB2 once disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (D), the pending icon change presentation is executed. In this hold icon change effect, the specific image XB2 sucked by the character CRA is extracted in the direction of the hold icon display area where the hold icon is displayed, whereby one of the hold icons 9A has the same shape as the specific image XB2. Hold change to (one of pre-reading effects). The size of the holding icon 9A changed to the same shape as the specific image XB2 is smaller than the specific image XB2.
That is, in the pending icon image matching effect B, one of the pending icons changes to the same shape as the reduced specific image XB 2 itself.

[Hold icon image match production C]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon image matching effect C.
In the reserved icon image matching effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the timer display frequency suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the specific image display effect is executed. In this specific image display effect, the specific image XB1 and the character CRA are displayed. The specific image XB2 is displayed near the approximate center of the display screen 7a. The specific image XB2 has a rhombus shape, a brick-like pattern, and the letter "S" is shown in the middle.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83C, a third movable role effect is executed. In this third movable service effect, the third movable character 18 is moved such that the specific image XB2 is positioned inside the third movable character 18. In other words, the third movable part 18 and the specific image XB2 are arranged such that the outer peripheral part of the specific image XB2 is adjacent to the inner peripheral part of the third movable part 18. Here, the integral formation (mark, design) formed of the third movable part 18 and the specific image XB2 is also referred to as a specific mark.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), a specific image suction effect is executed. In this specific image suction effect, the character CRA stores the specific mark (or the specific image XB2) in the character CRA so as to suck it. At this time, the specific image XB2 temporarily disappears from the display screen 7a, and the third movable role object 18 returns to the home position.
Alternatively, at the timing of the specific image suction effect, instead of the specific image suction effect, the third movable combination 18 may be returned to the home position, and the specific image XB2 may be continuously displayed as it is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (E), the pending icon change presentation is executed. In this pending icon change effect, the specific mark (or the specific image XB2) sucked by the character CRA is extracted in the direction of the pending icon display area where the pending icon is displayed, whereby one of the pending icons 9A is identified. Hold change (one of pre-reading effects) to the same shape as the image XB2. The size of the holding icon 9A changed to the same shape as the specific image XB2 is smaller than the specific image XB2.
That is, in the pending icon image matching effect C, one of the pending icons changes to the same shape as the specific image XB2 is reduced.

[Hold icon image matching effect D]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon image matching effect D.
In the reserved icon image matching effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the timer display frequency suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), a specific image display effect is executed. In this specific image display effect, the specific image XB1 and the character CRA are displayed. The specific image XB2 is displayed near the approximate center of the display screen 7a. The specific image XB2 is given a brick-like pattern, and the letter "S" is shown in the middle.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84C, the third movable role effect is performed. In this third movable service effect, the third movable character 18 is moved such that the specific image XB2 is positioned inside the third movable character 18. In other words, the third movable part 18 and the specific image XB2 are arranged such that the outer peripheral part of the specific image XB2 is adjacent to the inner peripheral part of the third movable part 18. Here, the integral formation (mark, design) formed of the third movable part 18 and the specific image XB2 is also referred to as a specific mark.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (D), a specific image suction effect is executed. In this specific image suction effect, the character CRA is stored in the character CRA so as to suck the specific mark. At this time, the specific image XB2 temporarily disappears from the display screen 7a, and the third movable role object 18 returns to the home position.
Alternatively, at the timing of the specific image suction effect, instead of the specific image suction effect, the third movable combination 18 may be returned to the home position, and the specific image XB2 may be continuously displayed as it is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), the pending icon change presentation is executed. In this hold icon change effect, the specific mark sucked by the character CRA is extracted in the direction of the hold icon display area where the hold icon is displayed, whereby one of the hold icons 9A is held in the same shape as the specific mark Change (one of the pre-reading effects). In addition, the size of the holding icon 9A changed to the same shape as the specific mark is smaller than the specific mark.
That is, in the pending icon image matching effect D, one of the pending icons changes to the same shape as the specific mark is reduced.

  In the above-mentioned pending icon image matching effects A to D, another effect (such as another pending icon image matching effect) may be incorporated as one effect.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of a pending | holding icon image matching presentation is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the hold icon image matching effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the specific image is displayed in the specific image display effect, and the hold icon in the same manner as the specific image is displayed in the hold icon change effect. Be done. According to this configuration, since the specific image and one of the hold icons are in the same form in part, the display of the specific image can increase the player's expectation for a change in hold, and thus the game is It can improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the hold icon image matching effects B and C, the specific image XB2 is displayed in the specific image display effect, and the hold icon having the same mode (shape) as the specific image XB2 is displayed in the hold icon change effect. According to this configuration, since the specific image XB2 and one of the holding icons have the same form (shape), the display of the specific image XB2 can further enhance the player's expectation for the holding change. , You can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the on-hold icon image matching effects A to D, the on-hold icon change effect is performed after the specific image display effect. According to this configuration, since the hold icon change presentation is performed after the display of the specific image, when the display of the specific image is performed, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of expectation for the hold change. Can improve the interest of

[Effect 4]
In the hold icon image matching effects A to D, a normal hold icon is displayed before the specific image is displayed, and after the specific image is displayed, a normal hold icon to a hold icon having at least a part of the specific image Hold change effect is performed to According to this configuration, it is possible to highlight the display of the hold icon having at least a part of the specific image, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the hold icon image matching effects C to D, a third role moving effect for moving the third movable role object 18 is executed when the specific image XB2 is displayed. According to this configuration, the display of the specific image XB2 can be highlighted, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the above-mentioned reserved icon image matching effects C to D, when the specific image XB2 is displayed, the third role moving effect for moving the third movable role object 18 is executed, and the specific image XB2 and the third movable position object 18 forms one mark (specific mark). According to this configuration, since the specific mark can be formed by the specific image XB2 and the third movable part 18, the display of the specific image XB2 can be emphasized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of pending | retaining icon image matching presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the hold icon image matching effect of the gaming machine of the above embodiment, the specific image and the hold icon are partially the same (or the same) in shape, but the specific image and the hold icon are partially the same (or the same) For example, the specific image and the holding icon may have the same or a same outline shape, or may have a same or the same pattern or color.

[Modification 2]
In the on-hold icon image matching effects C and D, the color of the on-hold icon changed on-off in the on-hold icon change effect may be different from or the same as the color of the specific mark.

[Modification 3]
In the hold icon image matching effects C and D, the third movable role 18 may be moved to hide the hold icon so as to temporarily hide the hold icon, and then the hold icon may be changed. In this case, the third movable part 18 may cover all or part of the hold icon.

[Modification 4]
In the on-hold icon image matching effects C and D, the on-hold change in the on-hold icon change effect may be performed after the third movable role object 18 returns from the deployed position to the home position.

[Modification 5]
In the suspension icon image matching effects C and D, when the third movable combination 18 moves to the end of the display screen 7a, an image moving from the end to the suspension icon is displayed, and the image is displayed. The hold change may be performed upon reaching the hold icon. In this case, when the image reaches the hold icon, a suggestion image indicating that the image has reached is displayed. This end may be at a position opposite to the position at which the hold icon is displayed.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XB-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying the hold icon of the first aspect,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined image larger than the hold icon of the first aspect,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect and the second display effect.
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, and the hold icon of the first aspect of the first display effect and the predetermined image of the second display effect are , Part is the same aspect,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XB-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-1,
The hold icon of the first aspect of the first display effect and the predetermined image of the second display effect are the same aspect,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XB-3]
A game machine according to aspect XB-1 or aspect XB-2,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XB-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect of displaying a second icon of the hold icon different from the shape of the first icon of the hold icon,
The combination effect may include the third display effect in some cases.
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed before the second display effect, and the hold icon of the second aspect is displayed in the third display effect in the first display effect. And the hold icon of the first aspect is displayed instead of
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XB-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect of moving the movable role to the front of the display means,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect in some cases.
In the combination effect, when the second display effect is performed, the fourth display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XB-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-5,
In the combination effect, one mark is formed by the predetermined image of the second display effect and the movable combination of the fourth display effect.
A game machine characterized by

  The movable object impact presentation will be described below with reference to FIGS. This movable combination impact presentation may be performed during the movement of the special symbol. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction for executing the movable object shock effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are outputted from the ROM 103. It is an effect of reading out and displaying an image on the display screen 7a. This movable role product impact presentation is performed during one variation (one variation presentation) of the special symbol. In addition, you may make it perform a movable part thing impact | play effect during several times of the fluctuation | variation (a several fluctuation | variation effect | action) of a special symbol.

[Movable role shocking effect A]
FIG. 85 is a view for explaining the movable effect impact presentation A.
In the movable role product impact effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the timer display frequency suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), an accessory movable effect is executed. In this feature moving effect, the peripheral portion of the second movable portion 15 is moved to the upper edge portion of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second movable part 15 is at a position not covering the display screen 7a as seen from the player. Therefore, it appears to the player that the peripheral edge of the second movable role object 15 and the upper edge of the display screen 7a are adjacent to each other.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85C, the on-hold change presentation is performed. In this on-hold change effect, one of the on-hold icons 9A changes on hold with the second movable combination 15 positioned at the upper edge of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 85 (C), the pending icon 9A that has undergone the pending change is indicated by cross hatching. The on-hold change effect is one of the pre-read effects.

[Movable role shocking effect B]
FIG. 86 is a view for explaining the movable effect impact presentation B.
In movable product impact effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the timer display frequency suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), an accessory movable effect is executed. In this feature movable effect, the second movable role 15 is moved to the upper part of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second movable part 15 is at a position where a part thereof covers the display screen 7 a as viewed from the player. That is, it appears to the player that a part of the second movable role object 15 covers a part of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86C, the on-hold change presentation is performed. In this on-hold change effect, one of the on-hold icons 9A changes on hold with the second movable combination 15 positioned at the upper edge of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 86 (C), the pending icon 9A that has undergone the pending change is indicated by cross hatching. The on-hold change effect is one of the pre-read effects.

[Movable role shocking effect C]
FIG. 87 is a view for explaining movable effect impact presentation C. FIG.
In movable product impact effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the timer display frequency suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), a bonus moving effect is performed. In this feature movable effect, the second movable role 15 is moved to the upper part of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second movable part 15 is at a position where a part thereof covers the display screen 7 a as viewed from the player. That is, it appears to the player that a part of the second movable role object 15 covers a part of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), the screen shaking effect is performed. In this screen shaking effect, the second movable part 15 moves to the display screen 7a, which is an effect indicating that the display screen 7a is shaken by the impact, and more specifically, on the display screen 7a A state in which the character CRA (character display area) and the holding icons 9A and 9C (holding area) sway (a state of vibrating) is shown. Further, in the screen shaking effect, a predetermined sound effect (such as a beep) is notified from the speaker 67.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), the hold change presentation is performed. In the on-hold change effect, one on-hold icon 9A changes on-hold due to the screen swing effect. In FIG. 87 (D), the hold icon 9A which has been changed is indicated by cross hatching. The on-hold change effect is one of the pre-read effects.
Note that the screen shaking effect and the on-hold change effect may be simultaneously performed.

[Movable role shocking effect D]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the movable effect impact presentation D.
In the movable character impact effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the timer display frequency suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), a bonus moving effect is performed. In this feature movable effect, the second movable role 15 is moved to the upper part of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second movable part 15 is at a position where a part thereof covers the display screen 7 a as viewed from the player. That is, it appears to the player that a part of the second movable role object 15 covers a part of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (C), an effect is performed. In the inazuma effect, the second movable mobile object 15 moves to the display screen 7a, whereby a second image XC1 is displayed. The enamel image XC1 is an image representing a state in which the lightning extends from the second movable character 15 toward the holding icon 9A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), the arrival achievement suggestion effect is performed. In the inan arrival attainment directing effect, the inning attainment suggesting image XC2 is displayed by performing the inan out directing. The inan arrival attainment suggestion image XC2 is displayed around the holding icon 9A that the inazuma image XC1 has reached from the second movable role 15 by the ina-nd effect, and that the inan has reached the holding icon 9A. This is a suggested image.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (E), the pending change presentation is performed. In the on-hold change presentation, the on-hold icon 9A on which the arrival suggestion image XC2 is displayed changes on hold. The on-hold change effect is one of the pre-read effects.

In addition, in said movable role thing impact production A-D, another effect (other movable role thing impact production etc.) may be integrated, and it is good also as one production.
In the movable role product impact effects A to D, the storage icons 9a, 9b, 9c are displayed on the display screen 7a in a storage area adjacent to the lower end opposite to the upper end.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of movable character thing impact production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the movable role product shock effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second movable is possible when the hold icon of the first mode (the same mode as the decorative symbol variation effect. Normal mode) is displayed. As the bonus item movable presentation is performed in which the bonus item 15 is moved, and the bonus item movable presentation is performed, one of the hold icons changes to hold and becomes a hold icon of the second mode. According to this configuration, since the character movable effect is performed at the time of the hold change, the player can be made to have a sense of expectation for the jackpot simply by moving the movable character (the second movable character 15). Can improve the interest of

[Effect 2]
In the movable object impact effects A to D, the holding change effect is performed by moving the second movable object 15 from the home position to the end (upper end) of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the hold change effect is performed by moving the second movable part 15 from the home position to the end (upper end) of the display screen 7a, so that the movable part (second movable part 15) By moving to the end of the display screen 7a, the player can be made to have a sense of expectation for the jackpot, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the movable combination impact effects B to D, the holding change effect is performed by moving the second movable combination 15 from the home position to the front of the end (upper end) of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the hold change presentation is performed by moving the second movable combination 15 from the home position to the front of the end (upper end) of the display screen 7a, so that the movable combination (second movable combination By moving 15) in front of the end of the display screen 7a, the player can be made to feel a sense of expectation for the jackpot, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the movable combination impact effects A to D, the hold icon is displayed on the hold area arranged adjacent to the lower end corresponding to the upper end on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, when the second movable combination 15 moves to the upper end of the display screen 7a, the holding icon located at the lower end opposite to the upper end changes to hold, so that a dynamic feeling is obtained as a whole effect To improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the above movable character impact effect C, by performing the character movable effect, the screen shaking effect is performed, and the on-hold change effect is performed. According to this configuration, when the second movable combination 15 is moved, the screen shaking effect is performed by the impact and the hold change effect is performed. Therefore, the hold change effect can be made to stand out by the screen shake effect, The interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the movable object impact effect C, a predetermined sound effect (such as a beep) is notified from the speaker 67 in the screen shaking effect. According to this configuration, when the screen shake effect is performed and the on-hold change effect is performed, the on-hold change effect can be highlighted with a predetermined sound sound, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of movable role thing impact production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the movable combination impact effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the second movable combination 15 comes to the upper end of the display screen 7a, the holding icon changes hold, but it is limited to this Alternatively, the hold icon may be held and changed on the occasion that the second movable part 15 is moved. In addition, when the second movable combination 15 comes not to the upper end of the display screen 7a but to the lower end, the left end, the right end, the center or the like, the holding icon may be changed to be held.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XC-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying the hold icon of the first aspect,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a character moving effect of moving a movable character,
The third display effect is an effect of changing the hold icon of the first aspect to the hold icon of the second aspect,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and the second display effect is performed. , The third display effect is performed,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XC-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-1,
The movable part has a home position different from the front of the display means,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the third display effect is performed by performing an article movable effect to move the movable role from the home position to the first end of the display means. Takes place,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XC-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-2,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, an item movability effect is performed by which the movable role is moved from the home position to the front of the first end of the display means. Display production is performed,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XC-4]
A game machine according to aspect XC-2 or aspect XC-3, wherein
The hold icon is displayed on the hold means disposed adjacent to a second end opposite to the first end on the display means.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XC-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-4,
In the combination effect, by performing the second display effect, a swing effect is performed in which a predetermined display area including the reserved area in the display unit is shaken, and the third display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XC-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-5,
In the combination effect, when the swing effect is performed in the display means, a predetermined sound effect is notified.
A game machine characterized by

  The on-hold display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. This suspension display effect is an effect that can be executed according to the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "special symbol"), and more specifically, the suspension display of the first special symbol It is an effect of displaying the hold display of the second special symbol and the second special symbol integrally and displaying it at a plurality of places.

[Pending display effect A]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect A.
In the suspension display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), the decorative symbol fluctuation effect is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 89A, the gaming state is the normal state (low probability and low base state), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).
In addition, the number-of-holds display area HR is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. The number-of-retentions display area HR is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and H1 and H2 indicating numbers of numbers of reservations are displayed in close proximity to each other in the area. For example, the hold number display area HR is displayed in black, and H1 and H2 are displayed in white to be noticeable. H1 shows the number of reservations for the first special symbol, and H2 shows the number of reservations for the second special symbol. Furthermore, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, K1 and K2 indicating the number of reservations by numbers are displayed in close proximity to each other in the vertical direction. K1 indicates the number of reservations associated with the first special symbol in the same manner as H1, and K2 indicates the number of reservations associated with the second special symbol in the same manner as H2. That is, in the holding display effect A, the number of holdings related to the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21 is integrally displayed in two places on the upper left side and the lower right side of the display screen 7a. In other words, the number of reservations associated with the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 is integrally displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen 7a. The numbers H1, H2 and K1, K2 indicating the number of reservations are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a and are never erased. In FIG. 89A, H1 and K1 indicate "3", H2 and K2 indicate "0", and the number of reservations for the first special symbol is "3" and the number of reservations for the second special symbol is " It is suggested that it is "0". This is because it is difficult to win the second starting hole 21 when the gaming state is the normal state. In the hold display effect A, the hold icon 9A relating to the first special symbol described above, the hold icon 9B pertaining to the second special symbol, and the hold icon (hold digested image) 9C (FIG. 1) may also be displayed. The description and illustration in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (B), on the display screen 7a, a mistake determination effect is executed. This loss confirmation effect indicates that the result of the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 89 (A) is lost. In this example, this lost symbol arrangement is shown as "758". In addition, in the loss finalization effect, the number of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicates "3", and the number of reservations H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicates "0", as shown in FIG. 89 (A It is the same as the decorative symbol variation effect shown in.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (C), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol change effect is executed. The decorative symbol variation effect here is executed based on the number of reservations associated with the first special symbol, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number H1 of reservations associated with the first special symbol, K1 decreases from "3" to "2". In addition, the number H2 and the number K2 of reservations regarding a 2nd special symbol remain "0".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (D), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 89 (C) is a jackpot. Here, this jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". Also, the number of reservations H1 and K1 pertaining to the first special symbol is “2”, and the number of reservations H2 and K2 pertaining to the second special symbol indicates “0”, which is the decoration shown in FIG. 89 (C) It is the same as the symbol variation effect. In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot. In the present example, the jackpot symbol array "777" is "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot" (probable jackpot), and after the jackpot game is over, the high probability time short state (high probability high base state until the next jackpot) It is a jackpot to become).

  Next, the jackpot game is executed, and when the jackpot game ends, the time-saving game is started. When the time saving game is started, next, as shown in FIG. 89 (E), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol time change effect is executed. Immediately after the end of the jackpot game, there is no winning to the second starting opening 21, so the decoration pattern time change effect here (the change decoration effect of the first decoration pattern after the start of the short game play) is the first special It is executed based on the number of reservations related to the symbol. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of holdings H1, K1 related to the first special symbol decreases from "2" to "1". After that, it was determined that there were three winnings on the second starting opening 21 during the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the number of holdings H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol increased from "0" to "3" I assume. When the time saving game is started, a right strike arrow YAR for prompting the player to hit the right is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. The right strike arrow YAR is continuously displayed during the time saving game. The player is prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR and right-handed, the game ball is played in the second starting opening 21 (power support) where the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and easy to win. It can be done. In addition, during this period, winning of the first starting port 20 hardly occurs.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (F), on the display screen 7a, the effect for confirming the lost time is performed. This loss-confirmed short-time effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 89 (E) has been lost. In this example, this lost symbol arrangement is shown as "857". In addition, in the lost finalization time short effect, the number of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicates “1”, and the number of reservations H2 related to the second special symbol and K2 indicates “3”, as shown in FIG. It is the same as that of the decorative symbol time change effect shown in E).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (G), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol time change effect is executed. The decorative symbol time variation effect here is executed based on the number of reservations for the second special symbol, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H2 for the second special symbol , K2 decreases from "3" to "2". The number of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol remains "1". This is because, as described above, the digestion of the reserve associated with the second special symbol is executed prior to the digestion of the reserve associated with the first special symbol.

[Pending display effect B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for describing the hold display effect B.
In the suspension display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), the decorative symbol fluctuation effect is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 90A, the gaming state is the normal state (low probability and low base state), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).
In addition, the number-of-holds display area HR is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. The number-of-retentions display area HR is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and H1 and H2 indicating numbers of numbers of reservations are displayed in close proximity to each other in the area. For example, the hold number display area HR is displayed in black, and H1 and H2 are displayed in white to be noticeable. H1 shows the number of reservations for the first special symbol, and H2 shows the number of reservations for the second special symbol. Furthermore, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, K1 and K2 indicating the number of reservations by numbers are displayed in close proximity to each other in the vertical direction. K1 indicates the number of reservations associated with the first special symbol in the same manner as H1, and K2 indicates the number of reservations associated with the second special symbol in the same manner as H2. That is, in the reserve display effect B, the number of reservations related to the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 is integrally displayed at two places, the upper left side and the lower right side of the display screen 7a. In other words, the number of reservations associated with the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 is integrally displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen 7a. The numbers H1, H2 and K1, K2 indicating the number of reservations are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a and are never erased. In FIG. 90 (A), H1 and K1 indicate “2”, H2 and K2 indicate “0”, the number of reservations for the first special symbol is “2”, and the number of reservations for the second special symbol “ It is suggested that it is "0". This is because it is difficult to win the second starting hole 21 when the gaming state is the normal state. In the hold display effect B, the hold icon 9A relating to the first special symbol described above, the hold icon 9B pertaining to the second special symbol, and the hold icon (hold digested image) 9C (FIG. 1) may also be displayed. The description and illustration in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (B), reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect indicates that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 90 (A). In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (C), the first feature movable effect is executed on the display screen 7a. During the reach effect shown in FIG. 90 (B), the character Y first moves from the home position to the first position shown in FIG. 90 (C) and the upper part of the display screen 7a is displayed. In order to cover, it stops for a predetermined time on the front side of the display screen 7a. In the state where the prize YA is stopped at the first position, the number-of-retentions display area HR is covered by the prize YA, and therefore, H1 indicating the number of pendings related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol H2 indicating the number of reservations is not visible. On the other hand, when the bonus YA is stopped at the first position, K1 indicating the number of pending for the first special symbol and K2 indicating the number of pending for the second special symbol are not covered by the bonus YA. It is visible, and therefore, the player is concerned with the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol by visually recognizing K1 and K2 (K1 is “2” and K2 is “0”). You can know the number of reservations. The accessory LYA as a movable body shown in this figure is vertically movably disposed on the upper back side of the above-described movable board 15 (see FIG. 1), and is positioned inside the gaming machine frame 50 at the home position. And provided so as not to be seen by the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (D), on the display screen 7a, the second feature movable effect is executed. In this second feature of movable effects, after the first item YA stops at the first position shown in FIG. 90C for a predetermined time, it is further lowered to the second position shown in FIG. 90D, and the display screen is displayed. In order to cover the lower part of 7a, it stops at the front side of the display screen 7a for a predetermined time. In the state where the bonus YA is stopped at the second position, K1 indicating the number of pending for the first special symbol and K2 indicating the number of pending for the second special symbol are covered with the bonus YA, , K1, K2 are not visible. On the other hand, in the state where the bonus YA is stopped at the second position, the hold number display area HR is visible without being covered by the bonus YA. Therefore, the player can use H1, H2 (H1 By visually recognizing “2” and “2”, “2”, it is possible to grasp the number of reservations for the first special symbol and the number of reservations for the second special symbol. Then, when the accessory YA stops at the second position for a predetermined time, the accessory YA rises from the second position and returns to the home position.
As described above, even when the accessory LYA as a movable body is moved, the number of reservations regarding the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 integrally displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen 7a is The number of reservations associated with the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 displayed at any point is visible. In other words, the number of reservations associated with the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 integrally displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen 7a is all even when the accessory LYA as the movable body is moved. However, the number of holdings related to the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21 displayed at at least one place is made visible. For this reason, the player can always grasp the information of the number of reservations regarding the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21 and can safely play the game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (E), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 90 (B) is a jackpot. Here, this jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". Also, the number of reservations H1 and K1 pertaining to the first special symbol indicates “2”, and the number of reservations H2 and K2 pertaining to the second special symbol indicates “0”, as shown in FIGS. 90 (A) to (D). It is similar to that shown in. In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot. In the present example, the jackpot symbol array "777" is "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot" (probable jackpot), and after the jackpot game is over, the high probability time short state (high probability high base state until the next jackpot) It is a jackpot to become).

  Next, the jackpot game is executed, and when the jackpot game ends, the time-saving game is started. When the time saving game is started, next, as shown in FIG. 90 (F), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol time change effect is executed. Immediately after the end of the jackpot game, there is no winning to the second starting opening 21, so the decoration pattern time change effect here (the change decoration effect of the first decoration pattern after the start of the short game play) is the first special It is executed based on the number of reservations related to the symbol. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of holdings H1, K1 related to the first special symbol decreases from "2" to "1". After that, it was determined that there were three winnings on the second starting opening 21 during the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the number of holdings H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol increased from "0" to "3" I assume. When the time saving game is started, a right strike arrow YAR for prompting the player to hit the right is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. The right strike arrow YAR is continuously displayed during the time saving game. The player is prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR and right-handed, the game ball is played in the second starting opening 21 (power support) where the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and easy to win. It can be done. In addition, during this period, winning of the first starting port 20 hardly occurs.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (G), on the display screen 7a, the effect for confirming the lost time is performed. This loss-determining-time short-effect shows that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 90 (F) is lost. In this example, this lost symbol arrangement is shown as "857". In addition, in the lost finalization time short effect, the number of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicates “1”, and the number of reservations H2 related to the second special symbol and K2 indicates “3”, as shown in FIG. It is the same as that of the decorative symbol time change effect shown in F).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (H), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol time change effect is executed. The decorative symbol time variation effect here is executed based on the number of reservations for the second special symbol, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H2 for the second special symbol , K2 decreases from "3" to "2". The number of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol remains "1". This is because, as described above, the digestion of the reserve associated with the second special symbol is executed prior to the digestion of the reserve associated with the first special symbol.

[On Hold Display Effect C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect C.
In the suspension display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), the decorative symbol fluctuation effect is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 91A, the gaming state is the normal state (low probability and low base state), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).
Further, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, a game information display area YR is displayed. The game information display area YR is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations by numbers are displayed in close proximity to the left and right in the lower part of the area. For example, the game information display area YR is displayed in black, and H1 and H2 are displayed in white so as to stand out. H1 shows the number of reservations for the first special symbol, and H2 shows the number of reservations for the second special symbol. In the upper part in the game information display area YR, just above H1 and H2, by fluctuating display in synchronization with the fluctuating display of the special symbol, it is possible to indicate the fluctuation result (lottery result) of the special symbol. 4 symbols F1 and F2 are displayed close to H1 and H2. F1 and F2 are displayed in the form of “o”, and for example, F1 is displayed in red (indicated by hatching) and F2 is displayed in different colors such as blue (indicated by a polka-dot pattern). F1 and F2 indicate that the special symbol is changing by blinking, and indicate that the special symbol is stopping (during symbol display) by turning on or off and stopping. For example, F1 and F2 both stop in the lighted state, suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, F1 and F2 both are not lighted together (either F1 or F2 goes out, And by stopping in a state where both F1 and F2 are both off, it is suggested that the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss.
Furthermore, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, K1 and K2 indicating the number of reservations by numbers, and DY as the fourth symbol are displayed close to each other in a column shape. K1 indicates the number of reservations associated with the first special symbol in the same manner as H1, and K2 indicates the number of reservations associated with the second special symbol in the same manner as H2. DY is composed of the numbers from 0 to 9, and the variation of the numbers from 0 to 9 indicates that the special symbol is in change, and the special symbol is by stopping at any of the numbers from 0 to 9. Indicates that it is stopping (during symbol display). For example, DY stops at a number of 7 to indicate that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and DY stops at a number other than 7 to indicate that a lottery result of the special symbol is a loss .
That is, in the pending display effect C, the pending number and the fourth symbol related to the first start opening 20 and the second start opening 21 are integrally displayed in two places on the upper left side and the lower right side of the display screen 7a. . In other words, the number of reservations and the fourth symbol relating to the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 are integrally displayed at a plurality of places on the display screen 7a. The numbers H1, H2 and K1, K2 indicating the number of reservations, and F1, F2 and DY as the fourth pattern are displayed continuously on the display screen 7a, and are never erased. is there.
In addition, in FIG. 91 (A), H1 and K1 show "3", H2 and K2 show "0", the number of reservations of a 1st special symbol is "3", and the number of reservations of a 2nd special symbol is " It is suggested that it is "0". This is because it is difficult to win the second starting hole 21 when the gaming state is the normal state. Further, F1 and F2 are in a blinking state, and DY is in a fluctuation state (shown by)), which suggests that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are in a fluctuation display. In the hold display effect C, the hold icon 9A related to the first special symbol described above, the hold icon 9B related to the second special symbol, and the hold icon (hold digested image) 9C (FIG. 1) may also be displayed. The description and illustration in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), on the display screen 7a, a mistake determination effect is executed. This loss confirmation effect indicates that the result of the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 91 (A) is lost. In this example, this lost symbol arrangement is shown as "758". In addition, in the loss finalization effect, the number of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicates "3", and the number of reservations H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicates "0", as shown in FIG. 89 (A It is the same as the decorative symbol variation effect shown in. In addition, F1 and F2 as the 4th symbol are both turned off (the lighted state of F1 is indicated by "●" and the lighted state of F2 is indicated by "○"), DY is stopped at 6 (numbers other than 7), Suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol change effect is executed. The decorative symbol variation effect here is executed based on the number of reservations associated with the first special symbol, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number H1 of reservations associated with the first special symbol, K1 decreases from "3" to "2". In addition, the number H2 and the number K2 of reservations regarding a 2nd special symbol remain "0". Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are in a flickering state, and DY is in a fluctuating state (shown by 示 唆), which suggests that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are in a fluctuating display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 91 (C) is a jackpot. Here, this jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". Also, the number of reservations H1 and K1 pertaining to the first special symbol is “2”, and the number of reservations H2 and K2 pertaining to the second special symbol indicates “0”, which is the decoration shown in FIG. 91 (C) It is the same as the symbol variation effect. In addition, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol lights up (the lighting state of F1 is red (indicated by hatching), the lighting state of F2 is blue (indicated by a polka-dot pattern), DY stops at 7 and thereby special symbols It is suggested that the result of the lottery is a jackpot.In addition, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the characters "jackpot ~!" Are displayed. In this example, the jackpot symbol array "777" is "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot" (probable jackpot) and after the jackpot game is over, the gaming state is high until the next jackpot. It is a jackpot that becomes a short time condition (high probability high base condition).

  Next, the jackpot game is executed, and when the jackpot game ends, the time-saving game is started. When the time saving game is started, next, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol time change effect is executed. Immediately after the end of the jackpot game, there is no winning to the second starting opening 21, so the decoration pattern time change effect here (the change decoration effect of the first decoration pattern after the start of the short game play) is the first special It is executed based on the number of reservations related to the symbol. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of holdings H1, K1 related to the first special symbol decreases from "2" to "1". After that, it was determined that there were three winnings on the second starting opening 21 during the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the number of holdings H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol increased from "0" to "3" I assume. Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are in a flickering state, and DY is in a fluctuating state (shown by 示 唆), which suggests that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are in a fluctuating display. When the time saving game is started, a right strike arrow YAR for prompting the player to hit the right is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. The right strike arrow YAR is continuously displayed during the time saving game. The player is prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR and right-handed, the game ball is played in the second starting opening 21 (power support) where the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and easy to win. It can be done. In addition, during this period, winning of the first starting port 20 hardly occurs.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (F), on the display screen 7a, the effect for confirming the lost time is performed. This loss-determining-time short-effect shows that the result of the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 91 (E) is lost. In this example, this lost symbol arrangement is shown as "857". In addition, in the lost finalization time short effect, the number of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicates “1”, and the number of reservations H2 related to the second special symbol and K2 indicates “3”, as shown in FIG. It is the same as that of the decorative symbol time change effect shown in E). In addition, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are both extinguished (the extinguished state of F1 is indicated by “●” and the extinguished state of F2 is indicated by “o”), and DY is stopped at 9 (number other than 7). Suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (G), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol time change effect is executed. The decorative symbol time variation effect here is executed based on the number of reservations for the second special symbol, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H2 for the second special symbol , K2 decreases from "3" to "2". The number of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol remains "1". This is because, as described above, the digestion of the reserve associated with the second special symbol is executed prior to the digestion of the reserve associated with the first special symbol. Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are in a flickering state, and DY is in a fluctuating state (shown by 示 唆), which suggests that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are in a fluctuating display.

[Pending display effect D]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect D.
In the on-hold display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), the decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 92A, the gaming state is the normal state (low probability and low base state), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).
Further, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, a game information display area YR is displayed. The game information display area YR is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations by numbers are displayed in close proximity to the left and right in the lower part of the area. For example, the game information display area YR is displayed in black, and H1 and H2 are displayed in white so as to stand out. H1 shows the number of reservations for the first special symbol, and H2 shows the number of reservations for the second special symbol. In the upper part in the game information display area YR, just above H1 and H2, by fluctuating display in synchronization with the fluctuating display of the special symbol, it is possible to indicate the fluctuation result (lottery result) of the special symbol. 4 symbols F1 and F2 are displayed close to H1 and H2. F1 and F2 are displayed in the form of “o”, and for example, F1 is displayed in red (indicated by hatching) and F2 is displayed in different colors such as blue (indicated by a polka-dot pattern). F1 and F2 indicate that the special symbol is changing by blinking, and indicate that the special symbol is stopping (during symbol display) by turning on or off and stopping. For example, F1 and F2 both stop in the lighted state, suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, F1 and F2 both are not lighted together (either F1 or F2 goes out, And by stopping in a state where both F1 and F2 are both off, it is suggested that the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss.
Furthermore, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, K1 and K2 indicating the number of reservations by numbers, and DY as the fourth symbol are displayed close to each other in a column shape. K1 indicates the number of reservations associated with the first special symbol in the same manner as H1, and K2 indicates the number of reservations associated with the second special symbol in the same manner as H2. DY is composed of the numbers from 0 to 9, and the variation of the numbers from 0 to 9 indicates that the special symbol is in change, and the special symbol is by stopping at any of the numbers from 0 to 9. Indicates that it is stopping (during symbol display). For example, DY stops at a number of 7 to indicate that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and DY stops at a number other than 7 to indicate that a lottery result of the special symbol is a loss .
That is, in the pending display effect C, the pending number and the fourth symbol related to the first start opening 20 and the second start opening 21 are integrally displayed in two places on the upper left side and the lower right side of the display screen 7a. . In other words, the number of reservations and the fourth symbol relating to the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 are integrally displayed at a plurality of places on the display screen 7a. The numbers H1, H2 and K1, K2 indicating the number of reservations, and F1, F2 and DY as the fourth pattern are displayed continuously on the display screen 7a, and are never erased. is there.
In addition, in FIG. 92 (A), H1 and K1 show "2", H2 and K2 show "0", and the number of reservations of a 1st special symbol is "2", and the number of reservations of a 2nd special symbol is " It is suggested that it is "0". This is because it is difficult to win the second starting hole 21 when the gaming state is the normal state. Further, F1 and F2 are in a blinking state, and DY is in a fluctuation state (shown by)), which suggests that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are in a fluctuation display. In the hold display effect C, the hold icon 9A related to the first special symbol described above, the hold icon 9B related to the second special symbol, and the hold icon (hold digested image) 9C (FIG. 1) may also be displayed. The description and illustration in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect indicates that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 92 (A). In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. In this reach effect, the number of reservations H1 and K1 pertaining to the first special symbol, the number of reservations H2 and K2 pertaining to the second special symbol, and F1, F2 and DY as the fourth symbol are shown in FIG. 92 (A). It is the same as the decorative symbol variation effect shown in.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (C), the first feature movable effect is executed on the display screen 7a. During the reach effect shown in FIG. 92 (B), the character Y first moves from the home position to the first position shown in FIG. 92 (C) during the reach effect shown in FIG. 92 (B) and the upper part of the display screen 7a is displayed. In order to cover, it stops for a predetermined time on the front side of the display screen 7a. In the state where the feature YA is stopped at the first position, the game information display area YR is covered by the feature YA, and therefore, H1 indicating the number of reservations regarding the first special symbol, and the second special symbol H2 indicating the number of reservations and F1 and F2 as the fourth pattern are not visible. On the other hand, when the accessory YA is stopped at the first position, K1 indicating the number of reservations for the first special symbol, K2 indicating the number of reservations for the second special symbol, and DY as the fourth symbol are , Is visible without being covered by the character YA. Therefore, the player can grasp the number of reservations for the first special symbol and the number of reservations for the second special symbol by visually recognizing K1 and K2 (K1 is "2" and K2 is "0"). It is possible to grasp that the special symbol (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) is in a variable display by visually recognizing DY as the fourth symbol (DY is "は"). The accessory LYA as a movable body shown in this figure is vertically movably disposed on the upper back side of the above-described movable board 15 (see FIG. 1), and is positioned inside the gaming machine frame 50 at the home position. And provided so as not to be seen by the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (D), the feature second movable presentation is executed on the display screen 7a. In this second feature of movable effects, after the first item YA stops at the first position shown in FIG. 92C for a predetermined time, it is further lowered to the second position shown in FIG. In order to cover the lower part of 7a, it stops at the front side of the display screen 7a for a predetermined time. In the state where the accessory YA is stopped at the second position, K1 indicating the number of reservations for the first special symbol, K2 indicating the number of reservations for the second special symbol, and DY as the fourth symbol It is covered by object YA, so K1, K2 and DY are not visible. On the other hand, in the state where the feature YA is stopped at the second position, the game information display area YR is visible without being covered by the feature YA. Therefore, the player can see H1, H2 (H1 is By visually recognizing "2" and H2 "0", it is possible to grasp the number of reservations for the first special symbol and the number of reservations for the second special symbol, and F1, F2 (F1) as the fourth symbol , F2 blinks), it can be understood that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being variably displayed. Then, when the accessory YA stops at the second position for a predetermined time, the accessory YA rises from the second position and returns to the home position.
As described above, even when the accessory LYA as the movable body is moved, the number of reservations regarding the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 and displayed integrally at a plurality of places on the display screen 7a As for the fourth symbol, the number of reservations and the fourth symbol relating to the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21 displayed at any point are visible. In other words, the number of holdings and the fourth symbol pertaining to the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 displayed integrally at a plurality of locations on the display screen 7a are when the accessory LYA as the movable body is moved. Even if there is, all will not become invisible and the number of reservations and the 4th design concerning the 1st starting opening 20 and the 2nd starting opening 21 displayed in at least one place become visible There is. For this reason, the player can always grasp the information of the number of reservations and the fourth symbol related to the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21 and can safely play the game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92E, the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 92 (B) is a jackpot. Here, this jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". Also, the number of reservations H1 and K1 pertaining to the first special symbol indicates “2”, and the number of reservations H2 and K2 pertaining to the second special symbol indicates “0”, as shown in FIGS. 90 (A) to (D). It is similar to that shown in. On the other hand, F1 and F2 as the fourth pattern both stop in the lighting state (F1 is red (indicated by hatching), F2 is blue (indicated by polka-dot pattern)), and DY as the fourth pattern is 7 It has stopped and this has suggested that the lottery result of a special symbol is a jackpot. In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot. In the present example, the jackpot symbol array "777" is "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot" (probable jackpot), and after the jackpot game is over, the high probability time short state (high probability high base state until the next jackpot) It is a jackpot to become).

  Next, the jackpot game is executed, and when the jackpot game ends, the time-saving game is started. When the time saving game is started, next, as shown in FIG. 92 (F), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol time change effect is executed. Immediately after the end of the jackpot game, there is no winning to the second starting opening 21, so the decoration pattern time change effect here (the change decoration effect of the first decoration pattern after the start of the short game play) is the first special It is executed based on the number of reservations related to the symbol. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of holdings H1, K1 related to the first special symbol decreases from "2" to "1". After that, it was determined that there were three winnings on the second starting opening 21 during the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the number of holdings H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol increased from "0" to "3" I assume. Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are in a flickering state, and DY is in a fluctuating state (shown by 示 唆), which suggests that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are in a fluctuating display. When the time saving game is started, a right strike arrow YAR for prompting the player to hit the right is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. The right strike arrow YAR is continuously displayed during the time saving game. The player is prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR and right-handed, the game ball is played in the second starting opening 21 (power support) where the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and easy to win. It can be done. In addition, during this period, winning of the first starting port 20 hardly occurs.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (G), on the display screen 7a, the effect for confirming the lost time is performed. This loss-determining-time short effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 92 (F) has been lost. In this example, this lost symbol arrangement is shown as "857". In addition, in the lost finalization time short effect, the number of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol is “1”, and the number of reservations H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicates “3”, as shown in FIG. It is the same as that of the decorative symbol time change effect shown in F). In addition, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are both extinguished (the extinguished state of F1 is indicated by “●” and the extinguished state of F2 is indicated by “o”), and DY is stopped at 9 (number other than 7). Suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (H), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol time change effect is executed. The decorative symbol time variation effect here is executed based on the number of reservations for the second special symbol, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H2 for the second special symbol , K2 decreases from "3" to "2". The number of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol remains "1". This is because, as described above, the digestion of the reserve associated with the second special symbol is executed prior to the digestion of the reserve associated with the first special symbol. Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are in a flickering state, and DY is in a fluctuating state (shown by 示 唆), which suggests that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are in a fluctuating display.

[Example of effect]
Below, an example of the effect of the on-hold display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 92, the number of reservations associated with the first starting opening and the second starting opening is set separately from the first special symbol and the second icon associated with the second special symbol. It is configured to be continuously and continuously displayed on the display screen integrally with numbers. According to this configuration, the number of reservations related to the first starting opening and the second starting opening is continuously displayed on the display screen, as compared with the holding icon that may be erased by a predetermined effect or the like. The player can check the number of reservations associated with the current first and second starting ports at any time. In addition, since the number of reservations associated with the first starting opening and the second starting opening is integrally displayed in numbers, the player displays the holding indication related to the first starting opening and the holding indication related to the second starting opening. It is possible to confirm the number of reservations at a glance and grasp the contents without any trouble of searching. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, a drawing of whether or not the fluctuation display is a big hit by displaying the fluctuation synchronously with the fluctuation display of the special symbol separately from the decoration symbol The fourth symbol suggesting the result is configured to be continuously and continuously displayed on the display screen integrally with the number of reservations associated with the first starting opening and the second starting opening. According to this configuration, the fourth symbol is always continuously displayed on the display screen, as compared with the decorative symbol that may be erased by a predetermined effect or the like, so that the player can always select the current special symbol. It is possible to check the display state, that is, whether the special symbol is changing or stopping, and whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot or a loss. In addition, since the fourth symbol is displayed integrally with the number of reservations associated with the first starting opening and the second starting opening, the player is engaged with the holding indication associated with the first starting opening and the second starting opening. It is possible to confirm the number of reservations and the fourth symbol at a glance and grasp the contents without having to look for the display of the suspension display and the display of the fourth symbol. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fourth symbol, the number of reservations for the first starting opening, and the number of reservations for the second starting opening are integrally displayed on the display screen. While displaying, it is the structure displayed on multiple places of a display screen. According to this configuration, the fourth symbol integrally displayed together, the number of reservations regarding the first start opening, and the number of reservations regarding the second start opening are further displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen. Therefore, the player can very easily find out the hold indication relating to the first starting opening, the hold indication relating to the second starting opening, and the display of the fourth symbol. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, the fourth symbol displayed integrally at a plurality of locations on the display screen, the number of reservations regarding the first starting opening, and the second starting opening The number of reservations is the fourth symbol displayed on any part of the display screen even when the movable body is moved, the number of reservations related to the first starting opening, and the number of reservations related to the second starting opening Is configured to be visible. In other words, the number of reservations and the fourth symbol pertaining to the first starting opening and the second starting opening, which are integrally displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen, are all invisible even when the movable body is moved. Without becoming possible, the number of reservations and the fourth symbol pertaining to the first starting opening and the second starting opening displayed at at least one location are configured to be visible. According to this configuration, the player can always grasp the number of reservations and the display of the fourth symbol relating to the first starting opening and the second starting opening, and can safely play the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fourth symbol, the number of reservations for the first starting opening, and the number of reservations for the second starting opening are diagonally displayed on the display screen. It is configured to display. According to this configuration, the movable range of the movable body should be designed so that the display of the number of reservations for the first symbol, the number of reservations for the first start opening, and the number of reservations for the second start opening can be always viewed. Becomes easier. That is, the restriction of the movable range of the movable body is alleviated. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fourth symbol, the number of reservations for the first starting opening, and the number of reservations for the second starting opening are at the same position on the display screen. It is configured to display without moving. According to this configuration, since the fourth symbol, the number of reservations for the first start opening, and the number of reservations for the second start opening are always displayed in the same place on the display screen, the player is extremely You can easily find these displays. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a pending | holding display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 92, the number of reservations for the first special symbol, the number of reservations for the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are the upper left and lower right of the display screen. Although each is displayed diagonally, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of reservations for the first special symbol, the number of reservations for the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are the upper right and lower left, middle upper and middle lower, middle left and middle right, upper left and upper right, lower left You may make it display on the lower right etc. That is, when displaying the number of reservations for the first special symbol displayed integrally, the number of reservations for the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol at a plurality of locations on the display screen, at least the left and right ends of the display screen, Alternatively, the display may include the upper end and the lower end.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89 to FIG. 92, the number of reservations for the first special symbol displayed at the lower right of the display screen, the number of reservations for the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are The number of reservations for the first special symbol displayed at the upper left of the display screen, the number of reservations for the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol may be displayed in a predetermined display area. In addition, the number of reservations for the first special symbol, the number of reservations for the second special symbol, and the arrangement of the fourth symbol are arbitrary, so long as they are displayed together in an integrated manner. It is also good.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89 to FIG. 92, the number of reservations for the first special symbol, the number of reservations for the second special symbol, and the number of reservations for displaying the fourth symbol in the area. And although the game information display area is displayed in a predetermined color, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the color of the number-of-holds display area and the game information display area may change depending on the game state. For example, the color indicates the current gaming state by color, such as white when the gaming state is normal, blue when in the low probability time short state, green when in the high probability time short state, and red when in the latent state. You may do so.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, the fourth symbol displayed in the game information display area is displayed by a plurality of figures ("o") different in color, and those figures Is indicated to indicate that the special symbol is changing or stopping (during symbol display and lottery result display) by blinking or stopping the symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the fourth symbol displayed in the game information display area adds a symbol (number or character) and displays the symbol together with the figure in a predetermined manner, thereby suggesting that the special symbol is changing or being stopped. It is also good. For example, when the fourth symbol is to be displayed as a figure and a number, this number and another fourth symbol (DY) displayed as a number at the lower right of the display screen are synchronized, and the same display mode You may make it display by. In this way, the player can easily understand the relationship between the fourth symbol and the special symbol.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the number of reservations for the first special symbol, the number of reservations for the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are displayed on the same display screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of display screens are provided in the game area, and the number of reservations pertaining to the first special symbol, the number of reservations pertaining to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are displayed one by one (one set) on those display screens. You may do it. Alternatively, a 7-segment display is provided in the game area separately from the display screen (display screen 7a, liquid crystal), and the number of reservations for the first special symbol, the number of reservations for the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are displayed A screen (display screen 7a, liquid crystal) and a 7-segment display may be used to display. Alternatively, separately from the display screen (display screen 7a, liquid crystal), an LED or lamp indicator is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the number of reservations for the first special symbol, the number of reservations for the second special symbol, the fourth The symbol may be displayed on a display screen (display screen 7a, liquid crystal) and an LED or lamp indicator.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C3-1]
A first starting port and a second starting port,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays on a predetermined display screen;
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
The first display is a display of the number of reservations associated with the first starting opening and the second starting opening,
The display means integrally displays the number of reservations associated with the first starting opening and the second starting opening,
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect C3-2]
It has special symbol display means for displaying a lottery result of whether or not it hits by variably displaying a special symbol based on winning on the first starting opening or the second starting opening,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The second display is a display of a fourth symbol that suggests the lottery result by being variably displayed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol,
The display means displays the fourth symbol integrally with the number of reservations associated with the first starting opening and the second starting opening,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1, characterized in that
[Aspect C3-3]
The display means displays the first display and the second display at a plurality of places on the display screen,
The first display and the second display are displayed in a predetermined display area at at least one of the plurality of places.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-2, characterized in that
[Aspect C3-4]
The display screen is formed in a substantially rectangular shape,
A plurality of places on the display screen where the first display and the second display are displayed include at least a left end and a right end of the display screen, or an upper end and a lower end.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3, characterized in that
[Aspect C3-5]
Movable movable body,
Control means for movably controlling the movable body in a predetermined manner;
Equipped with
The first display and the second display displayed at the plurality of locations are displayed at any location even when the movable body is moved by the control means. And the second display is visible,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3 or aspect C3-4 characterized in that.

  The zone effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. This zone effect may be performed, for example, during the change of the special symbol. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction for performing zone effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read out from the ROM 103 and displayed. It is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a. This zone effect is performed during one change (one change effect) of the special symbol. The zone effect may be performed during a plurality of changes (a plurality of change effects) of the special symbol.

[Zone effect A]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining zone effect A. FIG.
In zone effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the timer display frequency suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (B), a first zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In the first zone rush suggestion effect, a first zone rush suggestion image XD1 is displayed. This first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is an image that is displayed on the variation area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and suggests that it has entered the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93C, the first zone effect is performed. In the first zone effect, a first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed. The first zone suggestion image XD2 is an image that suggests that it is the first zone, and more specifically, an image in which the character “first zone” that suggests the first zone is shown in the band-like image . The first zone suggestion image XD2 is arranged to extend laterally at the top and bottom of the display screen 7a. In the upper first zone suggestion image XD2, the characters "first zone" move from right to left, and in the lower first zone suggestion image XD2, the characters "first zone" move from left to right Do. The present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “first zone” may be moved in the same direction in both the upper and lower first zone suggestion images XD2.
When this first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed, it is in the state of the first zone.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (D), a second zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In the second zone rush suggestion effect, a second zone rush suggestion image XD3 is displayed. The second zone rushing suggestion image XD3 is an image which is displayed on the variation area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and suggests that the second zone is plunged. In the second zone rush suggestion effect, the display of the first zone suggestion image XD2 is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93E, the second zone effect is performed. In the second zone effect, a second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed. The second zone suggestion image XD4 is an image that suggests that it is the second zone, and specifically, an image in which the character "second zone" that suggests the second zone is shown in the band-like image. . The second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged to extend vertically on the left and right portions of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged not to intersect the first zone suggestion image XD2. In the second zone suggested image XD4 in the left part, the characters “second zone” move downward from the top, and in the second zone suggested image XD4 in the right part, the characters “second zone” exist in the lower part Move to The present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “second zone” may be moved in the same direction in both the left and right second zone suggested images XD4.
When this second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed, it is in the state of the second zone. Further, in this case, since the first zone suggestion image XD2 is also displayed, it is also in the first state.

[Zone effect B]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining zone effect B. FIG.
In zone effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the timer display frequency suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), the first zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In the first zone rush suggestion effect, a first zone rush suggestion image XD1 is displayed. This first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is an image that is displayed on the variation area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and suggests that it has entered the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the first zone effect is executed. In the first zone effect, a first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed. The first zone suggestion image XD2 is an image that suggests that it is the first zone, and more specifically, an image in which the character “first zone” that suggests the first zone is shown in the band-like image . The first zone suggestion image XD2 is arranged to extend laterally at the top and bottom of the display screen 7a. In the upper first zone suggestion image XD2, the characters "first zone" move from right to left, and in the lower first zone suggestion image XD2, the characters "first zone" move from left to right Do. The present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “first zone” may be moved in the same direction in both the upper and lower first zone suggestion images XD2.
When this first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed, it is in the state of the first zone.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (D), a second zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In the second zone rush suggestion effect, a second zone rush suggestion image XD3 is displayed. The second zone rushing suggestion image XD3 is an image which is displayed on the variation area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and suggests that the second zone is plunged. In the second zone rush suggestion effect, the display of the first zone suggestion image XD2 is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (E), the second zone effect is executed. In the second zone effect, a second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed. The second zone suggestion image XD4 is an image that suggests that it is the second zone, and specifically, an image in which the character "second zone" that suggests the second zone is shown in the band-like image. . The second zone suggestion image XD4 is disposed so as to extend vertically to the left and right portions of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged to intersect the first zone suggestion image XD2 as seen from the player. The second zone suggested image XD4 is arranged at the back of the first zone suggested image XD2 at the intersection with the first zone suggested image XD2. In the second zone suggested image XD4 in the left part, the characters “second zone” move downward from the top, and in the second zone suggested image XD4 in the right part, the characters “second zone” exist in the lower part Move to The present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “second zone” may be moved in the same direction in both the left and right second zone suggested images XD4.
When this second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed, it is in the state of the second zone. Further, in this case, since the first zone suggestion image XD2 is also displayed, it is also in the first state.

[Zone effect C]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining zone effect C. In FIG.
In zone effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 95 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the timer display frequency suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), the first zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In the first zone rush suggestion effect, a first zone rush suggestion image XD1 is displayed. This first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is an image that is displayed on the variation area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and suggests that it has entered the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (C), the first zone effect is executed. In the first zone effect, a first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed. The first zone suggestion image XD2 is an image that suggests that it is the first zone, and more specifically, an image in which the character “first zone” that suggests the first zone is shown in the band-like image . The first zone suggestion image XD2 is arranged to extend laterally at the top and bottom of the display screen 7a. In the upper first zone suggestion image XD2, the characters "first zone" move from right to left, and in the lower first zone suggestion image XD2, the characters "first zone" move from left to right Do. The present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “first zone” may be moved in the same direction in both the upper and lower first zone suggestion images XD2.
When this first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed, it is in the state of the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (D), a second zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In the second zone rush suggestion effect, a second zone rush suggestion image XD3 is displayed. The second zone rushing suggestion image XD3 is an image which is displayed on the variation area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and suggests that the second zone is plunged. In the second zone rush suggestion effect, the display of the first zone suggestion image XD2 is continued.
Further, in the second zone rushing suggestion effect, a combination movable object effect in which the third movable combination 18 moves to the unfolded position is performed. In this case, the third movable character 18 is disposed on the second zone rushing suggestion image XD3, and viewed from the player, the second zone rushing suggestion image XD3 or the decorative symbol 8L within the frame of the third movable character 18 , 8C, and 8R are visible.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 95E, the second zone effect is executed. In the second zone effect, a second zone suggestion image XD4 and the character CRA are displayed. The second zone suggestion image XD4 is an image that suggests that it is the second zone, and specifically, an image in which the character "second zone" that suggests the second zone is shown in the band-like image. . The second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged to extend vertically on the left and right portions of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged to intersect the first zone suggestion image XD2 as seen from the player. The second zone suggested image XD4 is arranged at the back of the first zone suggested image XD2 at the intersection with the first zone suggested image XD2. In the second zone suggested image XD4 in the left part, the characters “second zone” move downward from the top, and in the second zone suggested image XD4 in the right part, the characters “second zone” exist in the lower part Move to The present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “second zone” may be moved in the same direction in both the left and right second zone suggested images XD4.

Further, in the second zone effect, the third movable role item 18 is continuously disposed at the deployed position. The character CRA is displayed in the frame of the third movable character 18. Therefore, the variation effects of the character CRA and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R can be visually recognized within the frame of the third movable character 18, as seen from the player.
When this second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed, it is in the state of the second zone. Further, in this case, since the first zone suggestion image XD2 is also displayed, it is also in the first state.

[Zone effect D]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining zone effect D. In FIG.
In zone effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the timer display frequency suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), the first zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In the first zone rush suggestion effect, a first zone rush suggestion image XD1 is displayed. This first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is an image that is displayed on the variation area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and suggests that it has entered the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96C, the first zone effect is executed. In the first zone effect, a first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed. The first zone suggestion image XD2 is an image that suggests that it is the first zone, and more specifically, an image in which the character “first zone” that suggests the first zone is shown in the band-like image . The first zone suggestion image XD2 is arranged to extend laterally at the top and bottom of the display screen 7a. In the upper first zone suggestion image XD2, the characters "first zone" move from right to left, and in the lower first zone suggestion image XD2, the characters "first zone" move from left to right Do. The present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “first zone” may be moved in the same direction in both the upper and lower first zone suggestion images XD2.
When this first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed, it is in the state of the first zone.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (D), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer display XD5 is displayed. The timer display XD5 is displayed between the upper first zone suggested image XD2 and the lower first zone suggested image XD2 on the variation area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the timer value is changed by the countdown. Represents a timer that In the example of FIG. 96 (D), the initial value of the timer display XD5 is 15 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (E), a second zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this second zone entry suggestion effect, a second zone entry indication image XD3 is displayed when the timer value of the timer display XD5 reaches a predetermined value (for example, zero). The second zone rushing suggestion image XD3 is an image which is displayed on the variation area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and suggests that the second zone is plunged. In the second zone rush suggestion effect, the display of the first zone suggestion image XD2 is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96F, the second zone effect is performed. In the second zone effect, a second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed. The second zone suggestion image XD4 is an image that suggests that it is the second zone, and specifically, an image in which the character "second zone" that suggests the second zone is shown in the band-like image. . The second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged to extend vertically on the left and right portions of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged to intersect the first zone suggestion image XD2 as seen from the player. The second zone suggested image XD4 is arranged at the back of the first zone suggested image XD2 at the intersection with the first zone suggested image XD2. In the second zone suggested image XD4 in the left part, the characters “second zone” move downward from the top, and in the second zone suggested image XD4 in the right part, the characters “second zone” exist in the lower part Move to The present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “second zone” may be moved in the same direction in both the left and right second zone suggested images XD4.
When this second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed, it is in the state of the second zone. Further, in this case, since the first zone suggestion image XD2 is also displayed, it is also in the first state.

In the zone effects A to D, other effects (such as other zone effects) may be incorporated as one effect.
Further, in the zone effects A to D, the first zone suggested image XD2 is displayed also during the second zone rush indication effect and during the second zone effect. Therefore, during the second zone rush suggestion effect, and during the second zone effect, the first zone effect is naturally performed.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of zone production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the zone effects A to D of the zone effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the first zone effect is also performed. That is, when the first zone effect is being performed, the second zone effect is also performed. According to this configuration, since the two zone effects are simultaneously displayed, the player can have a great sense of expectation for future development, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the zone effects A to D, in the second zone effect, the second zone suggested image XD4 is displayed when the first zone suggested image XD2 is displayed. According to this configuration, since the two zone suggestion images are displayed simultaneously, the player can have a great sense of expectation for future development, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the zone effects A to D, a first zone effect and a second zone effect are performed after the first zone rush indication effect in which the first zone rush indication image XD1 is displayed. According to this configuration, since the first zone effect and the second zone effect are performed after the first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed, the player is displayed the first zone entry suggestion image XD1. At this point, it is possible to have an expectation for developing into the second zone effect, and as a result, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the jackpot and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the zone effects A to D, after the second zone rush indication effect in which the second zone rush indication image XD3 is displayed, a second zone effect is performed. According to this configuration, after the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed, the second zone presentation is performed. Therefore, when the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed, the second zone presentation is performed together with the first zone presentation. Since it is decided that the zone effect of 2 is developed, as a result, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation to the jackpot by the second zone rush suggestion image XD3 and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the zone effects A to D, when the first zone suggestion image XD2 of the first zone effect is displayed, a second zone rush suggestion effect is performed in which the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed. According to this configuration, since the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed when the first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed GW, the player overlaps the first zone presentation and the second zone presentation. It can be recognized that it will be implemented, and it can have great hope for future development. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the zone effects A to D, when the first zone effect is being performed, the timer display effect for displaying the timer display XD5 is performed, and in the timer display effect, the timer value of the timer display XD5 is a predetermined value (for example, When it becomes zero, the second zone effect (the second zone rush indication effect) is performed. According to this configuration, when the timer value of the timer display XD5 reaches a predetermined value in a state where the first zone suggested image XD2 is displayed, the second zone presentation in which the second zone suggested image XD4 is displayed can be entered, so When the timer display XD5 is displayed, the player is greatly expecting a rush to the second zone effect in addition to the first zone effect, and it is possible to have great expectation for future development. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of zone production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the zone effects A to D of the gaming machine of the above embodiment, the first zone effect and the second zone effect are the effects in the same change, but the present invention is not limited thereto. You may be made to straddle the variation (a plurality of variations of the special symbol). For example, in zone effect D, the first zone rush indication effect, the first zone effect, and the timer display effect are performed with a predetermined variation, and the second zone entry suggestion effect and the second zone effect are performed in the next change. May be

[Modification 2]
In the zone effect D, when the timer value of the timer display XD5 reaches a predetermined value in the timer display effect, the second zone entry suggestion effect and the second zone effect are performed, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The timer display effect may be performed prior to the suggested effect, and when the timer value on the timer display reaches a predetermined value, the first zone rush effect effect or the first zone effect may be performed.

[Modification 3]
In the zone effect D, when the timer value of the timer display XD5 reaches a predetermined value in the timer display effect, the second zone rush indication effect starts, and thereafter, the second zone effect is performed, but the invention is not limited thereto. When the timer value of the timer display XD 5 becomes a predetermined value in the display effect, the second zone effect may be performed without performing the second zone entry suggestion effect.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XD-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect for performing a first zone effect,
The second display effect is an effect for performing a second zone effect different from the first zone effect,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect and the second display effect.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XD-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-1,
In the combination effect, in the first display effect, a first zone display representing the first zone effect is performed, and in the second display effect, a second zone representing the second zone effect Display is performed,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XD-3]
A game machine according to aspect XD-1 or aspect XD-2,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect that performs a first zone entry suggestion display that suggests entry into the first zone effect,
The combination effect may include the third display effect in some cases.
In the combination effect, after the third display effect is performed, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XD-4]
A game machine according to any one of Aspects XD-1 to XD-3, wherein
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect that performs a second zone entry suggestion display that suggests entry into the second zone effect,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect in some cases.
In the combination effect, after the fourth display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XD-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-4,
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the fourth display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XD-6]
A game machine according to any one of aspects XD-1 to XD-5, wherein
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is an effect of performing timer display,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect in some cases.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the fifth display effect is performed, and the timer value of the timer display in the fifth display effect becomes a predetermined value. , The second display effect is performed,
A game machine characterized by

  The cut-in effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 97 to 100. This cut-in effect may be performed, for example, during the change of the special symbol. That is, the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the cut-in effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103 It is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a. This cut-in effect is performed during one change (one change effect) of the special symbol. The cut-in effect may be performed during a plurality of changes (a plurality of change effects) of the special symbol.

[Cut in effect A]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for describing the cut-in effect A.
In the cut-in effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the timer display frequency suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), reach effect is performed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped with the same number of symbols, and the reach pattern is formed by the variation of the decorative symbol 8C. In the reach effect, the character CRA is executing a predetermined action.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), a first cut-in effect is performed. In the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed. The first cut-in display XE1 is strip-shaped and rectangular, appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed toward the left side. In FIG. 97 (C), the first cut-in indication XE1 is indicated by hatching. The first cut-in display XE1 hides the character CRA.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), a second cut-in effect is performed. In the second cut-in effect, a second cut-in display XE2 is displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 is strip-shaped and rectangular, appears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed upward. In FIG. 97 (D), the second cut-in indication XE2 is indicated by hatching different from the first cut-in indication XE1. Further, in the second cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is not displayed. Further, the second cut-in display XE2 hides part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97E, a third cut-in effect is performed. In the third cut-in effect, a third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 has a band shape and a rectangular shape, appears from the upper right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed toward the lower left side. In FIG. 97 (E), the third cut-in display XE3 is shown by hatching different from the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2. Further, in the third cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2 are not displayed. In addition, the third cut-in display XE3 hides part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.
After the third cut-in effect, a predetermined effect (super reach effect) or the like is performed.

[Cut-in production B]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for describing the cut-in effect B.
In the cut-in effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the timer display frequency suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), reach effect is performed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped with the same number of symbols, and the reach pattern is formed by the variation of the decorative symbol 8C. In the reach effect, the character CRA is executing a predetermined action.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98C, a first cut-in effect is performed. In the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed. The first cut-in display XE1 has a belt-like shape and an equal-legged base shape, appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed so as to spread toward the left side. The present invention is not limited to this, and it may appear from the right side of the display screen 7a and be displayed on the back edge toward the left side. In FIG. 98 (C), the first cut-in indication XE1 is indicated by hatching. The first cut-in display XE1 hides the character CRA.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (D), a second cut-in effect is performed. In the second cut-in effect, a second cut-in display XE2 is displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 has a belt-like shape and isopod-like shape, appears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a diverging manner toward the upper side. The present invention is not limited to this, and it may appear from the lower side of the display screen 7a and may be displayed on the upper side of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 98 (D), the second cut-in indication XE2 is indicated by hatching different from the first cut-in indication XE1. Further, in the second cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is not displayed. Further, the second cut-in display XE2 hides part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98E, a third cut-in effect is performed. In the third cut-in effect, a third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 has a belt-like shape and an equal-legged base shape, appears from the upper right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a wide angle toward the lower left side. The present invention is not limited to this, and it may appear from the upper right side of the display screen 7a and may be displayed on the lower end toward the lower left side. In FIG. 98 (E), the third cut-in display XE3 is shown by hatching different from the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2. Further, in the third cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2 are not displayed. In addition, the third cut-in display XE3 hides part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.
After the third cut-in effect, a predetermined effect (super reach effect) or the like is performed.

[Cut-in production C]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for describing the cut-in effect C.
In the cut-in effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 99 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the timer display frequency suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (B), reach effect is performed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped with the same number of symbols, and the reach pattern is formed by the variation of the decorative symbol 8C. In the reach effect, the character CRA is executing a predetermined action.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (C), a first cut-in effect is performed. In the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed. The first cut-in display XE1 has a belt-like shape and an equal-legged base shape, appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a diverging manner toward the left side. The present invention is not limited to this, and it may appear from the right side of the display screen 7a and be displayed on the back edge toward the left side. In FIG. 99 (C), the first cut-in indication XE1 is indicated by hatching. The first cut-in display XE1 hides the character CRA.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (D), a second cut-in effect is performed. In the second cut-in effect, a second cut-in display XE2 is displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 has a belt-like shape and isopod-like shape, appears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a diverging manner toward the upper side. The present invention is not limited to this, and it may appear from the lower side of the display screen 7a and may be displayed on the upper side of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 99 (D), the second cut-in indication XE2 is indicated by hatching different from the first cut-in indication XE1. Further, in the second cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is continuously displayed, and is disposed at the back side of the second cut-in display XE2 at a portion intersecting with the second cut-in display XE2. Ru. Further, the second cut-in display XE2 hides part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (E), the third cut-in effect is executed. In the third cut-in effect, a third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 has a belt-like shape and an equal-legged base shape, appears from the upper right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a wide angle toward the lower left side. The present invention is not limited to this, and it may appear from the upper right side of the display screen 7a and may be displayed on the lower end toward the lower left side. In FIG. 99 (E), the third cut-in indication XE3 is indicated by hatching different from the first cut-in indication XE1 and the second cut-in indication XE2. Further, in the third cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2 are continuously displayed, and the third cut-in is displayed at a portion intersecting the third cut-in display XE3. It is arranged on the back side of the display XE3. That is, in the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3, the second cut-in display XE2, and the first cut-in display XE1 are displayed in this order from the near side to the far side. In addition, the third cut-in display XE3 hides part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.
After the third cut-in effect, a predetermined effect (super reach effect) or the like is performed.

[Cut in effect D]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the cut-in effect D.
In the cut-in effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 100 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the timer display frequency suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), reach effect is performed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped with the same number of symbols, and the reach pattern is formed by the variation of the decorative symbol 8C. In the reach effect, the character CRA is executing a predetermined action.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100C, a first cut-in effect is performed. In the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed. The first cut-in display XE1 has a belt-like shape and an equal-legged base shape, appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a diverging manner toward the left side. The present invention is not limited to this, and it may appear from the right side of the display screen 7a and be displayed on the back edge toward the left side. In FIG. 100C, the first cut-in indication XE1 is indicated by hatching. In addition, the character CRA is displayed on the first cut-in display XE1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (D), a second cut-in effect is performed. In the second cut-in effect, a second cut-in display XE2 is displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 has a belt-like shape and isopod-like shape, appears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a diverging manner toward the upper side. The present invention is not limited to this, and it may appear from the lower side of the display screen 7a and may be displayed on the upper side of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 100 (D), the second cut-in indication XE2 is indicated by hatching different from the first cut-in indication XE1. Further, in the second cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is continuously displayed, and is disposed at the back side of the second cut-in display XE2 at a portion intersecting with the second cut-in display XE2. Ru. In the second cut-in display XE2, the character CRB is displayed. Although the character CRA displayed on the first cut-in display XE1 is not displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the character CRA may be displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 hides part of the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100E, a third cut-in effect is performed. In the third cut-in effect, a third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 has a belt-like shape and an equal-legged base shape, appears from the upper right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a wide angle toward the lower left side. The present invention is not limited to this, and it may appear from the upper right side of the display screen 7a and may be displayed on the lower end toward the lower left side. In FIG. 100E, the third cut-in display XE3 is indicated by hatching different from the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2. Further, in the third cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2 are continuously displayed, and the third cut-in is displayed at a portion intersecting the third cut-in display XE3. It is arranged on the back side of the display XE3. That is, in the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3, the second cut-in display XE2, and the first cut-in display XE1 are displayed in this order from the near side to the far side. In the third cut-in display XE3, the character CRC is displayed. The characters CRA and CRB displayed in the second cut-in display XE2 and the third cut-in display XE3 are not displayed, but are not limited to this and may be displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 hides part of the hold icon.
After the third cut-in effect, a predetermined effect (super reach effect) or the like is performed.

In the cut-in effects A to D, other effects (such as other cut-in effects) may be incorporated as one effect.
Further, after the cut-in effects A to D, predetermined effects such as super reach effects are performed. However, the cut-in effects A to D are performed at the final determined effect such as super reach effects. It is also good.
The first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 in the cut-in effects A to D function as chance-up effects, and the more the cut-in displays, the higher the jackpot expectation rate. It suggests.
In the cut-in effects A to D, the sizes of the first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sizes of the first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 may be different. For example, the sizes of the first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 may be set as the first cut-in display XE1> second cut-in display XE2> third cut-in display XE3. The first cut-in indication XE1 <the second cut-in indication XE2 <the third cut-in indication XE3 may be adopted.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of cut-in production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the cut-in effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed in the first cut-in effect, and then the second cut-in display XE2 is displayed in the second cut-in effect Be done. According to this configuration, since two cut-in effects are performed in order, the player can enjoy the continuous cut-in effects, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the cut-in effects A to D, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed from left to right in the first cut-in effect, and then, in the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in from the lower side to the upper side Display XE2 is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can continuously perform the cut-in effect toward different positions, so that the movement of the cut-in effect can be enjoyed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the cut-in effects A to D, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed from left to right in the first cut-in effect, and then, in the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in from the lower side to the upper side Display XE2 is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can continuously perform the cut-in effect from different positions, so that the movement of the cut-in effect can be enjoyed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the cut-in effects A to D, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed in the first cut-in effect, and then the second cut-in display XE2 is displayed in the second cut-in effect, and then the third cut In the in effect, the third cut-in indication XE3 is displayed. According to this configuration, since three cut-in effects are performed in order, the player can enjoy three continuous cut-in effects, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the cut-in effects A to D, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed from left to right in the first cut-in effect, and then, in the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in from the lower side to the upper side The display XE2 is displayed, and then, in the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed from the upper right to the lower left. According to this configuration, the player can enjoy the movement of the cut-in effect because the continuous cut-in effect is executed toward the three different positions, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the cut-in effects A to D, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed from left to right in the first cut-in effect, and then, in the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in from the lower side to the upper side The display XE2 is displayed, and then, in the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed from the upper right to the lower left. According to this configuration, the player can continuously perform the cut-in effect at three different positions, so that the movement of the cut-in effect can be enjoyed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a cut-in production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above-mentioned cut-in effects A to D of the gaming machine of the above embodiment, the first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 respectively start and end the cut-in display Although the positions are different from each other, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start position of the cut-in display may be the same and the end position may be different, or the start position of the cut-in display is different and the end position is the same. The start position and the end position of the cut-in display may be the same.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XE-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of performing a first cut-in display,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second cut-in display,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect and the second display effect.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XE-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-1,
In the combination effect, in the first display effect, the first cut-in display is performed toward the first position, and in the second display effect, a second different from the first position The second cut-in display is performed toward the position,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XE-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-2,
In the combination effect, in the first display effect, the first cut-in display is performed from the third position to the first position, and in the second display effect, the third position The second cut-in indication is performed from the fourth position different from the second position toward the second position,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XE-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect of performing a third cut-in display,
The combination effect may include the third display effect in some cases.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XE-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-4,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, the first cut-in display is performed toward a fifth position different from the first position and the second position.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XE-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-5,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, the third cut-in display is performed from a sixth position different from the third position and the fourth position toward the fifth position. ,
A game machine characterized by

  The decorative symbol variation display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 101 to 104. This decorative symbol variation display effect is related to the variation display of the decorative symbol having the indeterminate symbol and the non-probable variation symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "special symbol"). It can be implemented. More specifically, the decorative symbol variation display effect is an effect to be executed in relation to the variable display of the decorative symbol integrally displayed with the character or the non-character.

[Decorative symbol variation display effect A]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation display effect A.
In the decorative symbol variation display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 101 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect indicates that the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 101 (A) has stopped, and here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in the lost symbol array ( It shows that it stopped at "689". In the present example, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of the numbers 1 to 9, and the odd number is a probability variation symbol and the even number is a normal symbol. That is, the jackpot symbol arrangement "111", "333", "555", "777", "999" is a probability variation jackpot ("777" is "16 RV passing planned jackpot", "333" is "16R (15R substantially) V The planned passing jackpot "," 111 "," 555 "," 999 "is" 16R (13R) V planned passing jackpot "), the jackpot symbol array" 222 "," 444 "," 666 "," 888 "is usually It is a jackpot ("16R (13R real) V non-passing jackpot").
In this decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect, as shown in the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C, the normal symbol is a blue (shown in white) number portion SB as a symbol and a non-character portion simulating a flame The NC and the symbol are displayed as an integrally displayed symbol, and the numeral part SB is displayed in the display area of the non-character part NC. As shown in the right decorative symbol 8R, the oddly variable symbol is displayed as a symbol in which a red (as hatched) number portion SR as a symbol and a non-character portion NC imitating a flame are integrally displayed, and the number portion SR Is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC. The numeral part SB of the normal symbol and the numeral part SR of the odd symbol are displayed in substantially the same size. In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. 101 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state of swinging a few frames up and down), and as the final symbol It does not indicate the result of the change.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101C, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol determination effect is executed. In this decorative symbol determination effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the temporary stop state are completely stopped and become final symbols in the decorative symbol change stop effect shown in FIG. It is an effect to notify to. In this decorative symbol determination effect, among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped at the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. It is shown. That is, the probability variation pattern in which the number portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed changes to the pattern in which the number portion SR and the character portion CA9 are integrally displayed when the decorative symbol determination effect is performed. Do. At this time, the number portion SR is reduced in size and displayed in the display area of the character portion CA9 in a size approximately half that of the number portion SB of the normal symbol. The character portion CA9 is a dedicated character corresponding to the probability symbol "9".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol variation start effect is executed. The decorative symbol variation start effect is an effect performed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R which have been completely stopped in the decorative symbol determination effect shown in FIG. 101 (C) start changing. In this decorative symbol variation start effect, of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the decorative symbol finalization effect shown in FIG. 101 (C), the display mode of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed with the probability variation pattern changes The situation is shown. That is, the probability variation pattern in which the number portion SR and the character portion CA9 are integrally displayed is displayed on the symbol in which the number portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed when the decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. Change. At this time, the number portion SR is enlarged in size, and displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC in substantially the same size as the number portion SB of the normal symbol. That is, when the decorative symbol variation start effect is performed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop the decorative symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 101 (B) from the display mode of the decorative symbol decision effect shown in FIG. 101 (C). It returns to the display mode of the effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (E), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol change effect, the same effect as the decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 101 (A) described above is performed. That is, when starting to change, when the symbol arrangement including the probability variation symbol is finalized and displayed, the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are integrally displayed with the number variation SR and the non-character portion NC. After changing to the symbol, and after enlarging the number part SR and changing it to almost the same size as the number part SB, the variation is started. That is, immediately before the start of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the display mode of the odd-change symbol is changed to the display mode in the temporary stop state.

[Decorative symbol variation display effect B]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation display effect B.
In the decorative symbol variation display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 102 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect indicates that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 102 (A). In this example, "9 ↓ 9" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. As described above, "9" is a probability variation symbol, that is, in this reach effect, a reach symbol arrangement that is a probability variation jackpot when it is a jackpot is shown. Therefore, in this reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R forming the reach symbol array are a red (as hatched) number portion SR as a symbol and a non-character portion NC simulating a flame. Is displayed as an integrally displayed symbol, and the numeral part SR is displayed in the display area of the non-character part NC. Note that the decorative symbol 8C indicates that it is in motion (in the downward direction). Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), the reach symbol change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach symbol change effect, it is shown that the display mode of the probability variation symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) stopped at the reach symbol array ("9 ↓ 9") is changed. That is, when the numerical symbol SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed, when the reach is reached, the display mode changes to a symbol in which the number portion SR and the character portion CA9 are integrally displayed. At this time, the number portion SR is reduced in size, and displayed in the display area of the character portion CA9 in a size approximately half that of the number portion SB of the normal symbol. Note that the decorative symbol 8C indicates that it is in motion (in the downward direction). In addition, the character portion CA9 is a dedicated character corresponding to the probability variation symbol "9".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect is achieved by stopping the inner decorative symbol 8C of the final stop symbol in a state where the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R shown in FIG. 102 (B) are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. , Indicates that the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has stopped. In this example, it is shown that the inside decoration pattern 8C is stopped at the odd symbol “7” and the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at the lost symbol array (“979”, reach lost symbol array). Here, the inside decoration pattern 8C is stopped by a pattern in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed, while the left decoration pattern 8L and the right decoration pattern 8R which have been stopped in the reach pattern arrangement are inside When the decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the display mode changes from a symbol in which the number portion SR and the character portion CA9 are integrally displayed to a symbol in which the number portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed, and The part SR is enlarged in size and returns to the size at the time of the reach effect shown in FIG. 102 (B). That is, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), in the state where all the decorative symbols have stopped changing, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are symbols in which the numeral part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed, The numeral portion SR is a display mode which is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC in substantially the same size as the numeral portion SB of the normal symbol. In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. 102 (D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state of swinging a couple of frames up and down), and as the final symbol It does not indicate the result of the change.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102E, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol determination effect is executed. In this decorative symbol determination effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop state are completely stopped and become final symbols in the decorative symbol change stop effect shown in FIG. 102 (D), and the result of the change is given to the player It is an effect to notify. In this decorative symbol determination effect, it is shown that the display mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped at the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. 102 (D) is changed. Since all of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped by the decorative symbol variation stop effect are positive variation symbols, it is shown that the display mode of all the decorative symbols has been changed in this decorative symbol determination effect. That is, when the decorative symbol finalization effect is performed, the display pattern of the odd variation symbol in which the number portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed is the display pattern of the decorative symbol 8L, 8R is the number portion SR and the character portion CA9, The decorative symbol 8C changes to a symbol in which the number portion SR and the character portion CA7 are integrally displayed. At this time, the number portion SR is reduced in size and displayed in the display area of the character portions CA7 and CA9 in a size approximately half that of the number portion SB of the normal symbol. The character part CA7 is a dedicated character corresponding to the probability symbol "7".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (F), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol variation start presentation is executed. This decorative symbol variation start effect is an effect to be performed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R which have been completely stopped in the decorative symbol determination effect shown in FIG. 102 (E) start changing. In this decorative symbol variation start effect, it is shown that the display mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the decorative symbol finalization effect shown in FIG. 102 (E) is changed. Since all of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that have been decided and stopped by the decorative symbol determination effect are all probable symbols, in this decorative symbol variation start effect, it is shown that the display modes of all the decorative symbols have changed. That is, when the decorative symbol variation start effect is performed, the odd variation symbol in which the numeral SR and the characters CA7 and CA9 are integrally displayed has the display form in which the numeral SR and the non-character NC are integrally displayed. Change to a pattern. At this time, the number portion SR is enlarged in size, and displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC in substantially the same size as the number portion SB of the normal symbol. That is, when the decorative symbol variation start effect is performed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop the decorative symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 102 (D) from the display mode of the decorative symbol determination effect shown in FIG. 102 (E). It returns to the display mode of the effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (G), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol change effect, the same effect as the decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 102 (A) described above is performed. That is, when starting to change, when the symbol arrangement including the probability variation symbol is finalized and displayed, the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are integrally displayed with the number variation SR and the non-character portion NC. After changing to the symbol, and after enlarging the number part SR and changing it to almost the same size as the number part SB, the variation is started. That is, immediately before the start of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the display mode of the odd-change symbol is changed to the display mode in the temporary stop state.

[Decorative symbol variation display effect C]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation display effect C.
In the decorative symbol variation display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 103 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect indicates that the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 103 (A) has stopped, and here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in the lost symbol array ( It shows that it stopped at "689". As described above, "6" and "8" are usually symbols, and "9" is a probability symbol.
In this decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect, as shown in the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C, the normal symbol is a blue (shown in white) number portion SB as a symbol and a non-character portion simulating a flame The NC and the symbol are displayed as an integrally displayed symbol, and the numeral part SB is displayed in the display area of the non-character part NC. As shown in the right decorative symbol 8R, the oddly variable symbol is displayed as a symbol in which a red (as hatched) number portion SR as a symbol and a non-character portion NC imitating a flame are integrally displayed, and the number portion SR Is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC. The numeral part SB of the normal symbol and the numeral part SR of the odd symbol are displayed in substantially the same size. In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. 103 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state of swinging a few frames up and down), and as the final symbol It does not indicate the result of the change.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), the decorative symbol determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this decorative symbol determination effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the temporary stop state are completely stopped and become final symbols in the decorative symbol change stop effect shown in FIG. 103 (B), and the player changes the result of the change. It is an effect to notify to. In this decorative symbol determination effect, among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped at the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. 103 (B), the appearance of the display pattern of the right decorative symbol 8R stopped at the odd symbol is changed It is shown. That is, the probability variation pattern in which the number portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed changes to the pattern in which the number portion SR and the character portion CA9 are integrally displayed when the decorative symbol determination effect is performed. Do. At this time, the number portion SR is reduced in size, and displayed in the display area of the character portion CA9 in a size approximately half that of the number portion SB of the normal symbol. The character portion CA9 is a dedicated character corresponding to the probability symbol "9".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol variation start effect is executed. The decorative symbol change start effect is an effect to be performed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R which have been completely stopped in the decorative symbol determination effect shown in FIG. 103 (C) start changing. In this decorative symbol variation start effect, of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the decorative symbol finalization effect shown in FIG. 103 (C), the display mode of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed with a probability pattern changes The situation is shown. That is, the probability variation pattern in which the number portion SR and the character portion CA9 are integrally displayed is displayed on the symbol in which the number portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed when the decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. Change. At this time, the number portion SR is enlarged in size, and displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC in substantially the same size as the number portion SB of the normal symbol. That is, when the decorative symbol variation start effect is performed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop the decorative symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 103 (B) from the display mode of the decorative symbol decision effect shown in FIG. 103 (C). It returns to the display mode of the effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (E), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol change effect, the same effect as the decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 103 (A) described above is performed. That is, when starting to change, when the symbol arrangement including the probability variation symbol is finalized and displayed, the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are integrally displayed with the number variation SR and the non-character portion NC. After changing to the symbol, and after enlarging the number part SR and changing it to almost the same size as the number part SB, the variation is started. That is, immediately before the start of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the display mode of the odd-change symbol is changed to the display mode in the temporary stop state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (F), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol enlargement stop effect is executed. The decorative symbol expansion stop effect indicates that the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 103 (E) has stopped, and here, the decorative symbol 8L, It shows that 8C and 8R have stopped at the lost symbol array ("678"). This decorative symbol expansion stop effect is the same effect as the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. 103 (B), but the difference is that the normal symbol stops at the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. The oddly changing design has stopped at the decoration pattern 8C. Here, when the indeterminate symbol stops in the inside decorative symbol 8C, the number part SR of the indeterminate symbol is the normal symbol compared to the case where the indeterminate symbol stops in the right decorative symbol 8R shown in FIG. 103 (B). It is displayed larger than the number part SB. That is, when the final stop symbol (middle decorative symbol 8C) stops with a definite symbol, the first stop symbol (left decorative symbol 8L) and the second stop symbol (right decorative symbol 8R) stop with a definite symbol , And the number part SR is displayed in a large size. In this case, the numeric part SR is displayed with a part thereof protruding from the display area of the non-character part NC.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (G), a decorative symbol determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this decorative symbol determination effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop state are completely stopped and become final symbols in the decorative symbol expansion stop effect shown in FIG. 103 (F), and the player changes the result of the variation. It is an effect to notify to. In this decorative symbol determination effect, among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped at the decorative symbol expansion stop effect shown in FIG. 103 (F), the appearance of the display mode of the middle decorative symbol 8C stopped at the odd symbol is changed It is shown. That is, the probability variation pattern in which the number portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed changes to the pattern in which the number portion SR and the character portion CA7 are integrally displayed when the decorative symbol determination effect is performed. Do. At this time, the number portion SR is reduced in size and displayed in the display area of the character portion CA7 in a size approximately half that of the number portion SB of the normal symbol. The character part CA7 is a dedicated character corresponding to the probability symbol "7".
[Decorative symbol variation display effect D]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation display effect D.
In the decorative symbol variation display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 104 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect indicates that the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 104 (A) has stopped, and here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in the lost symbol array ( It shows that it stopped at "689". As described above, "6" and "8" are usually symbols, and "9" is a probability symbol.
In this decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect, as shown in the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C, the normal symbol is a blue (shown in white) number portion SB as a symbol and a non-character portion simulating a flame The NC and the symbol are displayed as an integrally displayed symbol, and the numeral part SB is displayed in the display area of the non-character part NC. As shown in the right decorative symbol 8R, the oddly variable symbol is displayed as a symbol in which a red (as hatched) number portion SR as a symbol and a non-character portion NC imitating a flame are integrally displayed, and the number portion SR Is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC. The numeral part SB of the normal symbol and the numeral part SR of the odd symbol are displayed in substantially the same size. In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state of swinging a few frames up and down), and as the final symbol It does not indicate the result of the change.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (C), stop symbol change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this stop symbol change effect, among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped at the decorative symbol change stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (B), the appearance of the display mode of the right decorative symbol 8R stopped at the odd symbol is changed It is shown. In other words, when the stop symbol change effect is performed, the display pattern changes to a symbol in which the numeric part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed. Do. At this time, the number portion SR is reduced in size, and displayed in the display area of the character portion CA9 in a size approximately half that of the number portion SB of the normal symbol. In the stop symbol change effect shown in FIG. 104 (C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state of swinging a few frames up and down), and the variation as the final symbol Does not indicate the result of In addition, the character portion CA9 is a dedicated character corresponding to the probability variation symbol "9".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (D), on the display screen 7a, a pseudo link start effect is executed. The pseudo link start effect is an effect to be performed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that have been temporarily stopped at the stop symbol change effect shown in FIG. 104C start the pseudo link.
Here, the pseudo series effect is an effect that makes it appear that the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is pseudo-continuously performed a predetermined number of times, and is an effect that can be executed at the start of fluctuation, reach effect, during fluctuation stop, and the like. For example, the pseudo-sequence effect repeats the effect of temporarily stopping all the decorative symbols after starting to change the decorative symbol, the effect of repeating temporarily the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part of the predetermined symbol array of the decorative symbol, An effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping a determined logo (for example, NEXT), or an effect that causes a decorative effect to be changed with a display that reminds you of pseudo links such as "x 2", "x 3", "pseudo" including. The number of effects to be repeated may be referred to as a pseudo run number, and may be written as “pseudo 2” or “x 2” for two, “pseudo 3” or “x 3” for three.
In this pseudo link start effect, among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the stop symbol change effect shown in FIG. 104 (C), the display mode of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed with a probability symbol has changed The situation is shown. That is, in the case of the pseudo-invariant symbol on which the numeric part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed, the display mode changes to a symbol on which the numeric part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed Do. At this time, the number portion SR is enlarged in size, and displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC in substantially the same size as the number portion SB of the normal symbol. In other words, when the simulated link start effect is performed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed from the stop symbol change effect display mode shown in FIG. 104C to the decorative symbol change stop effect shown in FIG. 104B. It returns to the display mode of.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104E, on the display screen 7a, pseudo continuous variation effect is executed. In this simulated contingency change effect, the same effect as the decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 104 (A) described above is performed. In other words, when the symbol arrangement including the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed when the pseudo symbol variation is started when the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are started, the number variation SR and the non-character portion NC are integrated After changing to the displayed symbol, and after enlarging the number part SR to change it to almost the same size as the number part SB, re-variation is started. That is, immediately before the start of the re-variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the display mode of the probable symbol changes to the display mode at the time of the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (B). As described above, the display mode when the pseudo continuous effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 104A to 104E in the decorative symbol fluctuation display effect D is the FIG. 101A in the decorative symbol fluctuation display effect A described above. It is a display mode similar to the variation effect of the decorative symbol performed repeatedly when the pseudo-series effect is not performed as shown in (E). In this way, even when the pseudo-series effect is performed, the clever and delicate pseudo-sequence effect is displayed to make it appear to the player that the variation display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is actually performed a plurality of times. It can be done.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104F, the reach effect is performed on the display screen 7a. That is, in this example, after the number of times of pseudo run is performed, reach effect is performed. This reach effect indicates that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the pseudo-continuous variable effect shown in FIG. 104 (E). In this example, "9 ↓ 9" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. As described above, "9" is a probability pattern, that is, in this reach effect, a reach symbol arrangement that is a probability variation jackpot when it is a jackpot is shown. Note that the decorative symbol 8C indicates that it is in motion (in the downward direction). Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (G), the jackpot symbol enlargement stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This big hit design expansion stop production is by stopping the inside decoration design 8C of the final stop design in the state where left decoration design 8L and right decoration design 8R which are shown in Figure 104 (F) have stopped in reach design arrangement. , Indicates that the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has stopped. In this example, it is shown that the inside decoration pattern 8C is stopped at the odd symbol “9” and the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at the probability variation big hit symbol array “999”. Here, in this big hit symbol expansion stop production, when the inside stop design symbol 8C of the final stop pattern is stopped by the definite variation pattern and the definite variation big hit symbol arrangement is displayed, all of the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are the positive variation symbol The numeral part SR is enlarged and displayed so as to be larger than the numeral part SB of the normal symbol. In other words, the numeral part SR of the odd variation symbol is enlarged and displayed larger than the numeral part SR of the odd variation symbol shown in FIGS. 104 (B), (D) and (F). Further, in this case, the numeric part SR is displayed with a part thereof protruding from the display area of the non-character part NC. In the jackpot symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state of swinging a couple of frames up and down), and the variation as the final symbol Does not indicate the result of

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (H), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this big hit finalization effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the temporary stop state completely stop and become the final design with the big hit symbol expansion stop production shown in FIG. It is an effect of notifying the player that it has become. In this jackpot finalization effect, all the display patterns of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R as the probable variation symbols stopped in the jackpot symbol expansion stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (G) are shown. That is, the probability variation symbol in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed changes the display mode to the symbol in which the number part SR and the character part CA7 are integrally displayed when the big hit finalization effect is performed . At this time, the number portion SR is reduced in size, and displayed in the display area of the character portion CA9 in a size approximately half that of the number portion SB of the normal symbol. In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of decorative symbol variation display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 101 to FIG. 104, when the decorative symbols include the first symbol group and the second symbol group, when the decorative symbols of the first symbol group become big hit The privilege to be awarded to the player is set more advantageously than when the second design group becomes a big hit with the decoration symbols, and the first design symbol is displayed integrally with the first symbol and the character. It is a mode symbol, and the decoration symbol of the second symbol group is a second mode symbol in which the second symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed, and one of the plurality of display effects includes the first symbol group The decorative symbol may be displayed in a third mode symbol in which the first symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed. According to this configuration, the player can display the decorative symbol of the first symbol group, in which the privilege to be awarded to the player is advantageously set, by using the third symbol in place of the first symbol at a predetermined timing. In addition, it is possible to give a player a sense of jackpot by giving a change to the change display of the decorative symbol. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is changed from the first mode symbol to the third mode symbol in relation to the start of fluctuation, and is engaged in fluctuation stop. The third mode symbol is changed to the first mode symbol. Furthermore, the first symbol in the first mode symbol is displayed smaller than the second symbol in the second mode symbol, and the first symbol in the third mode symbol is displayed the same as or larger than the second symbol in the second mode symbol. Is configured. According to this configuration, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is a display mode in which the symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol of the second symbol group during rapid movement of movement. One symbol will also be displayed the same as or larger than the second symbol. This makes it easy for the player to easily view the trend of the most interesting first symbol directly linked to the awarding of the privilege, even while the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is changing. On the other hand, during the stop of movement without movement, the decorative symbols of the first symbol group are display modes different from the decorative symbols of the second symbol group, in which symbols and characters are integrally displayed, and the first symbol is also the first It will be displayed smaller than 2 symbols. As a result, while the decorative symbols of the first symbol group are stopped changing, the first symbol is displayed small and the character is closed up, and the player is the first symbol of the most interesting first symbol group directly linked to the award. The characters associated with can be carefully viewed and noted. That is, the player can grasp the first symbol only by looking at the character. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 101 to FIG. 104, when the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is included when the decorative symbol stops fluctuating in a predetermined symbol array, once, When the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is stopped (temporarily stopped) with the third mode symbol, and then the decorative symbol is determined with the symbol array stopping (temporary stop), the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is It is configured to change from the third mode symbol to the first mode symbol. After that, when starting to change the decorative symbols of the determined symbol array, the decorative symbols of the first symbol group are changed from the first mode symbol to the third mode symbol. According to this configuration, when the decorative symbol is stopped changing in the predetermined symbol array, when the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is included, the first symbol group in the predetermined symbol array stopped changing. The first symbol of can be easily confirmed, and the character associated with the first symbol in the determined predetermined symbol arrangement can be easily confirmed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102, when the decoration symbols of the first symbol group stop in the reach symbol arrangement, the decoration symbols of the first symbol group stopping in the reach symbol arrangement are When the final stop symbol stops and then the variation stop (temporary stop) is made in the predetermined symbol array after changing from the one symbol to the third symbol, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is changed from the third symbol to the first symbol Change to the form design. Next, when deciding with the symbol arrangement which is stopping (temporarily stopping) the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is changed from the third mode symbol to the first mode symbol, and then the decided symbol arrangement is When changing the decorative symbol, it is configured to change the decorative symbol of the first symbol group from the first aspect symbol to the third aspect symbol. According to this configuration, when the decorative symbols of the first symbol group stop in the reach symbol array, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is changed to the first mode symbol and displayed with the third mode symbol. It is possible to improve the jackpot expectation of the person's reach. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103 and FIG. 104, when the final stop symbol stops at the decorative symbol of the first symbol group, or the big hit symbol array with the decorative symbol of the first symbol group When the jackpot symbol array is displayed, the decorative symbols of the first symbol group are displayed integrally with the non-character by changing (enlarging) the size of the first symbol (a part of the non-character display area is displayed It is configured to be displayed in the fourth mode symbol) which is displayed by being pushed out. According to this configuration, when the final stop symbol and jackpot symbol arrangement (probable variation jackpot symbol arrangement) that is most directly linked to awarding benefits is the decorative symbol of the first symbol group, the size of the first symbol changes (enlarged ), So that it is possible to change the change display of the decorative symbol and improve the player's expectation. Also, the player can easily confirm the decorative symbols of the first symbol group to grasp the variation result. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104, when the symbol arrangement including the decoration symbol of the first symbol group is stopped and displayed when the simulated symbol variation starts, as shown in FIG. It is configured to start re-variation after changing the decorative symbol of the one symbol group to the third mode symbol and enlarging the first symbol. According to this configuration, the display mode when the pseudo-series effect is performed is the same display mode as the variation effect of the actual decorative symbol which is repeatedly performed when the pseudo-series effect is not performed. In this way, even when the pseudo-series effect is performed, the clever and delicate pseudo-sequence effect is displayed to make the player appear as if the variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) has been performed multiple times in a realistic manner. It can be done. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a decorative symbol fluctuation display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, in the decorative symbols, the first stop symbol (left decorative symbol), the second stop symbol (right decorative symbol), the final stop symbol (middle decorative symbol) In either case, when the symbol stopped fluctuating is a definite symbol, once it is stopped (temporarily stopped) as a symbol in which a number and a non-character are integrally displayed, then a symbol in which a number and a character are integrally displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the final stop symbol (inside decoration symbol) may be changed to a symbol in which a number and a character are integrally displayed. Since the final stop symbol (inside decoration symbol) is the symbol of highest interest to the player, for example, in the reach state, the interest of the game can be improved by changing the display mode in this manner.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, the odd number is a probability variation symbol, the even number is a normal symbol, the probability variation symbol is red, and the normal symbol is blue to display numbers as symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the symbols may be characters other than numerals, marks, or images (icons) such as objects or articles having a specific shape. In addition, in the odd variation symbol, the characters integrally displayed with the numbers are displayed in the same size, but the odd variation symbol (for example, “3”, “7”) is advantageous when the bonus given to the player is large ) May make the display of the character larger than other odd-change symbols.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, when the final stop symbol (inside decoration symbol) stops with a probability symbol, the probability symbol changes (enlarges) the size of the number and the non-character Although the display is integrally displayed (a part of the display area of the non-character is displayed as it protrudes), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the bonus given to the player at the time of a big hit is stopped with an advantageous probability variation symbol (for example, "3", "7"), the size of the numeral of the probability variation symbol may be changed (enlarged) Good. In this case, only when the probability variation symbol is the final stop symbol (inside decoration symbol), or when the probability variation symbol is the first stop symbol (left decoration symbol) or the second stop symbol (right decoration symbol) It may be Alternatively, when the final stop symbol (inside decorative symbol) is stopped by the odd symbol, the positive symbol is stopped without changing the size of the numeral, and the first stop symbol (left decorative symbol) and the second symbol are stopped. The numbers of the symbols (right decorative symbols) may be reduced.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104, when the big hit symbol array (probable variation big hit symbol array) is displayed as a probability variation symbol, the number of the probability variation symbol changes (enlarges) It was made to be displayed integrally with the non-character (displayed partially out of the non-character display area), but in this case, in the reach state before the jackpot symbol array (probable variation jackpot symbol array) is displayed, It is also possible to magnify and display the numbers of the oddly changing symbols that become the jackpots of the final stop symbols during the change. Alternatively, the numbers of all the odd variation symbols of the final stop symbols during variation may be enlarged, or the numbers of all the final stop symbols may be enlarged.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 101 to FIG. 104, when the symbol whose fluctuation is stopped is a definite variation symbol, it is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) as a symbol in which numbers and non-characters are integrally displayed. After that, the figure and the character are changed to a symbol that is displayed integrally, but in this case, when the character and the character change to a symbol that is displayed integrally, when the character becomes a predetermined display mode ( For example, the color of the character may change to red and the face of the character may change to a smile), and the subsequent change (including a re-change such as pseudo reunion) may result in reaching or winning. In other words, the reach or jackpot may be suggested by changing the character to a predetermined display mode.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104, in the pseudo-series effect, the numerical symbol and the character part are displayed in an integrated manner for the odd-changed symbol temporarily displayed with the numerals and the non-characters being displayed integrally. It changes to a symbol, and then it returns to the symbol where a number and a non-character are integrally displayed to perform re-variation (hereinafter, also referred to as a first pseudo link effect), but the present invention is limited to this Absent. For example, in the pseudo-series effect, the odd variation symbol temporarily stopped by displaying the numbers and the non-character as one unit is re-varied as it is without changing to the symbol in which the number and the character part are displayed integrally 2) It may be called "simulated series effect". And in this case, when the first pseudo-series effect is performed, it becomes reach or jackpot by the subsequent re-variation, and when the second pseudo-series effect is performed, it becomes the non-reach by the subsequent re-variation You may That is, by performing the first pseudo-series effect, it is possible to indicate the reach or the jackpot.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D3-1]
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
Symbol display means capable of displaying variable display of symbols;
Decorative symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol according to the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The decorative symbols include a first symbol group and a second symbol group,
When the jackpot of the first design group becomes a big hit, the privilege to be given to the player is set more advantageously than the big hit of the second design group.
The decorative symbols of the first symbol group are a first mode symbol in which the first symbol and the character are integrally displayed,
The decorative symbols of the second symbol group are a second mode symbol in which the second symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed,
The display means can execute a predetermined first decorative symbol effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first decorative symbol effect may display the decorative symbol of the first symbol group with a third mode symbol in which the first symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed.
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect D3-2]
In the first decorative symbol effect, the decorative symbols of the first symbol group are changed from the first mode symbol to the third mode symbol in relation to the start of fluctuation, and in relation to the fluctuation stop, the third pattern is changed from the third aspect symbol Change to the first mode symbol,
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1, characterized in that
[Aspect D3-3]
The first symbol in the first mode symbol is displayed smaller than the second symbol in the second mode symbol, and the first symbol in the third mode symbol is the same as or larger than the second symbol in the second mode symbol. Is displayed,
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1 or aspect D3-2.
[Aspect D3-4]
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
Symbol display means capable of displaying variable display of symbols;
Decorative symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol according to the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The decorative symbols include a first symbol group and a second symbol group,
When the jackpot of the first design group becomes a big hit, the privilege to be given to the player is set more advantageously than the big hit of the second design group.
The decorative symbols of the first symbol group are a first mode symbol in which the first symbol and the character are integrally displayed,
The decorative symbols of the second symbol group are a second mode symbol in which the second symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second decorative symbol effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The second decorative symbol effect may display the decorative symbol of the first symbol group with a fourth mode symbol that is displayed integrally with the non-character while changing the size of the first symbol.
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect D3-5]
The decorative symbol of the first symbol group is a probability symbol, the decorative symbol of the second symbol group is a non-probable symbol, the first symbol and the second symbol are numerals, and the numerals of the first symbol and The numbers of the second symbols are different in color,
A game machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-4, characterized in that

  The game state suggestion effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108. This game state suggestion effect is an effect that can be executed in connection with the end of the short game played after the big hit game, and more specifically, when the predetermined condition is satisfied after the time short game ends, the game state is low certainty It is an indication that indicates whether (normal state) or high certainty (latent certainty change state).

[Playing state indication production A]
FIG. 105 is a view for explaining the game state suggestion effect A.
In the game state indication effect A, although illustration is omitted, the decorative symbol fluctuation effect is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed, and is displayed so as to scroll downward while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105A, the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has been a jackpot. In the present example, the jackpot symbol array "777" is "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot" (probable jackpot), and after the jackpot game is over, the high probability time short state (high probability high base state until the next jackpot) It is a jackpot to become). The jackpot symbol array "333" is "16R (15R substantial) V scheduled to pass jackpot" (probable variation jackpot), and after the jackpot game is over, the high probability time short state (high probability high base state) until the gaming state wins the next time It is a big hit. A jackpot symbol arrangement other than "777" and "333" is a jackpot that becomes "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" (latency jackpot) or "16R (real 13R) V non-scheduled jackpot" (usually a jackpot) It is. After the big hit game is over, the gaming state is high probability time short state (high probability high base state) until the number of times the special symbol changes 100 times after the big hit game is over. After that, it becomes a high probability low base state (latency probability change state). "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" (normal jackpot), after the end of the jackpot game, the gaming state becomes low probability state short state (low probability high base state) until the number of times of variation of special symbol is performed 100 times After that, the low base state (normal state) is established.
In the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 105 (A), the jackpot symbol arrangement “555” is shown. Here, as described above, this jackpot symbol arrangement is “555” is “16R (essentially 13R) V planned scheduled jackpot” (latent probability jackpot) or “16R (essentially 13R) V non-scheduled scheduled jackpot” (usually a jackpot) The jackpot symbol arrangement “555” in this case is “16R (essentially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” (latency jackpot).

  Next, after the jackpot determination effect is executed, the jackpot game is started, and although the illustration is omitted on the display screen 7a, the effect related to the jackpot game is executed. Then, when this big hit game is over, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), a time saving start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this time start effect, the decorative symbol change effect in the high probability high base state is performed, but the player can not recognize the high probability state although it can recognize the time reduction state. That is, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the current gaming state is the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state. In the upper right of the display screen 7a, a time reduction number display ZT indicating the remaining time reduction number is displayed. Here, the time reduction number display ZT is shifted to the time reduction state, and then the first special symbol variation is started Since this is the case (when the number of times reduced is not digested even once), "100" is shown as the default value.

  Next, after the time reduction start effect is executed, the time reduction game is started, and when the variation of the special symbol is performed 100 times in the short game at this time, that is, when it does not become a big hit during the short game period at this time. As shown in FIG. 105C, on the display screen 7a, the time-saving end effect is executed. In this time-short-end effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are erased on the display screen 7a, and instead the characters "time-short end" are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and "0" on the time-savings display ZT. Is displayed. The character display of "time reduction end" and the display of "0" of the time reduction number display ZT clearly indicate to the player that the time reduction state has ended.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (D), on the display screen 7a, a time-saving end variation effect is executed. In this time-end finish time variation presentation, the variation display is started in the same variation time as in the normal state, that is, in a variation time longer than during the time reduction game, in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, on the display screen 7a, a specific image KSG1 having a "mountain" as a motif is displayed below the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The specific image KSG1 is displayed in a predetermined color (for example, white).

  Next, when the variation display of the special symbol is performed once (after the time reduction end is performed) after the time reduction game is finished, as shown in FIG. 105 (E), the countdown effect on the display screen 7a. Is executed. Here, in the gaming state suggestion effect A, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10 times after the short time game is over, the current gaming state is low probability (normal state) or high probability (using the specific image KSG1) It is designed to perform the latent probability change suggestive action described later, which suggests whether the latent change is in the latent change state). In the countdown effect shown in FIG. 105 (E), since the variation display of the special symbol is performed once after the short time game is over, the variation display of the special symbol until the latent probability change presentation effect is remaining nine times. The numeral "9" is displayed. In other words, this countdown effect is switched to the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (losing symbols) every time when the variation display of the special symbol is performed once after the time saving game is over, until the latent probability change suggestion effect A number indicating the countdown is displayed large at the center of the screen. In this countdown effect, only the number indicating the countdown to the latent latent variation suggestion effect is displayed, and the specific image KSG1 is once erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105F, on the display screen 7a, a countdown time fluctuation effect is executed. In this countdown time variation effect, the number is switched to a number indicating the countdown to the latent latent variation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 105E, and the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started again on the display screen 7a. At this time, the specific image KSG1 once erased by the countdown effect shown in FIG. 105E is also displayed again.

  After that, when the countdown effect and the countdown time change effect are alternately repeated, and the variable symbol display of the special symbol is performed ten times after the time saving game is over, as shown in FIG. 105 (G), the display screen is displayed next In 7a, a countdown effect is performed in which a number "0" is displayed indicating that the variation display of the special symbol remains 0 times until the latent probability change suggestion effect. That is, the countdown effect shown in FIG. 105 (G) indicates that the countdown to the latent probability change suggestion effect has ended.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105H, on the display screen 7a, the latency probability change suggestion effect is executed. In this latent certainty change suggestion effect, when the current gaming state is high certainty (latent certainty change state), the color of the specific image KSG1 is changed to a predetermined color (for example, changed from white to red), and low certainty (normal state) In this case, by not changing the color of the specific image KSG1, an effect is suggested that indicates whether the current gaming state is low certainty (normal state) or high certainty (latent certainty change state). In this example, as described in FIG. 105 (A), since the jackpot symbol array “555” is internally regarded as a latent jackpot, in the latent probability change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 105 (H), FIG. 105 (D) The white specific image KSG1 shown in (F) is changed to a red specific image KSG2, which suggests that the current gaming state is high (latency definite change state). If the jackpot symbol array “555” is normally a jackpot internally, the specific image of white shown in FIGS. 105 (D) and (F) in the latent probability change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 105 (H) KSG1 is maintained as it is, which suggests that the current gaming state is low certainty (normal state).

[Playing state indication production B]
FIG. 106 is a view for explaining the game state suggestion effect B.
In the game state indication effect B, although illustration is omitted, the decorative symbol fluctuation effect is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed, and is displayed so as to scroll downward while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (A), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has been a jackpot. In the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 106 (A), the jackpot symbol arrangement “555” is shown. Here, as described above, this jackpot symbol arrangement is “555” is “16R (essentially 13R) V planned scheduled jackpot” (latent probability jackpot) or “16R (essentially 13R) V non-scheduled scheduled jackpot” (usually a jackpot) The jackpot symbol arrangement “555” in this case is “16R (essentially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” (latency jackpot).

  Next, after the jackpot determination effect is executed, the jackpot game is started, and although the illustration is omitted on the display screen 7a, the effect related to the jackpot game is executed. Then, when this jackpot game is over, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), a time-saving start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this time start effect, the decorative symbol change effect in the high probability high base state is performed, but the player can not recognize the high probability state although it can recognize the time reduction state. That is, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the current gaming state is the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state. In the upper right of the display screen 7a, a time reduction number display ZT indicating the remaining time reduction number is displayed. Here, the time reduction number display ZT is shifted to the time reduction state, and then the first special symbol variation is started Since this is the case (when the number of times reduced is not digested even once), "100" is shown as the default value. Further, at the upper left of the display screen 7a, it is shown that the effect mode performed from the short start effect is mode A. Mode A is an effect based on "mountain" as a motif, and in this time start effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific image imitating "mountain" below the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R KSG1 is displayed.

  Next, after the time reduction start effect is executed, the time reduction game is started, and when the variation of the special symbol is performed 50 times in this time short game, as shown in FIG. 106C, the effect mode is changed on the display screen 7a. The presentation is performed. This effect mode change effect is an effect of changing the effect mode from mode A to mode B, and the effect with "mountain" as the motif in mode A is changed to the effect with "tree" as the motif in mode B . That is, mode B is an effect based on "tree", which is performed when the variation of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 50 times) after the start of short time game, and this effect mode change effect Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific image RSG1 imitating a "tree" is displayed below the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in place of the specific image KSG1. The specific image RSG1 is displayed in a predetermined color (for example, white).

  Next, if the variation of the special symbol is performed 100 times in the short time game (when the variation of the special symbol is changed 50 times from the effect mode change effect), that is, if it does not become a big hit during the short game period, As shown in 106 (D), on the display screen 7a, the time saving end effect is executed. In this time-short-end effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are erased on the display screen 7a, and instead the characters "time-short end" are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and "0" on the time-savings display ZT. Is displayed. The character display of "time reduction end" and the display of "0" of the time reduction number display ZT clearly indicate to the player that the time reduction state has ended.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106E, on the display screen 7a, the time-saving end variation effect is executed. In this time-end finish time variation presentation, the variation display is started in the same variation time as in the normal state, that is, in a variation time longer than during the time reduction game, in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In addition, in the effect mode, the mode B is maintained, and a specific image RSG1 imitating "tree" is displayed below the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R as in the time-saving game.

  Next, when the variation display of the special symbol is performed once (after the time reduction end is performed) after the time reduction game is finished, as shown in FIG. 106 (F), the countdown effect on the display screen 7a. Is executed. Here, in the gaming state suggestion effect B, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10 times after the short time game is over, the current gaming state is low probability (normal state) or high probability (using the specific image RSG1) It is designed to perform the latent probability change suggestive action described later, which suggests whether the latent change is in the latent change state). In the countdown effect shown in FIG. 106 (F), the variation display of the special symbol is performed one time after the time saving game is over, so the variation display of the special symbol until the latent probability change presentation effect is remaining nine times. The numeral "9" is displayed. In other words, this countdown effect is switched to the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (losing symbols) every time when the variation display of the special symbol is performed once after the time saving game is over, until the latent probability change suggestion effect A number indicating the countdown is displayed large at the center of the screen. In this countdown effect, only the number indicating the countdown to the latent latent variation suggestion effect is displayed, and the specific image RSG1 is once erased.

  Next, although illustration is omitted here, as shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 105 (F), the countdown time fluctuation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this countdown time change effect, the number is switched to the number indicating the countdown to the latent probability change effect effect shown in FIG. 106 (F), and the change display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started again on the display screen 7a. At this time, the specific image RSG1 once erased by the countdown effect shown in FIG. 106 (F) is also displayed again.

  After that, when the countdown effect and the countdown time change effect are alternately repeated and the variable symbol display is performed 10 times after the short time game is over, as shown in FIG. 106 (G), the display screen is displayed next. In 7a, a countdown effect is performed in which a number "0" is displayed indicating that the variation display of the special symbol remains 0 times until the latent probability change suggestion effect. In other words, the countdown effect shown in FIG. 106 (G) indicates that the countdown to the latent latent change suggestion effect is finished.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106H, on the display screen 7a, the latent probability variation suggestion effect is executed. In this latent certainty change suggestion effect, when the current gaming state is high certainty (latent certainty change state), the color of the specific image RSG1 is changed to a predetermined color (for example, changed from white to red), and low certainty (normal state) In this case, by not changing the color of the specific image RSG1, an effect is suggested that indicates whether the current gaming state is low certainty (normal state) or high certainty (latent certainty change state). In this example, as described in FIG. 106 (A), since the jackpot symbol array “555” is internally considered as a latent jackpot, in the latent probability change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 106 (H), FIG. 106 (C) The white specific image RSG1 shown in (E) is changed to a red specific image RSG2, which suggests that the current gaming state is high (latency certainty change state). If the jackpot symbol array “555” is normally a jackpot internally, the specific image of white shown in FIGS. 106 (C) and (E) in the latent probability change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 106 (H) RSG 1 is maintained as it is, which suggests that the current gaming state is low confidence (normal state).

[Playing state indication production C]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the game state suggestion effect C.
In the gaming state suggestion effect C, although illustration is omitted, the decorative symbol fluctuation effect is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed, and is displayed so as to scroll downward while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107A, the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has been a jackpot. In the jackpot decision effect shown in FIG. 107 (A), the jackpot symbol arrangement “555” is shown. Here, as described above, this jackpot symbol arrangement is “555” is “16R (essentially 13R) V planned scheduled jackpot” (latent probability jackpot) or “16R (essentially 13R) V non-scheduled scheduled jackpot” (usually a jackpot) The jackpot symbol arrangement “555” in this case is “16R (essentially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” (latency jackpot).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), a jackpot game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot game effect, the character of "big hit game start!" Is displayed at the center of the display screen 7, and the jackpot symbol array OZH ("555") that has become a jackpot this time is on the upper right of the display screen 7a. It is displayed. In the jackpot game effect, effects such as opening effect, round effect, and ending effect are performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107C, the selected image display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The selected image display effect is an effect to be performed during the execution of the jackpot game (for example, performed during a round effect), an effect to be executed as one of the jackpot game effects, and a plurality of selected images SG1 on the display screen 7a Display SG2, SG3 and SG4. The selected images SG1, SG2, SG3 and SG4 are images including the characters "CHANCE" in the display area, and the selected image SG1 is red, the selected image SG2 is green, the selected image SG1 is yellow, and the selected image SG1 is blue. Is displayed. Here, the selected images SG1, SG2, SG3 and SG4 are images suggesting the gaming state after the big hit game, and more specifically, the degree of expectation that the gaming state after the big hit game becomes the definite change (high probability) state This is a suggested image. The size of this degree of expectation is, in the order of selected image SG1 (red)> selected image SG2 (green)> selected image SG3 (yellow)> selected image SG4 (blue) (for example, the gaming state after the jackpot game is The probability of becoming a definite (high probability) state is: selected image SG1: 80%, selected image SG2: 60%, selected image SG3: 40%> selected image SG4: 20%).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (D), a button effect is performed on the display screen 7a. In this button effect, an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 is displayed. Specifically, the selected images SG1, SG2, SG3 and SG4 shown in FIG. 107C are temporarily erased, and a button image BOG is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and a button PUSH is displayed above the button image BOG. "" Is displayed. In the lower part of the button image BOG, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross hatched portion) rises with the elapsed time since the button operation instruction effect is displayed, and the meter value will be removed when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 disappears. Is displayed to be full.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107E, a game state suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The game state suggestion effect is an effect in which one of the selected images SG1, SG2, SG3 and SG4 is displayed as a result of the player pressing the effect button 63 during the effective operation period of the effect button 63. Here, it is shown that the selected image SG1 (red) is selected and displayed based on the fact that it is internally latent probability jackpot (internally the probability variation or latent probability jackpot has become When there is a selection probability, the magnitude of the selection probability is in the order of selected image SG1 (red)> selected image SG2 (green)> selected image SG3 (yellow)> selected image SG4 (blue), and is internally normal (low probability) When the jackpot has occurred, the selection probability is in the following order: selected image SG4 (blue)> selected image SG3 (yellow)> selected image SG2 (green)> selected image SG1 (red)).

  After that, the big hit game is over, but illustration is omitted, but on the display screen 7a time reduction start effect, time reduction end effect, time reduction end fluctuation effect, countdown effect, countdown as in the above-mentioned FIG. Time-varying effects and countdown effects are executed. Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (F), on the display screen 7a, a latent probability change suggestion effect similar to that of FIG. 105 (H) is executed. That is, it is suggested that the white specific image KSG1 is changed to the red specific image KSG2, and thereby the current gaming state is high certainty (latency certainty change state). That is, when the selected image SG1 (red) having the highest degree of expectation that the gaming state after the big hit is in a definite (high probability) state is selected in the gaming state suggestive effect shown in FIG. 107 (E), As in the case of the latent certainty change suggestion effect shown in 107 (F), there is a high probability that the effect indicating that the current gaming state is high certainty (latency certainty change state) is executed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming state suggestion effect, it is assumed that the selected image SG4 (blue) is selected and displayed as shown in FIG. 107 (G) instead of FIG. 107 (E) (in this case, however) It is assumed that the hit jackpot symbol arrangement “555” is “16R (real 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot” (usually a jackpot).

  After that, the big hit game is over, but illustration is omitted, but on the display screen 7a time reduction start effect, time reduction end effect, time reduction end fluctuation effect, countdown effect, countdown as in the above-mentioned FIG. Time-varying effects and countdown effects are executed. Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (H), on the display screen 7a, the latent latent variation suggestion effect in which the specific image KSG1 is maintained as white without the white specific image KSG1 being changed to the red specific image KSG2. Is executed. That is, a latent probability change suggestion effect is executed that suggests that the current gaming state is low (normal state). That is, when the selected image SG4 (blue) with the lowest degree of expectation that the gaming state after the big hit is in a definite (high probability) state is selected in the gaming state suggestive effect shown in FIG. 107 (G), As in the latent probability change presentation effect shown in 107 (H), the probability that the presentation indicating that the current gaming state is low confidence (ordinary state) is performed is high.

[Playing state indication production D]
FIG. 108 is a view for explaining the game state suggestion effect D.
In the gaming state suggestion effect D, although illustration is omitted, the decorative symbol fluctuation effect is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed, and is displayed so as to scroll downward while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (A), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has been a jackpot. In the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 108 (A), the jackpot symbol arrangement “555” is shown. Here, as described above, this jackpot symbol arrangement is “555” is “16R (essentially 13R) V planned scheduled jackpot” (latent probability jackpot) or “16R (essentially 13R) V non-scheduled scheduled jackpot” (usually a jackpot) The jackpot symbol arrangement “555” in this case is “16R (essentially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” (latency jackpot).

  Next, a jackpot game is started, and although illustration is omitted on the display screen 7a, a jackpot game effect is executed as in the case of FIG. 107 (B). In this jackpot game effect, effects such as an opening effect, a round effect, and an ending effect are performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (B), a character selection effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character selection effect is an effect which is performed during the execution of the jackpot game (for example, performed during a round effect) and is an effect executed as one of the jackpot game effects, and a plurality of selected characters are displayed on the display screen 7a . In this example, two selected characters CRA and CRB are displayed as selected characters. As shown in FIG. 108 (B), the selected characters CRA and CRB have the selected character CRA displayed in the display area on the left half of the screen and the selected character CRB displayed in the display area on the right half of the screen. In addition, characters suggesting the operation method of the effect button 63 are displayed above the selected characters CRA and CRB, the character "one blow" is displayed in the selected character CRA, and the character "continuous hit" is displayed in the selected character CRB. ing. Furthermore, a character indicating the name of the character is displayed below the selected characters CRA and CRB. The character “OARO” is displayed in the selected character CRA, and the character “JARO” is displayed in the selected character CRB. When the character selection effect is executed, the player operates the select button 68 to select one of the selection characters CRA and CRB.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108C, the character determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this character determination effect, the character selected by the player in the character selection effect is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the selected character CRA is selected and displayed. That is, in the character determination effect, the selected character CRB which is not selected among the selected characters CRA and CRB which are displayed in plural in the character selection effect is erased from the display screen 7a, and the selected character CRA selected is of the display screen 7a. Displayed in the center. In the display screen 7a, characters of "one blow" and "OARO" are also displayed together with the selected character CRA.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (D), a button effect is performed on the display screen 7a. This button effect is performed based on the selected character CRA displayed by the character determination effect, that is, selected by the player. That is, this button effect produces an effect of causing the player to depress and operate the effect button 63 once due to the "one blow" that suggests the operation method of the effect button 63 related to the selected character CRA. Specifically, the button image BOG is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the character "button PUSH!" Is displayed above the button image BOG. In the lower part of the button image BOG, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross hatched portion) rises with the elapsed time since the button operation instruction effect is displayed, and the meter value will be removed when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 disappears. Is displayed to be full.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108E, the game state suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this gaming state suggestion effect, as a result of the player pressing the production button 63 during the effective operation period of the production button 63, an image is displayed that suggests the gaming state after the big hit game. More specifically, it is an image that indicates the degree of expectation that the gaming state after the jackpot game becomes a probability change (high probability) state. In this example, an image indicating the gaming state after the jackpot game is an expected degree suggestion image KSG1 displayed in red including the characters "CHANCE" in the display area. Here, the expectation degree suggestion image is an expectation degree suggestion image KSG2 displayed in green having a different degree of expectation degree from red, an expectation degree suggestion image KSG3 displayed in yellow, and an expectation degree suggestion image displayed in blue Four types of KSG4 are prepared. The size of the degree of expectation is in the order of the degree of expectation image KSG1 (red)> the degree of expectation image KSG2 (green)> the degree of expectation image KSG3 (yellow)> the degree of expectation image KSG4 (blue) (for example, , The probability that the gaming state after the jackpot game will be a probability change (high probability) state, expectation degree suggestion image KSG 1: 80%, expectation degree suggestion image KSG 2: 60%, expectation degree suggestion image KSG 3: 40%> expectation degree suggestion image KSG 4: 20%). In addition, it is based on the fact that the expectation degree suggestion image KSG1 (red) is selected internally for the probability state suggestion effect in this game state indication effect (it is an internal probability variation or latent probability win When there is, the magnitude of the selection probability is in the following order: expectation degree suggestion image KSG1 (red)> expectation degree suggestion image KSG2 (green)> expectation degree suggestion image KSG3 (yellow)> expectation degree suggestion image KSG4 (blue), When a normal (low probability) jackpot internally occurs, the magnitude of the selection probability is the expectation degree suggestion image KSG4 (blue)> the expectation degree suggestion image KSG3 (yellow)> the expectation degree suggestion image KSG2 (green)> Expected degree suggestion image KSG1 (red) in the order).

  On the other hand, in the character determination effect, it is assumed that the selected character CRB is selected and displayed as shown in FIG. 108 (F) instead of FIG. 108 (C) (However, in this case, the above-mentioned jackpot symbol array It is assumed that "555" is "16R (essentially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" (usually a jackpot).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (G), a button effect is performed on the display screen 7a. This button effect is performed based on the selected character CRB displayed by the character determination effect, that is, selected by the player. That is, this button effect produces an effect of causing the player to perform a continuous hit operation on the effect button 63 due to the "continuous hit" indicating the operation method of the effect button 63 related to the selected character CRB. Specifically, a plurality of button images BOG and characters "PUSH" are repeatedly displayed on the display screen 7a while changing the display position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (H), a game state suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The game state suggestion effect is the same as that of FIG. 108 (E), and as a result of the player continuously hitting the production button 63, an image indicating the game state after the big hit game is displayed. In this example, an image indicating the gaming state after the jackpot game is an expected degree suggestion image KSG4 displayed in blue that includes the characters "CHANCE" in the display area. The expectation level suggestion image KSG 4 (blue) is selected based on the game state suggestion effect based on the fact that the game is usually a big hit.

[Example of effect]
Below, the effect example of a game state suggestion production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105 to FIG. 107, in the time saving game, the gaming state is low probability time short status (low probability high base status) and high probability time short status (high probability high base status) When there is a time saving game, when the low accuracy time is short, the gaming state becomes a low probability low base normal state, and in the high probability time short, the gaming state is a probability change that is apparently difficult to distinguish from the normal state When the predetermined condition is satisfied after the time saving game is over, the game state suggestion effect is suggested to indicate whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent change state. It has become. According to this configuration, when the predetermined condition is satisfied after the short time game ends, the player can determine whether the current gaming state is low probability (normal state) or high probability (latency probability change state). it can. As a result, when there is a suggestion of high probability (hidden probability change state) in the gaming state suggestive effect, the player can face the game with great joy. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the variable symbol of the special symbol is displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) after the time saving game is over. There is a configuration to perform a countdown display for each variation of the special symbol until the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times after the time saving game is over. According to this configuration, the player can easily grasp how many times after the short time game ends, the game state suggestion effect is performed when the variation display of the special symbol is executed. In addition, this countdown display (in particular, the countdown display immediately before the gaming state suggestive effect is performed) can give the player a feeling of excitement and excitement about whether or not it is a definite change, and the player can Misses can be effectively suppressed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, a specific image changing according to the effect mode is displayed, and the game state suggestion effect is when the game state is the normal state and when the latent probability change state is Then, by changing the display mode of the specific image, it is configured to indicate whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent probability change state. According to this configuration, the player can very easily determine whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent probability change state only by recognizing that the display mode of the specific image has changed. Further, since the specific image changes in accordance with the effect mode, it is possible to perform the game state suggestion effect matching (harmonizing) with the effect mode. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, while executing the jackpot game, a plurality of selection images suggesting the gaming state after the jackpot game are displayed, and are selected from among the plurality of selection images. The selection image is configured to indicate the degree of expectation of the gaming state after the jackpot game. According to this configuration, the player can predict the gaming state after the jackpot game while the jackpot game is being executed. In addition, when it is suggested that the gaming state after the jackpot game is highly accurate, it is possible to face the game with great pleasure. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, the player is provided with an effect button operable, and a plurality of characters selectable by the player are displayed during execution of the big hit game, and a plurality of characters are selected. Depending on the character selected from, the effect of the button is different depending on the operation of the effect button, after the end of the button effect is configured to indicate the gaming state after the jackpot game. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player operate the different effect button according to the selected character. In addition, the player can select a character that can operate his / her favorite effect button, and can expect anticipation of the gaming state after the jackpot game performed thereafter. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a game state suggestion production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 to 107, the specific image is displayed after the time-saving end or after the big hit game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific image may be displayed continuously in all gaming states. Although the specific image is automatically changed according to the effect mode, the effect mode may be selectable by the player so that the player can select a desired specific image.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105 and FIG. 106, the game state suggestion effect is that the variation display of the special symbol has reached a predetermined number of times since the time saving game is over as the predetermined condition is established. Although it is sometimes practiced, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the establishment of the predetermined condition is when the predetermined time has passed since the end of the time saving game, or when the predetermined time slot is won after the end of the time saving game (predetermined number of winnings) or the time saving game is ended. It may be when a predetermined effect (including reach) is performed after that, or when the variable display of symbols other than the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105 and FIG. 106, after the time reduction game is over, the countdown display is performed for each variation of the special symbol until the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. Although the game state suggestion effect is performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the countdown display may be count up display. Also, the countdown display may be displayed as a stereoscopic image (3D). In this case, the countdown display may be displayed to be out of the display screen. By doing this, it is possible to perform a powerful countdown display, and to further appeal the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 to 107, the game state suggestion effect is to change whether or not the current game state is a certain change by changing the color of the specific image. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game state suggestion effect is to change whether the pattern of the specific image is changed to a different pattern or to change the specific image to a stereoscopic image (3D) to indicate whether the current game state is a definite change or not. May be Alternatively, the color or size of the countdown display described above, that is, the display mode of the countdown display may indicate whether the current gaming state is a definite change. In the above embodiment, the specific image is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, but the display position of the specific image may be arbitrary, and the display position of the specific image may be changed, or the specific image may be changed. May be moved. Furthermore, the high probability suggestion by the specific image may be continued until the next jackpot, or may be continued until the number of times of special feature fluctuation thereafter reaches a predetermined number.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the effect mode exemplifies what has "mountain" or "tree" as a motif, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect mode may have various characters as a motif. Then, in this case, the specific image that changes in accordance with the effect mode may be displayed as an image of the character.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, a plurality of selection images are displayed during execution of the jackpot game, and after the button effect, the game after the jackpot game is performed by the selection image selected from the plurality. Although the state is suggested, in this case, a plurality of selected images may be sequentially lit and displayed, and the selected image may be selected at the timing when the player operates the effect button 63. Alternatively, a plurality of selected images may be rotated and displayed, and the selected image at the selected position may be selected at the timing when the player operates the effect button 63. In this way, it is possible for the player to manually select and select a desired selection image desired by the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, the expected degree suggestion image displayed (selected) by the gaming state suggestion effect during the execution of the jackpot is an internal jackpot type (the jackpot is a probability variation) However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the expectation degree suggestion image is a button effect performed immediately before the game state suggestion effect, whether or not the player has operated the effect button 63 as instructed by the operation instruction (of the operation instruction of the player operation 63 button operation The degree of achievement (hereinafter also referred to as “the degree of achievement of button operation”) may be determined. Alternatively, the expectation degree suggestion image may be determined in consideration of the internal jackpot type and the player's button operation achievement degree in the button effect. In this way, the player can technically intervene by himself / herself to display a higher expectation degree suggestion image. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, the player selects one of the selection characters CRA and CRB in the character selection effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the character selection effect, one of three or more characters may be selected. When a character is selected in the character selection effect, a predetermined speech may be displayed or uttered, and the jackpot expectation may be changed according to the type of the displayed or uttered speech.

[Modification 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, in the selected image display effect, the selected images SG1, SG2, SG3 and SG4 are displayed, but the number of selected images and the display position are particularly limited. It may be optional. Further, as shown in FIG. 108, in the button effect, five button images BOG are displayed, but the number of button images BOG is not particularly limited, and may be arbitrary.

[Modification 10]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 to 107, the time saving game is started when the big hit game is over, and the time saving game is performed when the variation (time reduction number of times) of the special symbol is performed 100 times in this short game. End, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the time reduction number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 30 times, 50 times), an effect (for example, battle effect) on whether the time reduction number is increased a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) may be performed. Good. Alternatively, when the time reduction number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), an effect (for example, a battle effect) may be performed as to whether or not the time reduction number is continued until the next jackpot. Furthermore, when the number of time reductions reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times), an effect (for example, battle effect) may be performed to indicate whether or not to indicate a definite change confirmation.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E1-1]
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
Symbol display means capable of displaying variable display of symbols;
A jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game when the symbol variably displayed by the symbol display means is a jackpot symbol,
Time-saving game changing means for changing the gaming state after the jackpot game executed by the jackpot game execution means to a time-saving game,
A gaming machine equipped with
In the time saving game, there is a low probability time and a short probability that the probability of becoming the big win is the first normal probability, and a high probability time and a short that the second probability is higher than the first probability,
When the short time game is over, in the low probability time short, the gaming state becomes a low probability low base normal state, and in the high probability time short, the gaming state hides a probability change that is apparently difficult to distinguish from the normal state It becomes a high probability low base latent certainty state,
The display means can execute a first effect display as one of the plurality of effect displays.
The first effect display performs a game state suggestive effect that indicates whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent probability change state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied after the short time game ends.
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect E1-2]
The establishment of the predetermined condition is when the variable display of the symbol is performed a predetermined number of times by the symbol display means,
The display means can execute a second effect display as one effect display among the plurality of effect displays,
The second effect display performs a countdown display for each fluctuation of the symbol until the fluctuation display of the symbol reaches a predetermined number of times after the time saving game is ended.
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1, characterized in that
[Aspect E1-3]
The display means can execute a third effect display as one of the plurality of effect displays.
The third effect display is an effect display that displays a specific image that changes according to the effect mode,
The gaming state suggestion effect suggests whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent probability state by differentiating the display mode of the specific image between when the gaming state is the normal state and when the latent state is the latent state. ,
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1 or aspect E1-2 characterized in that.
[Aspect E1-4]
The display means can execute a fourth effect display as one of the plurality of effect displays.
The fourth effect display is an effect display performed during the execution of the big hit game by the big hit game execution means, and displays a plurality of selection images that indicate the gaming state after the big hit game, and the plurality of selected images Suggesting the degree of expectation of gaming state after the jackpot game by the selected image selected from among,
A game machine according to any one of modes E1-1 to E1-3, characterized in that
[Aspect E1-5]
Equipped with an effect button that can be operated by the player,
The display means can execute a fifth effect display as one of the plurality of effect displays.
The fifth effect display is an effect display performed during the execution of the big hit game by the big hit game execution means, and displays a plurality of characters selectable by the player, and the character selected from among the plurality of characters Depending on the operation of the effect button performs different button effects, suggesting the gaming state after the jackpot game after the end of the button effect,
A game machine according to any one of modes E1-1 to E1-4, characterized in that

  The meter effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 109 to 112. This meter effect can be performed, for example, during the change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction for executing the meter effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. It is an effect of displaying an image.

[Meter effect A]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect A. The light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7 a, but the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when describing the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. The first movable part 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect), but the illustration is omitted. The second movable part 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (the first mode), but in the case other than when the front movable position of the display screen 7a is advanced (the second mode) Illustration is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (A), in the meter effect A, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R. During this variation effect, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of graduations (here, nine) are vertically arranged, and is used at the time of battle effect described later. The meter image MT and the variable display can be viewed through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown to FIG. 109 (B), reach is formed in a decoration pattern. Also at this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. After reach is formed in the decorative symbol, the display of the decorative symbol disappears, and the battle effect is started. The battle effect is one of the special reach effects, and an event in which the outcome is determined is carried out, and by reporting the result of the event, whether the decorative symbol in the variable display becomes a big hit symbol or a lost symbol It is an indication to suggest. As an event in which the outcome is determined, an effect in which a plurality of characters duel as in this embodiment is raised. In this case, whether or not a jackpot has occurred can be informed depending on whether a specific character (for example, an ally character) wins or loses (result of an event) in a duel. As an event in which the outcome is determined, there can be exemplified the success or failure of a specific mission (tree climbing, block stacking, etc.), the roulette success or failure, the winning or losing of a playing card or Janken, and the like. Here, in addition to the effect representing the event itself, the battle effect includes the pre-stage effect and the post-stage effect performed before and after the effect. Here, as the battle effect, an effect in which the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA face each other is displayed.

  In the battle effect, first, an enemy character determination effect for specifying the opponent of the teammate character CRA is executed as the pre-effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 109 (C), the still image TK of the enemy character to be the opponent and the still image MK of the teammate character are displayed side by side. The meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (D), a battle start suggestion effect is executed as a continuation of the pre-stage effect. Here, a battle start suggestion image BKS represented as "battle start !!!" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109E, when the ally character CRA is displayed alone as a continuation of the pre-stage effect, a meter image movement effect is performed. Specifically, when the ally character CRA takes a posture to be in a position before the duel, the meter image MT moves rightward from the first position and stops at the predetermined position (second position). In this way, when the battle is finally started, that is, when the meter image MT is required, the meter image MT moves toward the center from the left side of the display screen 7a, thereby making the player feel tense. Can be given. This makes it possible to improve the interest. As described above, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions at the time of the change production of the decorative symbol and at the time of the battle production. In addition, it moves from the first position to the second position at the time of battle rendition. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, the player can be surprised and surprised.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109F, a meter filling effect is performed in which the meter is gradually filled during the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA. Here, the meter image MT has a plurality of graduations (here, nine), and when all is filled (if all nine colors change), the ally character CRA wins the enemy character CRB, The success or failure of the meter full fill indicates the outcome. During the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA, as shown in FIG. 109 (G), a button image BTN representing the shape of the effect button 63, an operation expiration date image representing the expiration date of the button operation, A continuous hit suggestion image represented as "continuous hit !!!" is displayed. Thereafter, when the meter is full, as shown in FIG. 109H, the meter image MT switches to a full image MXG representing “MAX !!!”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (I), the jackpot decision suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, first, the second movable part 15 moves downward (second aspect) and rotates at that position. The light guide plate 17 randomly displays the smile image SL at a plurality of positions of the light guide plate 17. After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (J), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

[Meter effect B]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect B. The light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7 a, but the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when describing the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. In addition, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retraction position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four light transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each have an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be viewed and a state in which the image is difficult to view. The second movable part 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (the first mode), but in the case other than when the front movable position of the display screen 7a is advanced (the second mode) Illustration is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (A), in the meter effect B, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R. During this variation effect, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of graduations (here, nine) are vertically arranged, and is used at the time of battle effect described later. The meter image MT and the variable display can be viewed through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown to FIG. 110 (B), reach is formed in a decoration pattern. Also at this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. After reach is formed in the decorative symbol, the display of the decorative symbol disappears, and the battle effect is started. The battle effect is one of the special reach effects, and an event in which the outcome is determined is carried out, and by reporting the result of the event, whether the decorative symbol in the variable display becomes a big hit symbol or a lost symbol It is an indication to suggest. As an event in which the outcome is determined, an effect in which a plurality of characters duel as in this embodiment is raised. In this case, whether or not a jackpot has occurred can be informed depending on whether a specific character (for example, an ally character) wins or loses (result of an event) in a duel. As an event in which the outcome is determined, there can be exemplified the success or failure of a specific mission (tree climbing, block stacking, etc.), the roulette success or failure, the winning or losing of a playing card or Janken, and the like. Here, in addition to the effect representing the event itself, the battle effect includes the pre-stage effect and the post-stage effect performed before and after the effect. Here, as the battle effect, an effect in which the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA face each other is displayed.

  In the battle effect, firstly, as shown in FIG. 110 (C), the advance movement effect of the first movable role object 14 is executed as a pre-effect. That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, on the display screen 7a, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position, and the button image BTN and the operation suggesting image SSE represented as "press !!!" are displayed. . At this time, an enemy character determination effect may also be executed to specify the opponent of the teammate character CRA. Specifically, four enemy character images may be displayed corresponding to the four transmissive members, and one enemy character image may be displayed on one transmissive member. As a result, each enemy character image appears to be displayed on a member having four transparency when viewed from the player. The background color of the four enemy characters may be changed sequentially by the roulette method, the roulette may be stopped by the player operating the effect button 63, and one enemy character may be selected. After that, the withdrawal movement effect of the first movable combination 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a from the state in which the four transparent members cover the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in the direction away from each other.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (D), a battle start suggestion effect is executed as a continuation of the pre-stage effect. Here, a battle start suggestion image BKS represented as "battle start !!!" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110E, when the ally character CRA is displayed alone as a continuation of the pre-stage effect, a meter image movement effect is performed. Specifically, when the ally character CRA takes a posture to be in a position before the duel, the meter image MT moves rightward from the first position and stops at the predetermined position (second position). In this way, when the battle is finally started, that is, when the meter image MT is required, the meter image MT moves toward the center from the left side of the display screen 7a, thereby making the player feel tense. Can be given. This makes it possible to improve the interest. As described above, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions at the time of the change production of the decorative symbol and at the time of the battle production. In addition, it moves from the first position to the second position at the time of battle rendition. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, the player can be surprised and surprised.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110F, a meter filling effect is performed in which the meter is gradually filled during the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA. Here, the meter image MT has a plurality of graduations (here, nine), and when all is filled (if all nine colors change), the ally character CRA wins the enemy character CRB, The success or failure of the meter full fill indicates the outcome. During the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA, as shown in FIG. 110 (G), a button image BTN representing the shape of the effect button 63, and an operation expiration date image TBI representing the expiration date of the button operation. , And a continuous hitting suggestion image RND represented as "continuous hitting !!!" is displayed. After that, when the meter is full, as shown in FIG. 110H, the meter image MT switches to a full image MXG representing “MAX !!!”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (I), the jackpot decision suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, the advancing movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed first. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in a direction approaching each other. Then, the second movable part 15 moves downward (second aspect) and rotates at that position. The light guide plate 17 randomly displays the smile image SL at a plurality of positions of the light guide plate 17. As a result, it is possible to perform complicated effects by a plurality of smile images, and to improve the interest. After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (J), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

[Meter production C]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect C. The light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7 a, but the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when describing the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. In addition, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retraction position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four light transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each have an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be viewed and a state in which the image is difficult to view. The second movable part 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (the first mode), but in the case other than when the front movable position of the display screen 7a is advanced (the second mode) Illustration is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (A), in the meter effect C, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R. During this variation effect, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of graduations (here, nine) are vertically arranged, and is used at the time of battle effect described later. The meter image MT and the variable display can be viewed through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown to FIG. 111 (B), reach is formed in a decoration pattern. At this time, the meter image MT moves rightward from the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a and is displayed at the second position in the center of the display screen 7a. After reach is formed in the decorative symbol, the display of the decorative symbol disappears, and the battle effect is started. The battle effect is one of the special reach effects, and an event in which the outcome is determined is carried out, and by reporting the result of the event, whether the decorative symbol in the variable display becomes a big hit symbol or a lost symbol It is an indication to suggest. As an event in which the outcome is determined, an effect in which a plurality of characters duel as in this embodiment is raised. In this case, whether or not a jackpot has occurred can be informed depending on whether a specific character (for example, an ally character) wins or loses (result of an event) in a duel. As an event in which the outcome is determined, there can be exemplified the success or failure of a specific mission (tree climbing, block stacking, etc.), the roulette success or failure, the winning or losing of a playing card or Janken, and the like. Here, in addition to the effect representing the event itself, the battle effect includes the pre-stage effect and the post-stage effect performed before and after the effect. Here, as the battle effect, an effect in which the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA face each other is displayed.

  In the battle effect, first, as the pre-effect, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), the advance effect of the second movable role object 15 is executed. That is, the second movable part 15 moves downward and rotates in front of the display screen 7a. At least a part of the meter image MT becomes difficult to visually recognize by the second movable role item 15. Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), a battle start suggestion effect is executed as a continuation of the pre-stage effect. Here, a battle start suggestion image BKS represented as "battle start !!!" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the second position in the center of the display screen 7a, and is partially overlapped with the start suggestion image BKS.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111E, when the ally character CRA is displayed alone as a continuation of the pre-stage effect, a meter image re-movement effect is performed. Specifically, when the ally character CRA takes a posture to be in a position before the duel, the meter image MT moves leftward from the second position and stops at a predetermined position (third position). In this manner, when the battle is finally started, that is, when the meter image MT is required, the meter image MT moves toward the left from the center of the display screen 7a, causing tension to the player. Can give a feeling. This makes it possible to improve the interest. As described above, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions at the time of the change production of the decorative symbol and at the time of the battle production. In addition, it moves from the second position to the third position at the time of battle rendition. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, the player can be surprised and surprised.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111F, a meter filling effect is performed in which the meter is gradually filled during the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA. Here, the meter image MT has a plurality of graduations (here, nine), and when all is filled (if all nine colors change), the ally character CRA wins the enemy character CRB, The success or failure of the meter full fill indicates the outcome. During the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA, as shown in FIG. 111 (G), a button image BTN representing the shape of the effect button 63 and an operation expiration date image TBI indicating the expiration date of the button operation. , And a continuous hitting suggestion image RND represented as "continuous hitting !!!" is displayed. After that, when the meter is full, as shown in FIG. 111 (H), the meter image MT switches to the full image MXG representing “MAX !!!”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (I), the jackpot decision suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, the advancing movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed first. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in a direction approaching each other. Then, the second movable part 15 moves downward (second aspect) and rotates at that position. The light guide plate 17 randomly displays the smile image SL at a plurality of positions of the light guide plate 17. As a result, it is possible to perform complicated effects by a plurality of smile images, and to improve the interest. After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (J), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

[Meter production D]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect D. In the meter effects A to C in FIGS. 109 to 111, the meter effect D represents the subsequent effects when the battle is lost. Like the meter effects A to C in FIGS. 109 to 111, the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, but the illustration is omitted. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. Further, although the first movable combination 14 is retracted at the retraction position, illustration is omitted. In the first movable part 14, four transmissive members are respectively located at four corners of the display screen 7a. The second movable part 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first aspect), but the illustration is omitted.

  FIG. 112 (A) corresponds to FIG. 109 (F), FIG. 110 (F) and FIG. 111 (F) in the meter effects A to C in FIG. 109 to FIG. That is, a meter filling effect is performed in which the meter is gradually filled during the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA. The meter image MT has a plurality of graduations (here, nine), and when all is filled (if all nine colors change), the ally character CRA fills the meter completely in order to beat the enemy character CRB. Success or failure suggests a win or loss. Here, the meter can not be full for a predetermined period, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (B), a defeat effect is executed in which the teammate character CRA loses the enemy character CRB. After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (C), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode. At this time, the ally character CRA in a lost state is also displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (D), the meter image MT is re-displayed in a state where the decorative symbol is continuously stopped and displayed in the lost mode. At this time, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 112E, the next variation display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 112 (F), when reach is formed in the decorative symbol, then, as shown in FIG. 112 (G), the decorative symbol disappearing effect is performed in which the decorative symbol disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, a meter image movement effect is performed at the same time. Specifically, when the decorative symbol disappears from the display screen 7a, the meter image MT moves rightward from the first position and stops at the predetermined position (second position). In this manner, when the special reach effect is finally started, the meter image MT can move from the left side to the center of the display screen 7a to give the player a sense of tension. This makes it possible to improve the interest. As described above, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions at the time of the variation design of the decorative symbol and at the time of the special reach production. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, the player can be surprised and surprised. The timing at which the meter image MT moves may be the same as or different from the timing at which the decorative symbol disappears from the display screen 7a. The meter image MT may move earlier than the disappearance of the decorative symbol, or may move after the extinction of the decorative symbol.

  As shown in the next FIG. 112 (H), a battle start suggestion effect is executed as a prestage effect of the battle effect. This battle start suggestion effect corresponds to FIG. 109 (D), FIG. 110 (D) and FIG. 111 (D) in the meter effects A to C in FIG. 109 to FIG. However, the difference is that the meter image MT has already moved to the second position. Thereafter, the stage effect of the battle effect shown in FIG. 109 (E), FIG. 110 (E) and FIG. 111 (E), and the effect during battle shown in FIG. 109 (F), FIG. 110 (F) and FIG. Is executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (I), the meter is fully filled, and a victory effect in which the teammate character CRA beats the enemy character CRB is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (J), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of meter production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109 (A) and (B), after the first effect in which the meter image MT is displayed during the change effect of the decorative symbol, and after the first effect, FIG. As shown in 109 (D) to (G), in a state where the meter image is displayed, it is possible to execute a second effect in which a battle effect is performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109 (D) to (G) and FIGS. 111 (A) to (B), the meter image MT is at least one of the first effect and the second effect. Are displayed at mutually different positions. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109 (A), the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the display screen 7a in the first effect, as shown in FIG. 109 (E). In the second effect, the meter image MT moves from the first position on the display screen 7a to the second position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109 (B) to (C), the meter image MT is continuously displayed while shifting from the first effect to the second effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, the battle effect includes an effect in which the meter image MT is switched to another image (for example, the full image MXG). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, the first movable role object 14 is provided, and at the time of transition from the first effect to the second effect, at least a part of the meter image MT is It is possible to execute a fourth effect in which the transparent portion of the first movable character 14 is covered. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of meter production is shown.
[Modification 1]
The meter image MT illustrated in FIGS. 109 to 112 is an example thereof, and the configuration of the meter image MT is not limited to the above. For example, the meter image MT may have a circular shape, such as a car meter, or may be an image that digitally displays numbers. Further, a plurality of meter images MT may be displayed. For example, the remaining energy of each of the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA may be represented. In addition, the meter image MT may be disposed at a position other than the above-described position, or may move in a direction other than the above-described direction.

[Modification 2]
The contents of each of the meter effects in FIGS. 109 to 112 may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the meter effect A of FIG. 109, the effect of the first movable combination 14 covering the display screen 7a may be performed as shown in FIG. 110C at the time of the effects of FIGS. .
[Modification 3]
In FIG. 109 to FIG. 112, in addition to the effect representing the event itself that determines the outcome, the battle effect includes the pre-stage effect and the post-stage effect performed before and after the effect. However, the battle rendition represents the event itself that determines the outcome, and may be interpreted as excluding the preceding rendition and the second rendition before and after that.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of types of images is a meter image used during battle production,
A first effect in which the meter image is displayed during a change effect of the decorative symbol;
It is possible to execute a second effect in which the battle effect is executed in a state where the meter image is displayed after the first effect.
[Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1,
The gaming machine, wherein the meter image is displayed at different positions in at least one of the first effect and the second effect.
[Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-2,
In the first effect, the meter image is displayed at a first position of the display means,
In the second effect, the meter image moves from the first position to the second position of the display unit.
[Aspect E1-4]
A game machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the meter image is continuously displayed while shifting from the first effect to the second effect.
態 様 [Aspect E1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-4,
In the battle effect, an effect in which the meter image is switched to another image is included.
態 様 [Aspect E1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-5 further includes
Equipped with movable parts,
It is possible to execute a fourth effect in which at least a part of the meter image is covered by the movable role when shifting from the first effect to the second effect.

  The related image display effects A to D will be described below using FIGS. The related image display effect may be performed, for example, during the change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction for executing the related image display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen is displayed. It is an effect of displaying an image on 7a.

[Related image display effect A]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for describing the related image display effect A. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the illustration is omitted. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. The first movable part 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect), but the illustration is omitted. The second movable part 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first aspect), but the illustration is omitted. Here, it is an effect in the high probability time short state game “OARO rush” which is started after the end of the jackpot game, and it is explained that the player strikes the right and wins the special 2 prize.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (A), in the related image display effect A, a high probability time short game start suggestion image KJS represented as "OARO rush start !!" on the display screen 7a after the big hit game is over, and a right strike suggestion The image MGU is displayed. Thereafter, a character selection screen shown in FIG. 113 (B) is displayed. The character selection screen is a screen for the player to select one character from among a plurality of characters, and effects related to the selected character are executed at the high probability time short game (OARO rush) starting from this time. Here, although a human face image is used as an example of a character, it is not limited to this but an arbitrary target can be adopted as a character. For example, the character can target real or fantasy creatures and objects as well as characters, figures, symbols, landscapes, and the like. Here, the plurality of character images represent different objects (people). In the character selection screen, a list image ICH in which a plurality of character images are lined up, a button image BTN representing the effect button 63, a select image SEL representing the select button 68, and the character currently selected and selected are displayed enlarged. The enlarged image KUD, the selection prompting image SES expressed as “character selection !!”, and the right hitting suggestion image MGU are included.

  In the list image ICH, a plurality of character images (here, four character images) which are candidates for selectable characters are arranged in a horizontal row. Then, among the plurality of character images, the character image in the currently selected state (during selection) is displayed larger than the other character images. Further, the character image is displayed so as to be smaller as the character image is farther from the character image being selected. That is, the character images on both sides of the character image being selected are displayed so as to be the second largest, and the adjacent character images outside the third are the third largest. In response to the player's operation of the select button 68, the character image being selected is switched. FIGS. 113B to 113D show that the character image being selected is sequentially switched to the right image by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice. .

  The enlarged image KUD is an image in which the character image in the currently selected state (during selection) is enlarged and displayed in the list image ICH. In response to the player's operation of the select button 68, the character represented by the enlarged image KUD is switched. FIGS. 113 (B) to 113 (D) show that the characters represented by the enlarged image KUD are sequentially switched by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice. In the select image SEL representing the select button 68, the color of the image corresponding to the operated button changes in response to the player's operation of the select button 68. The button image BTN changes in color in response to the player's operation of the effect button 63. The effect button 63 is operated when it is decided to adopt the character being selected. The selection promotion image SES is displayed below the display screen 7a, and a part thereof is covered by the button image BTN. In other words, the button image BTN is displayed so as to overlap the selection prompting image SES.

  When one of the plurality of characters is selected (adopted) by operating the effect button 63, an adoption determination screen shown in FIG. 113E is displayed. The adoption determination screen displays a determination notification image KHG notifying that the selection of one character is completed, an enlarged image KUD in which the selected character is enlarged and displayed, and a background image HKG in which the selected character is displayed. Be done. On the adoption determination screen, a selection prompting image SES represented as “character selection !!” and a right-handed suggestion image MGU are continuously displayed. The determination notification image KHG represents the characters “decision” and covers the selection promotion image SES represented as “character selection !!”. Thereby, the player can easily judge visually that the selection of the character is completed. Since the enlarged image KUD covers the selection prompting image SES represented as “character select !!” after selecting the character, it is possible to visually judge that the character has been selected more easily. Further, since the selected character is displayed superimposed on the enlarged image KUD and the background image HKG, it is possible to give a visually complicated impression, and to improve the interest. In addition, since the name of the selected character (here, “sunglass man”) is displayed after the selection, it is possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration that the character has been selected.

  After the character is selected, as shown in FIG. 113 (F), in the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R. During this variation effect, the display screen 7a displays a background image HKG of the selected character and an icon image ICN representing the selected character. The background image HKG is an animation image that changes as the character moves, and a part of the decorative symbol in the variable display is displayed overlapping the background image HKG. The icon image ICN representing the selected character is displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a, and indicates the character selected for the player. A meter image MT is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of graduations (here, nine) are vertically arranged, and is used at the time of battle effect described later. The background image HKG, the icon image ICN, the meter image MT, and the variable display can be viewed through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (G), a reach is formed in the decorative pattern. Also at this time, the background image HKG, the icon image ICN, and the meter image MT are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. After reach is formed in the decorative symbol, the display of the decorative symbol disappears, and the battle effect is started. The battle effect is one of the special reach effects, and an event in which the outcome is determined is carried out, and by reporting the result of the event, whether the decorative symbol in the variable display becomes a big hit symbol or a lost symbol It is an indication to suggest. As an event in which the outcome is determined, an effect in which a plurality of characters face each other as in this embodiment is raised. In this case, it can be informed whether or not the jackpot has occurred depending on whether a particular character (for example, the selected character) wins or loses (result of the event) in the confrontation. As an event in which the outcome is determined, there can be exemplified the success or failure of a specific mission (tree climbing, block stacking, etc.), the roulette success or failure, the winning or losing of a playing card or Janken, and the like. Here, in addition to the effect representing the event itself, the battle effect includes the pre-stage effect and the post-stage effect performed before and after the effect. Here, as the battle effect, an effect in which the selected character faces another character is displayed.

  In the battle effect, first, an opponent determination effect for identifying an opponent of the selected character is executed as a pre-effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 113 (H), the still image MK of the selected character and the still image TK of the character to be the opponent are displayed side by side. Thereafter, a battle start suggestion image BKS represented as "battle start !!!" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, and the meter image MT on the left side of the display screen 7a moves in the right direction. That is, when the meter image MT is finally required, the meter image MT can be moved toward the center from the left side of the display screen 7a to give the player a sense of tension. This makes it possible to improve the interest. As described above, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions at the time of the variation design of the decorative symbol and at the time of the special reach production. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, the player can be surprised and surprised. The meter image MT has a plurality of graduations (here nine), and when all is filled (when all nine colors change), the selected character wins the opponent, so the meter is full Success or failure is suggested by success or failure.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (I), when the meter is full, an effect that the selected character wins is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 113 (J), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

[Related image display effect B]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for describing the related image display effect B.
Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the illustration is omitted. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. The first movable part 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect), but the illustration is omitted. The second movable part 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first aspect), but the illustration is omitted. Here, it is an effect in a high probability time short state game "Alphabet Rush" which is started after the end of the jackpot game, and it is explained that the player is aiming for the special 2 winning by hitting the right.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (A), in the related image display effect B, a high probability time short game start suggestion image KJS represented as “alphabet rush start !!” on the display screen 7a after the jackpot game is over, and a right-handed suggestion The image MGU is displayed. Thereafter, a character selection screen shown in FIG. 114 (B) is displayed. The character selection screen is a screen for the player to select one character from among a plurality of characters, and effects related to the selected character are executed at the time of high probability short game (alphabet rush) starting from now. Here, the upper case alphabet is used as an example of the character, but the invention is not limited to this and any target can be adopted as the character. For example, the character can target real or fantasy creatures and objects as well as characters, figures, symbols, landscapes, and the like. The character selection screen includes a list image ICH in which a plurality of character images (alphabetical images) are arranged, a button image BTN representing the effect button 63, a select image SEL representing the select button 68, and the currently selected and selected character. The enlarged image KUD in which the (alphabet) is enlarged and displayed, the selection promoting image SES represented as “select the alphabet!”, And the right hitting suggestion image MGU are included.

  In the list image ICH, a plurality of character images (here, four alphabet images) which are candidates for selectable characters (alphabets) are arranged in a horizontal row. Then, an arrow is displayed above the character image in the currently selected state (during selection) among the plurality of character images. The arrow moves in accordance with the operation of the select button 68 by the player, and the character image to be selected is switched. In FIGS. 114 (B) to 114 (D), when the “right” button of the select button 68 is pressed twice, the character images (alphabets) selected by the arrows are sequentially switched to the right image. It is shown.

  The enlarged image KUD is an image in which the character image (alphabet) in the currently selected state (during selection) is enlarged and displayed in the list image ICH. In response to the player's operation of the select button 68, the alphabet represented by the enlarged image KUD is switched. FIGS. 114 (B) to 114 (D) show that the alphabet represented by the enlarged image KUD is sequentially switched by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice. In the select image SEL representing the select button 68, the color of the image corresponding to the operated button changes in response to the player's operation of the select button 68. The button image BTN changes in color in response to the player's operation of the effect button 63. The effect button 63 is operated when it is decided to adopt the selected alphabet. The selection promotion image SES is displayed below the display screen 7a, and a part thereof is covered by the button image BTN.

  When one character (alphabet) is selected (adopted) from the plurality of characters (alphabets) by operating the effect button 63, an adoption determination screen shown in FIG. 114E is displayed. The adoption determination screen displays a determination notification image KHG notifying that one alphabet is selected, a magnified image KUD in which the selected alphabet is enlarged and displayed, and a background image HKG in which the selected alphabet is displayed. Ru. In the adoption determination screen, a selection prompting image SES represented as “select an alphabet!” And a right-handed suggestion image MGU are continuously displayed. The determination notification image KHG represents the characters “decision” and covers the selection promotion image SES represented as “select the alphabet!”. Thereby, the player can easily judge visually that the selection of the character (alphabet) is completed. Since the enlarged image KUD covers the selection prompting image SES represented as “select alphabet” after selecting the alphabet, it can be visually judged more easily that the character (alphabet) is selected. In addition, since the selected character (alphabet) is displayed superimposed on the enlarged image KUD and the background image HKG, it is possible to give a visually complicated impression, and to improve the interest.

  After the character is selected, as shown in FIG. 114 (F), in the display screen 7a, a decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R. During this variation effect, the display screen 7a displays a background image HKG of the selected character (alphabet) and an icon image ICN representing the selected character. The background image HKG is an animation image that changes as the character moves, and a part of the decorative symbol in the variable display is displayed overlapping the background image HKG. The icon image ICN representing the selected character is displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a, and indicates the character selected for the player. The background image HKG, the icon image ICN, and the variable display can be viewed through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (G), reach is formed in the decorative pattern. Also at this time, the background image HKG and the icon image ICN are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. After reach is formed in the decorative symbol, the display of the decorative symbol disappears, and the battle effect is started. The battle effect is one of the special reach effects, and an event in which the outcome is determined is carried out, and by reporting the result of the event, whether the decorative symbol in the variable display becomes a big hit symbol or a lost symbol It is an indication to suggest. A roulette effect in which one character is selected from a plurality of characters (alphabets) as in this embodiment is raised as an event in which the outcome is determined. In this case, it can be informed whether or not the jackpot has occurred depending on whether or not a specific alphabet (for example, the selected alphabet) is selected by the roulette (result of the event). Other events that can be determined include victory and loss of fighting and competition, success or failure of a specific mission (tree climbing, block stacking, etc.), winning or losing of Trump or Janken. Here, in addition to the effect representing the event (roulette) itself, the battle effect includes the pre-stage effect and the post-stage effect performed before and after the effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 114 (H), a roulette effect of selecting one from a plurality of selected alphabets is displayed as a battle effect.

  In the battle effect shown in FIG. 114 (H), a battle start suggestion image BKS represented as “Start of roulette!” Is displayed above the center of the display screen 7a and a roulette image RG is displayed first as a stage effect. Ru. The roulette represented by the roulette image RG starts to rotate after being displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (I), an effect of an arrow sticking to the roulette in the opening is performed. Whether or not the jackpot is hit is suggested depending on whether or not this arrow sticks to the selected character (alphabet). As shown in FIG. 114 (H), when the arrow is pierced into the selected character (alphabet), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner as shown in FIG. 114 (J).

[Related image display effect C]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for describing the related image display effect C. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the illustration is omitted. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. The first movable part 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect), but the illustration is omitted. The second movable part 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first aspect), but the illustration is omitted. Here, it is an effect in the high probability time short state game “OARO rush” which is started after the end of the jackpot game, and it is explained that the player strikes the right and wins the special 2 prize.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (A), in the related image display effect A, a high probability time short game start suggestion image KJS represented as "OARO rush start !!" on the display screen 7a after the end of the jackpot game and a right strike suggestion The image MGU is displayed. Thereafter, a character selection screen shown in FIG. 115 (B) is displayed. The character selection screen is a screen for the player to select one character from among a plurality of characters, and effects related to the selected character are executed at the high probability time short game (OARO rush) starting from this time. Here, although a human face image is used as an example of a character, it is not limited to this but an arbitrary target can be adopted as a character. For example, the character can target real or fantasy creatures and objects as well as characters, figures, symbols, landscapes, and the like. In the character selection screen, a list image ICH in which a plurality of character images are lined up, a button image BTN representing the effect button 63, a select image SEL representing the select button 68, and the character currently selected and selected are displayed enlarged. The enlarged image KUD, the selection prompting image SES expressed as “character selection !!”, and the right hitting suggestion image MGU are included.

  In the list image ICH, a plurality of character images (here, four character images) which are candidates for selectable characters are arranged in a horizontal row. Then, among the plurality of character images, the character image in the currently selected state (during selection) is displayed larger than the other character images. Further, the character image is displayed so as to be smaller as the character image is farther from the character image being selected. That is, the character images on both sides of the character image being selected are displayed so as to be the second largest, and the adjacent character images outside the third are the third largest. In response to the player's operation of the select button 68, the character image being selected is switched. FIGS. 115 (B) to 115 (D) show that the character image being selected is sequentially switched to the right image by pressing the "right" button of the select button 68 twice. .

  The enlarged image KUD is an image in which the character image in the currently selected state (during selection) is enlarged and displayed in the list image ICH. In response to the player's operation of the select button 68, the character represented by the enlarged image KUD is switched. FIGS. 115 (B) to 115 (D) show that characters represented by the enlarged image KUD are sequentially switched by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice. In the select image SEL representing the select button 68, the color of the image corresponding to the operated button changes in response to the player's operation of the select button 68. The button image BTN changes in color in response to the player's operation of the effect button 63. The effect button 63 is operated when it is decided to adopt the character being selected. The selection promotion image SES is displayed below the display screen 7a, and a part thereof is covered by the button image BTN.

  When one of the plurality of characters is selected (adopted) by operating the effect button 63, an adoption determination screen shown in FIG. 115E is displayed. The adoption determination screen displays a determination notification image KHG notifying that one character has been selected, a magnified image KUD in which the selected character is displayed in an enlarged manner, and a background image HKG representing the selected character. Is displayed. Here, in the background image HKG, a part (sunglass) of the selected character is represented. The background image HKG may not be a part or all of the selected character itself as long as it is associated with the selected character. In the adoption determination screen, a selection prompting image SES expressed as “character selection !!” and a right-handed suggestion image MGU are continuously displayed. The determination notification image KHG represents the characters “decision” and covers the selection promotion image SES represented as “character selection !!”. Thereby, the player can easily judge visually that the selection of the character is completed. Since the enlarged image KUD covers the selection prompting image SES represented as “character select !!” after selecting the character, it is possible to visually judge that the character has been selected more easily. Further, since the selected character is displayed superimposed on the enlarged image KUD and the background image HKG, it is possible to give a visually complicated impression, and to improve the interest. In addition, since the name of the selected character (here, “sunglass man”) is displayed after the selection, it is possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration that the character has been selected.

  After the character is selected, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), in the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R. During this variation effect, the display screen 7a displays a background image HKG of the selected character and an icon image ICN representing the selected character. The background image HKG is an animation image that changes as the one related to the character moves, and a part of the decorative symbol in the variable display is displayed overlapping the background image HKG. The icon image ICN representing the selected character is displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a, and indicates the character selected for the player. Here, the name of the selected character is shown. A meter image MT is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of graduations (here, nine) are vertically arranged, and is used at the time of battle effect described later. The background image HKG, the icon image ICN, the meter image MT, and the variable display can be viewed through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), a reach is formed in the decorative pattern. Also at this time, the background image HKG, the icon image ICN, and the meter image MT are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. After reach is formed in the decorative symbol, the display of the decorative symbol disappears, and the battle effect is started. The battle effect is one of the special reach effects, and an event in which the outcome is determined is carried out, and by reporting the result of the event, whether the decorative symbol in the variable display becomes a big hit symbol or a lost symbol It is an indication to suggest. As an event in which the outcome is determined, an effect in which a plurality of characters face each other as in this embodiment is raised. In this case, it can be informed whether or not the jackpot has occurred depending on whether a particular character (for example, the selected character) wins or loses (result of the event) in the confrontation. As an event in which the outcome is determined, there can be exemplified the success or failure of a specific mission (tree climbing, block stacking, etc.), the roulette success or failure, the winning or losing of a playing card or Janken, and the like. Here, in addition to the effect representing the event itself, the battle effect includes the pre-stage effect and the post-stage effect performed before and after the effect. Here, as the battle effect, an effect in which the selected character faces another character is displayed.

  In the battle effect, first, an opponent determination effect for identifying an opponent of the selected character is executed as a pre-effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 115 (H), the still image MK of the selected character and the still image TK of the character to be the opponent are displayed side by side. Thereafter, a battle start suggestion image BKS represented as "battle start !!" is displayed above the center of the display screen 7a, and the meter image MT on the left side of the display screen 7a moves in the right direction. That is, when the meter image MT is finally required, the meter image MT can be moved toward the center from the left side of the display screen 7a to give the player a sense of tension. This makes it possible to improve the interest. As described above, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions at the time of the variation design of the decorative symbol and at the time of the special reach production. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, the player can be surprised and surprised. The meter image MT has a plurality of graduations (here nine), and when all is filled (when all nine colors change), the selected character wins the opponent, so the meter is full Success or failure is suggested by success or failure.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (I), when the meter is not full, an effect of defeating the selected character is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 115 (J), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of losing.

[Related image display effect D]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for describing the related image display effect D. The light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7 a, but the illustration of the light guide plate 17 is omitted except when describing the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7 a, and the display screen 7 a can be viewed through the light guide plate 17. In addition, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retraction position (first aspect). That is, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable part 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four light transmissive members are movable light guide plates, and each have an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be viewed and a state in which the image is difficult to view. The second movable part 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (the first mode), but in the case other than when the front movable position of the display screen 7a is advanced (the second mode) Illustration is omitted. Here, it is an effect in the high probability time short state game “OARO rush” which is started after the end of the jackpot game, and it is explained that the player strikes the right and wins the special 2 prize.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (A), in the related image display effect D, a high probability time short game start suggestion image KJS represented as "OARO rush start !!" on the display screen 7a after the end of the jackpot game and a right strike suggestion The image MGU is displayed. Thereafter, a character selection screen shown in FIG. 116 (B) is displayed. The character selection screen is a screen for the player to select one character from among a plurality of characters, and effects related to the selected character are executed at the high probability time short game (OARO rush) starting from this time. Here, although a human face image is used as an example of a character, it is not limited to this but an arbitrary target can be adopted as a character. For example, the character can target real or fantasy creatures and objects as well as characters, figures, symbols, landscapes, and the like. In the character selection screen, a list image ICH in which a plurality of character images are lined up, a button image BTN representing the effect button 63, a select image SEL representing the select button 68, and the character currently selected and selected are displayed enlarged. The enlarged image KUD, the selection prompting image SES expressed as “character selection !!”, and the right hitting suggestion image MGU are included.

  In the list image ICH, a plurality of character images (here, four character images) which are candidates for selectable characters are arranged in a horizontal row. Then, among the plurality of character images, the character image in the currently selected state (during selection) is displayed so as to be positioned above the other character images. In response to the player's operation of the select button 68, the character image being selected is switched. FIGS. 116B and 116C show that the character image being selected is sequentially switched to the right image by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice. .

  The enlarged image KUD is an image in which the character image in the currently selected state (during selection) is enlarged and displayed in the list image ICH. In response to the player's operation of the select button 68, the character represented by the enlarged image KUD is switched. FIGS. 116 (B) and 116 (C) show that the character represented by the enlarged image KUD is sequentially switched by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice. In the select image SEL representing the select button 68, the color of the image corresponding to the operated button changes in response to the player's operation of the select button 68. The button image BTN changes in color in response to the player's operation of the effect button 63. The effect button 63 is operated when it is decided to adopt the character being selected. The selection promotion image SES is displayed below the display screen 7a, and a part thereof is covered by the button image BTN.

  When one character is selected (adopted) from the plurality of characters by operating the effect button 63, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 116D after the character is selected. The decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R. During this variation effect, the display screen 7a displays a background image HKG of the selected character and an icon image ICN representing the selected character. The background image HKG is an animation image that changes as the character moves, and a part of the decorative symbol in the variable display is displayed overlapping the background image HKG. The icon image ICN representing the selected character is displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a, and indicates the character selected for the player. A meter image MT is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of graduations (here, nine) are vertically arranged, and is used at the time of battle effect described later. The background image HKG, the icon image ICN, the meter image MT, and the variable display can be viewed through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (E), a reach is formed in the decorative pattern. Also at this time, the background image HKG, the icon image ICN, and the meter image MT are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. After reach is formed in the decorative symbol, the display of the decorative symbol disappears, and the battle effect is started. The battle effect is one of the special reach effects, and an event in which the outcome is determined is carried out, and by reporting the result of the event, whether the decorative symbol in the variable display becomes a big hit symbol or a lost symbol It is an indication to suggest. As an event in which the outcome is determined, an effect in which a plurality of characters face each other as in this embodiment is raised. In this case, it can be informed whether or not the jackpot has occurred depending on whether a particular character (for example, the selected character) wins or loses (result of the event) in the confrontation. As an event in which the outcome is determined, there can be exemplified the success or failure of a specific mission (tree climbing, block stacking, etc.), the roulette success or failure, the winning or losing of a playing card or Janken, and the like. Here, in addition to the effect representing the event itself, the battle effect includes the pre-stage effect and the post-stage effect performed before and after the effect. Here, as the battle effect, an effect in which the selected character faces another character is displayed.

  In the battle effect, first, an opponent determination effect for identifying an opponent of the selected character is executed as a pre-effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 116F, the still image MK of the selected character and the still image TK of the character to be the opponent are displayed side by side. Thereafter, a battle start suggestion image BKS represented as "battle start !!" is displayed above the center of the display screen 7a, and the meter image MT on the left side of the display screen 7a moves in the right direction. That is, when the meter image MT is finally required, the meter image MT can be moved toward the center from the left side of the display screen 7a to give the player a sense of tension. This makes it possible to improve the interest. As described above, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions at the time of the variation design of the decorative symbol and at the time of the special reach production. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, the player can be surprised and surprised. The meter image MT has a plurality of graduations (here nine), and when all is filled (when all nine colors change), the selected character wins the opponent, so the meter is full Success or failure is suggested by success or failure. During the battle between the selected character and the opponent, as shown in FIG. 116 (G), a button image BTN representing the shape of the effect button 63, an operation expiration image TBI indicating the expiration date of the button operation, and “ A continuous hit suggestion image RND is displayed, which is expressed as “continuous hit !!!”. Thereafter, when the meter is full, as shown in FIG. 116 (H), the meter image MT switches to a full image MXG representing “MAX !!!”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (I), the jackpot decision suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, the advancing movement effect of the first movable role item 14 is executed first. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable part 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four permeable members move in a direction approaching each other. Then, the second movable part 15 moves downward (second aspect) and rotates at that position. The light guide plate 17 randomly displays the smile image SL at a plurality of positions of the light guide plate 17. As a result, it is possible to perform complicated effects by a plurality of smile images, and to improve the interest. After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (J), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of related image display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 (B) to (D), after the first effect in which a plurality of character images representing different objects are displayed and after the first effect, a plurality of When one character image is selected from the character images, a second effect in which a background image HKG and an icon image ICN related to the selected character image are displayed as shown in FIG. It can be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113F, in the second effect, the background image HKG and the icon image ICN having different contents are displayed while being related to the selected character image. Be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113F, one of the images related to the selected character image is the icon image ICN. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113F, one of the images related to the selected character image is the background image HKG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 (B) to (D), in the first effect, it overlaps the selection promoting image SES prompting to select one character image from a plurality of character images. The button image BTN is displayed, and the operation of the effect button 63 changes the selected character image of the plurality of character images to be larger than the other. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, when one character image is selected from a plurality of character images by the operation of the effect button 63, the selection is superimposed on the selection promotion image SES, and the selection is completed. A decision notification image KHG that indicates that is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of related image display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
A plurality of character images shown in FIG. 113 to FIG. 116 respectively show different faces and different alphabets. Thus, "a plurality of character images represent different objects" is not limited to representing different types of faces, cars, characters, etc., but may be the same type. The same kind of object is, for example, the same kind of human face, or different faces of different people, and even different faces, different facial expressions or different faces. If it is an angle thing, it corresponds to a different object.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the related image display effects in FIGS. 113 to 116 may be combined as appropriate, or a part of the contents may not be provided.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
態 様 [Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a target image representing a predetermined target,
A first effect in which a plurality of target images representing different targets are displayed;
After the first effect, when one target image is selected from the plurality of predetermined images, it is possible to execute a second effect in which a related image related to the selected target image is displayed. A game machine that features it.
[Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect E2-1,
In the second effect, a plurality of related images are displayed, each of which is related to the selected target image and different in content from each other.
態 様 [Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-2,
One of the plurality of related images is an icon image associated with the selected target image.
態 様 [Aspect E2-4]
A game machine according to aspect E2-2 or aspect E2-3, wherein
One of the plurality of related images is a background image related to the selected target image.
態 様 [Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-4 further includes
The player is equipped with operation means that can be operated
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image representing the appearance of the operation means,
In the first effect, the operation means image is displayed superimposed on a selection promotion image prompting to select one target image from the plurality of predetermined images,
A game machine characterized in that a target image selected from among the plurality of target images is changed by the operation of the operation means.
態 様 [Aspect E2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-5,
When one target image is selected from the plurality of predetermined images by the operation of the operation means,
A game machine characterized in that a selection completion image indicating that selection has been completed is displayed superimposed on the selection promotion image.

  The battle effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 117 to 120. This battle rendition can be executed during the movement of the special symbol. That is, the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and when the instruction for executing the battle effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103 and displayed. It is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a. This battle effect is performed during one change (one change effect) of the special symbol. In addition, you may make it perform battle production during the several times of fluctuation (a plurality of fluctuation production) of a special symbol.

[Battle production A]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect A.
In battle effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), a battle start suggestion effect is executed. In this battle start suggestion effect, a battle start suggestion display XF1 indicating the start of battle effect is displayed. In the battle start suggestion effect, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is omitted, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. This battle start suggestion effect is executed when the gaming state is a time saving gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (B), a first character selection effect is executed. The first character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and a first area AR1 and a second area AR2 which are divided by the boundary line KL on the display screen 7a are formed. In the first area AR1, the friend character CRA is displayed, and in the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is displayed. In the first character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is smaller than that of the second area AR2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), a second character selection effect is executed. The second character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and the boundary line KL is moved from the first character selection effect. In the first area AR1, the friend character CRA is continuously displayed, and in the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed. In the second character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is larger than that of the second area AR2 due to the movement of the boundary line KL.

  After the second character selection effect, an ally character determination effect described later (FIG. 117 (D)) or an enemy character determination effect (FIG. 117 (F)) is executed.

  After the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 117 (D), the teammate character determination effect may be executed. The ally character determination effect indicates that the character making the first strike attack is determined to be the ally character CRA, and the ally character CRA makes a first strike attack against the enemy character CRB. In the ally character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the second area AR2 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all the areas become the first area AR1. In the first area AR1, the friend character CRA is continuously displayed, and in the case of the first strike, it is shown that the friend character CRA attacks the enemy character CRB.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (E), a battle victory effect is executed. In this battle victory effect, an effect is performed that indicates that the character CRA of the ally is transformed and the enemy character CRB has been won. After that, the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a jackpot notification effect is performed which suggests that a jackpot will be made.

  On the other hand, after the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 117 (F), an enemy character determination effect may be executed. This enemy character determination effect is an effect that indicates that the character to be attacked first is determined to be the enemy character, and the enemy character CRB performs the first strike against the character CRA on the side. In the enemy character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the first area AR1 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all the areas become the second area AR2. In the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed, and in the case of the first strike, it is shown that the enemy character CRB attacks the friend character CRA.

  After the enemy character determination effect, the above-mentioned battle victory effect (FIG. 117 (E)) or a battle defeat effect described later may be executed.

  After the enemy character determination effect, as shown in FIG. 117 (G), a battle defeat effect is executed. In this battle defeat effect, an effect is performed that indicates that the character CRA of the teammate is defeated by the character CRB of the enemy. After that, the out-of-hand pattern array is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and an out-of-focus notification effect is performed which suggests that the out-of-pattern is present.

[Battle production B]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect B.
In the battle effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 118 (A), a battle start suggestion effect is executed. In this battle start suggestion effect, a battle start suggestion display XF1 indicating the start of battle effect is displayed. In the battle start suggestion effect, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is omitted, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. This battle start suggestion effect is executed when the gaming state is a time saving gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (B), a first character selection effect is executed. The first character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and a first area AR1 and a second area AR2 which are divided by the boundary line KL on the display screen 7a are formed. In the first area AR1, the friend character CRA is displayed, and in the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is displayed. The button image BTN is displayed on the boundary line KL. The button image BTN is displayed on the near side of the boundary line KL. The button image BTN is an image for promoting the depression of the effect button 63 to the player. In the first character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is smaller than that of the second area AR2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118C, a second character selection effect is executed. The second character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and the boundary line KL is moved from the first character selection effect. The button image BTN is continuously displayed on the boundary line KL. In this case, the button image BTN moves along with the movement of the boundary line KL. In the first area AR1, the friend character CRA is continuously displayed, and in the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed. In the second character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is larger than that of the second area AR2 due to the movement of the boundary line KL.

  After the second character selection effect, an ally character determination effect described later (FIG. 118 (D)) or an enemy character determination effect (FIG. 118 (F)) is executed.

  After the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 118 (D), the teammate character determination effect may be executed. The ally character determination effect indicates that the character making the first strike attack is determined to be the ally character CRA, and the ally character CRA makes a first strike attack against the enemy character CRB. In the ally character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the second area AR2 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all the areas become the first area AR1. In the first area AR1, the friend character CRA is continuously displayed, and in the case of the first strike, it is shown that the friend character CRA attacks the enemy character CRB.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118E, a battle victory effect is performed. In this battle victory effect, an effect is performed that indicates that the character CRA of the ally is transformed and the enemy character CRB has been won. After that, the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a jackpot notification effect is performed which suggests that a jackpot will be made.

  On the other hand, after the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 118 (F), an enemy character determination effect may be executed. This enemy character determination effect is an effect that indicates that the character to be attacked first is determined to be the enemy character, and the enemy character CRB performs the first strike against the character CRA on the side. In the enemy character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the first area AR1 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all the areas become the second area AR2. In the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed, and in the case of the first strike, it is shown that the enemy character CRB attacks the friend character CRA.

  After the enemy character determination effect, the above-described battle victory effect (FIG. 118 (E)) or a battle defeat effect described later may be executed.

  After the enemy character determination effect, as shown in FIG. 118 (G), a battle defeat effect is executed. In this battle defeat effect, an effect is performed that indicates that the character CRA of the teammate is defeated by the character CRB of the enemy. After that, the out-of-hand pattern array is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and an out-of-focus notification effect is performed which suggests that the out-of-pattern is present.

[Battle production C]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect C.
In the battle effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), a battle start suggestion effect is executed. In this battle start suggestion effect, a battle start suggestion display XF1 indicating the start of battle effect is displayed. In the battle start suggestion effect, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is omitted, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. This battle start suggestion effect is executed when the gaming state is a time saving gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (B), a first character selection effect is executed. The first character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and a first area AR1 and a second area AR2 which are divided by the boundary line KL on the display screen 7a are formed. In the first area AR1, the friend character CRA is displayed, and in the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is displayed. Further, in the first character selection effect, a button image BTN is displayed. The button image BTN is displayed on the boundary line KL, and in detail, displayed in front of the boundary line KL. The button image BTN is an image for promoting the depression of the effect button 63 to the player. In the first character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is smaller than that of the second area AR2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (C), a second character selection effect is executed. The second character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and the boundary line KL is moved from the first character selection effect. Further, in the second character selection effect, the button image BTN is continuously displayed. In this case, in this case, the button image BTN is at the same position as the first character selection effect, and the button image BTN has not moved. The boundary line KL moves within a certain range of the button image BTN. The present invention is not limited to this, and the boundary line KL may move out of a certain range of the button image BTN. In the first area AR1, the friend character CRA is continuously displayed, and in the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed. In the second character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is larger than that of the second area AR2 due to the movement of the boundary line KL.

  After the second character selection effect, an ally character determination effect described later (FIG. 119 (D)) or an enemy character determination effect (FIG. 119 (F)) is executed.

  After the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 119 (D), the teammate character determination effect may be executed. The ally character determination effect indicates that the character making the first strike attack is determined to be the ally character CRA, and the ally character CRA makes a first strike attack against the enemy character CRB. In the ally character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the second area AR2 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all the areas become the first area AR1. In the first area AR1, the friend character CRA is continuously displayed, and in the case of the first strike, it is shown that the friend character CRA attacks the enemy character CRB.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (E), a battle victory effect is executed. In this battle victory effect, an effect is performed that indicates that the character CRA of the ally is transformed and the enemy character CRB has been won. After that, the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a jackpot notification effect is performed which suggests that a jackpot will be made.

  On the other hand, after the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 119 (F), an enemy character determination effect may be executed. This enemy character determination effect is an effect that indicates that the character to be attacked first is determined to be the enemy character, and the enemy character CRB performs the first strike against the character CRA on the side. In the enemy character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the first area AR1 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all the areas become the second area AR2. In the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed, and in the case of the first strike, it is shown that the enemy character CRB attacks the friend character CRA.

  After the enemy character determination effect, the above-described battle victory effect (FIG. 119 (E)) or a battle defeat effect described later may be executed.

  After the enemy character determination effect, as shown in FIG. 119 (G), a battle defeat effect is executed. In this battle defeat effect, an effect is performed that indicates that the character CRA of the teammate is defeated by the character CRB of the enemy. After that, the out-of-hand pattern array is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and an out-of-focus notification effect is performed which suggests that the out-of-pattern is present.

[Battle production D]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect D.
In the battle effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 120 (A), a battle start suggestion effect is executed. In this battle start suggestion effect, a battle start suggestion display XF1 indicating the start of battle effect is displayed. In the battle start suggestion effect, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is omitted, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. This battle start suggestion effect is executed when the gaming state is a time saving gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), a first character selection effect is executed. The first character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and a first area AR1 and a second area AR2 which are divided by the boundary line KL on the display screen 7a are formed. In the first area AR1, the friend character CRA is displayed, and in the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is displayed. The button image BTN is displayed on the boundary line KL. The button image BTN is displayed on the near side of the boundary line KL. The button image BTN is an image for promoting the depression of the effect button 63 to the player. In the first character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is smaller than that of the second area AR2.

  In addition, a meter image XF2 is displayed as the first character selection effect. The meter image XF2 is displayed at the left end of the display screen 7a and represents a meter value. The meter values of the meter image XF2 are indicated by a cross hatch in the figure. The meter value of the meter image XF2 indicates the jackpot expectation, and the meter value may increase as the area of the first region AR1 increases.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 120C, a second character selection effect is executed. The second character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and the boundary line KL is moved from the first character selection effect. The button image BTN is continuously displayed on the boundary line KL. In this case, the button image BTN moves along with the movement of the boundary line KL. In the first area AR1, the friend character CRA is continuously displayed, and in the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed. In the second character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is larger than that of the second area AR2 due to the movement of the boundary line KL.

  Further, in the second character selection effect, the meter value of the meter image XF2 increases with the expansion of the area of the first region AR1.

  After the second character selection effect, an ally character determination effect described later (FIG. 120 (D)) or an enemy character determination effect (FIG. 120 (F)) is executed.

  After the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 120 (D), the teammate character determination effect may be executed. The ally character determination effect indicates that the character making the first strike attack is determined to be the ally character CRA, and the ally character CRA makes a first strike attack against the enemy character CRB. In the ally character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the second area AR2 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all the areas become the first area AR1. In the first area AR1, the friend character CRA is continuously displayed, and in the case of the first strike, it is shown that the friend character CRA attacks the enemy character CRB.

  In addition, in the ally character determination effect, the meter value of the meter image XF2 is MAX, and it is suggested that the jackpot probability sharply increases, that is, the jackpot is determined.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 120E, a battle victory effect is performed. In this battle victory effect, an effect is performed that indicates that the character CRA of the ally is transformed and the enemy character CRB has been won. After that, the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a jackpot notification effect is performed which suggests that a jackpot will be made.

  On the other hand, after the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 120F, an enemy character determination effect may be executed. This enemy character determination effect is an effect that indicates that the character to be attacked first is determined to be the enemy character, and the enemy character CRB performs the first strike against the character CRA on the side. In the enemy character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the first area AR1 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all the areas become the second area AR2. In the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed, and in the case of the first strike, it is shown that the enemy character CRB attacks the friend character CRA.

  In the enemy character determination effect, the meter value of the meter image XF 2 changes due to the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and rises when the ally character CRA becomes dominant, and the ally character CRA is inferior It does not rise when it becomes.

  After the enemy character determination effect, the above-described battle victory effect (FIG. 120 (E)) or a battle defeat effect described later may be executed.

  After the enemy character determination effect, as shown in FIG. 120 (G), a battle defeat effect is executed. In this battle defeat effect, an effect is performed that indicates that the character CRA of the teammate is defeated by the character CRB of the enemy. After that, the out-of-hand pattern array is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and an out-of-focus notification effect is performed which suggests that the out-of-pattern is present.

  In the battle effect D, if the area of the first area AR1 increases, the meter value of the meter image XF2 increases accordingly, but if the area of the first area AR1 decreases, the meter image XF2 accordingly. The meter value of may be lowered. That is, the meter value of the meter image XF2 may correspond to the enlargement / reduction of the area of the first area AR1.

In the battle effects A to D, other effects (such as other battle effects) may be incorporated as one effect.
In the battle effects A to D, the first character selection effect and the second character selection effect may be repeated.
In the battle effects A to D, the jackpot expectation changes in accordance with the size of the area of the first area AR1 and the area of the second area AR2. That is, in the character determination effect, when the area of the first area AR1 is larger than the area of the second area AR2, the big hit compared to the case where the area of the first area AR1 is smaller than the area of the second area AR2. The configuration has high expectations. That is, the jackpot expectation is suggested based on the area of the first area AR1 (second area AR2).
Furthermore, in the battle effects A to D, the first area AR1 may be easily expanded or difficult depending on the type of character appearing in the first area AR1 or the second area AR2, in other words, the first The jackpot expectation may be changed depending on the type of character appearing in the area AR1 or the second area AR2.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of battle production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the battle effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first area AR1 and the second area AR2 are displayed in the first character selection effect and the second character selection effect, and then the first area AR1 and the second area AR2 are displayed. An effect of changing the area of the area AR2 is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect having a motion by the change of the first area AR1 and the second area AR2, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the above-described battle effects A to D, the jackpot expectation is suggested based on the area of the first area AR1 (second area AR2). According to this configuration, since the jackpot expectation changes with the change of the first area AR1 and the second area AR2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the above-described battle effects A to D, the character CRA is displayed in the first area AR1. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect with movement by the change of the first area AR1 and the second area AR2, and also perform an effect with movement by the movement of the character, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can.

[Effect 4]
In the battle effect D described above, the meter image XF2 is displayed at the time of an effect of changing the area of the first area AR1 (second area AR2) in the first character selection effect and the second character selection effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect with movement by the change of the first area AR1 and the second area AR2, and also perform an effect with movement by the meter value of the meter image XF2, which makes the game interesting It can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the battle effect D described above, in the first character selection effect and the second character selection effect, the size of the area of the first area AR1 (second area AR2) is reflected in the meter value of the meter image XF2. ing. According to this configuration, since the jackpot expectation varies with the meter value of the meter image XF 2 in addition to the size of the first area AR 1, it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement and improve the fun of the game. .

[Effect 6]
In the battle effect D described above, when the area of the first area AR1 is larger than the area of the second area AR2 in the character determination effect, the meter value of the meter image XF2 is MAX, and the area of the first area AR1 is the first When the area of the second region AR2 is smaller than the area of the second region AR2, the meter value of the meter image XF2 is smaller than MAX. According to this configuration, when the area of the first area AR1 is larger than the second area AR2, the meter value of the meter image XF2 becomes MAX, and the jackpot expectation level is increased. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the movement, to give the player a great sensation of excitement, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of battle production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the battle effects A to D of the gaming machine of the above embodiment, the area of the first area AR1 and the second area AR2 is further increased or decreased after the second character selection effect, and the first area AR1 And the second area AR2 may be swayed. Further, after that, the character determination effect may be performed by rendering the areas of the first area AR1 and the second area AR2 the same.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XF-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first display area and a second display area different from the first display area.
The second display effect is an effect of changing the area of the first display area and the area of the second display area,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect and the second display effect.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XF-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-1,
In the combination effect, a jackpot anticipation degree is suggested based on the area of the first display area in the second display effect,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XF-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-2,
In the first display area, a character is displayed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XF-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect of displaying a meter,
The combination effect may include the third display effect.
In the combination effect, when the second display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XF-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-4,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, the size of the area of the first display area of the second display effect is reflected in the meter value of the meter display.

[Aspect XF-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-5,
In the combination effect, the meter value of the meter display when the area of the first display area of the second display effect is larger than the area of the second display area in the third display effect When the area of the first display area of the second display effect is smaller than the area of the second display area, the meter value of the meter display is the first value. A second value smaller than
A game machine characterized by

  The crack effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 121 to 124. This split effect may be performed during the movement of the special symbol. That is, the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and when the instruction for executing the crack effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read out from the ROM 103 and displayed. It is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a. This split effect is performed during one change (one change effect) of the special symbol. In addition, the crack effect may be performed during a plurality of changes (a plurality of change effects) of the special symbol.

[Split production A]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the crack effect A.
In the split effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, in the timer display frequency indication effect, a rush indication display XG1, a winning ball display XG2, a right hitting indication display XG3, and holding icons 9B and 9C are displayed. The rush indication display XG1 is a display that suggests that the player is in a positive change state in favor of the player, or in other words, it is in a rush (during continuous). The winning balls display XG2 is a display that suggests the number of gaming balls that the player has won during the rush (during continuous running). The right strike indication XG3 is a (recommended) prompt asking the player to strike right. The rush indication XG1, the winning ball indication XG2, and the right hitting indication XG3 are displayed above the display screen 7a. The hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), a screen break effect is executed. In this screen break effect, a screen break display GW is displayed that shows how the screen of the display screen 7a is broken. A part of the split screen display GW has reached the rush indication XG1, the winning ball display XG2, the indication XG3, the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C. Accordingly, in the rush indication display XG1, the winning ball display XG2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C, the portion reached by the screen break display GW is displayed as if it were broken (as if it were lost) (Displayed as missing). On the other hand, the right-handed suggestion display XG3 is displayed on the near side of the screen crack display GW and does not appear as if it were broken (as there is a missing portion).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (C), the boundary character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, the character XG4 is displayed on the boundary between the screen crack display GW and the other display (hereinafter also referred to as non-screen crack display) on the display screen 7a. In the example of FIG. 121 (C), this boundary is located on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (D), boundary character appearance effects are executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, the character image XG5 is displayed at the boundary between the screen split display GW and the non-screen split display on the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 is displayed at a boundary different from that of the character XG4. In the example of FIG. 121 (D), this boundary is located on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 represents the character "super heat" which indicates that the jackpot expectation is high.
After this boundary portion character appearance effect, predetermined effects such as the above-described battle effect and super reach effect are executed.

[Split production B]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the crack effect B.
In the split effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 122 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, in the timer display frequency indication effect, a rush indication display XG1, a winning ball display XG2, a right hitting indication display XG3, and holding icons 9B and 9C are displayed. The rush indication display XG1 is a display that suggests that the player is in a positive change state in favor of the player, or in other words, it is in a rush (during continuous). The winning balls display XG2 is a display that suggests the number of gaming balls that the player has won during the rush (during continuous running). The right strike indication XG3 is a (recommended) prompt asking the player to strike right. The rush indication XG1, the winning ball indication XG2, and the right hitting indication XG3 are displayed above the display screen 7a. The hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), a screen break effect is executed. In this screen break effect, a screen break display GW is displayed that shows how the screen of the display screen 7a is broken. A part of the split screen display GW has reached the rush indication XG1, the winning ball display XG2, the indication XG3, the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C. Accordingly, in the rush indication display XG1, the winning ball display XG2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C, the portion reached by the screen break display GW is displayed as if it were broken (as if it were lost) . On the other hand, the right-handed suggestion display XG3 is displayed on the near side of the screen crack display GW and does not appear as if it were broken (as there is a missing portion).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122C, a boundary character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, the character XG4 is displayed on the boundary between the screen crack display GW and the other display (hereinafter also referred to as non-screen crack display) on the display screen 7a. In the example of FIG. 122 (C), this boundary is located on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (D), the boundary character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, the character image XG5 is displayed at the boundary between the screen split display GW and the non-screen split display on the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 is displayed at a boundary different from that of the character XG4. In the example of FIG. 122 (D), this boundary is located on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 represents the character "super heat" which indicates that the jackpot expectation is high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (E), a missing character appearance effect is executed. In this missing portion character appearance effect, the character XG 6 is displayed in the screen break display GW.
Further, in the effect of appearance of the missing portion character, the character XG 4 and the character image XG 5 move in the boundary between the screen break display GW and the non-screen break display.
After this boundary portion character appearance effect, predetermined effects such as the above-described battle effect and super reach effect are executed.

[Split production C]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the crack effect C.
In the split effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 123 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, in the timer display frequency indication effect, a rush indication display XG1, a winning ball display XG2, a right hitting indication display XG3, and holding icons 9B and 9C are displayed. The rush indication display XG1 is a display that suggests that the player is in a positive change state in favor of the player, or in other words, it is in a rush (during continuous). The winning balls display XG2 is a display that suggests the number of gaming balls that the player has won during the rush (during continuous running). The right strike indication XG3 is a (recommended) prompt asking the player to strike right. The rush indication XG1, the winning ball indication XG2, and the right hitting indication XG3 are displayed above the display screen 7a. The hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), a screen break effect is executed. In this screen break effect, a screen break display GW is displayed that shows how the screen of the display screen 7a is broken. A part of the split screen display GW has reached the rush indication XG1, the winning ball display XG2, the indication XG3, the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C. Accordingly, in the rush indication display XG1, the winning ball display XG2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C, the portion reached by the screen break display GW is displayed as if it were broken (as if it were lost) . On the other hand, the right-handed suggestion display XG3 is displayed on the near side of the screen crack display GW and does not appear as if it were broken (as there is a missing portion).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 123C, the boundary character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, the character XG4 is displayed on the boundary between the screen crack display GW and the other display (hereinafter also referred to as non-screen crack display) on the display screen 7a. In the example of FIG. 123 (C), this boundary is located on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (D), boundary character appearance effects are executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, the character image XG5 is displayed at the boundary between the screen split display GW and the non-screen split display on the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 is displayed at a boundary different from that of the character XG4. In the example of FIG. 123 (D), this boundary is located on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 represents the character "super heat" which indicates that the jackpot expectation is high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (E), the missing character appearance effect is executed. In this missing portion character appearance effect, the character image XG7 is displayed in the screen crack display GW. This character image XG7 indicates that the characters "Oh !?" are displayed, and may indicate that it may be a jackpot.
Further, in the missing part character appearance effect, the character XG4 or the character image XG5 is moved at the boundary between the screen break display GW and the non-screen break display.
After this boundary portion character appearance effect, predetermined effects such as the above-described battle effect and super reach effect are executed.

[Split production D]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the crack effect D.
In the split effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, in the timer display frequency indication effect, a rush indication display XG1, a winning ball display XG2, a right hitting indication display XG3, and holding icons 9B and 9C are displayed. The rush indication display XG1 is a display that suggests that the player is in a positive change state in favor of the player, or in other words, it is in a rush (during continuous). The winning balls display XG2 is a display that suggests the number of gaming balls that the player has won during the rush (during continuous running). The right strike indication XG3 is a (recommended) prompt asking the player to strike right. The rush indication XG1, the winning ball indication XG2, and the right hitting indication XG3 are displayed above the display screen 7a. The hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (B), a screen break effect is executed. In this screen break effect, a screen break display GW is displayed that shows how the screen of the display screen 7a is broken. A part of the split screen display GW has reached the rush indication XG1, the winning ball display XG2, the indication XG3, the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C. Accordingly, in the rush indication display XG1, the winning ball display XG2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C, the portion reached by the screen break display GW is displayed as if it were broken (as if it were lost) . On the other hand, the right-handed suggestion display XG3 is displayed on the near side of the screen crack display GW and does not appear as if it were broken (as there is a missing portion).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 124C, the boundary character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, the character XG4 is displayed on the boundary between the screen crack display GW and the other display (hereinafter also referred to as non-screen crack display) on the display screen 7a. In the example of FIG. 124 (C), this boundary is located on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (D), boundary character appearance effects are executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, the character image XG5 is displayed at the boundary between the screen split display GW and the non-screen split display on the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 is displayed at a boundary different from that of the character XG4. In the example of FIG. 124 (D), this boundary is located on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 represents the character "super heat" which indicates that the jackpot expectation is high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (E), an effect effect is executed. In this effect effect, the effect image XG8 is displayed at the boundary between the screen split display GW and the non-screen split display. The effect image XG 8 moves in a fluidly moving boundary. The effect image XG8 may be continuously arranged around the boundary between the screen break display GW and the non-screen break display, or a portion around the boundary between the screen break display GW and the non-screen break display It may be arranged in the same manner.
Further, in this effect effect, the character image XG7 is displayed in the screen split display GW. This character image XG7 indicates that the characters "Oh !?" are displayed, and may indicate that it may be a jackpot. Furthermore, in the missing part character appearance effect, the character XG4 and the character image XG5 move in the boundary between the screen break display GW and the non-screen break display.
After this boundary portion character appearance effect, predetermined effects such as the above-described battle effect and super reach effect are executed.

In the above-mentioned split effects A to D, other effects (such as other split effects) may be incorporated as one effect.
In addition, in the above-described split effects A to D, a predetermined image (for example, a chance image or a character) other than the rush indication display XG1 and the obtained ball display XG2 is broken (lost) by the screen crack display GW ) May be displayed.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of a crack production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the crack effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying various images on the display screen 7a in the decorative symbol variation effect, the screen crack effect in which the screen crack display GW is displayed is executed. In this screen break effect, a part of the image such as the rush indication XG1, the winning ball display XG2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the holding icons 9B, 9C, etc. is displayed as a defect by the screen break display GW. According to this configuration, it is possible to display an image with a taste different from usual due to the defect display, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the above-mentioned split effects A to D, in the split screen effect, a part of the image including characters such as rush indication display XG1, acquired ball display XG2 and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed missing by the split screen display GW . According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by displaying an image with a different taste than usual due to the missing display of the image including characters.

[Effect 3]
In the above-mentioned split effects A to D, in the split screen effect, a part of the image including characters such as rush indication display XG1, acquired ball display XG2 and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and non-screen split display characters are included. A part other than the image is deficiently displayed by the split screen display GW. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by displaying an image with a different taste than usual due to the loss display of the part other than the image including the character including the character and the non-screen split display.

[Effect 4]
In the above-described split effects A to D, the character image XG5 is newly displayed at the border between the screen split display GW and the non-screen split display in the border character appearance rendering. According to this configuration, since a new character image is displayed at the boundary while displaying a defect, various displays can be made, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above-described split effects A to D, the character XG 4 is newly displayed at the border between the screen split display GW and the non-screen split display in the border character appearance rendering. According to this configuration, since a new character is displayed at the boundary while being deficiently displayed, various kinds of display can be made, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the crack effects B to D, the character XG 6 is newly displayed in the screen crack display GW in the defect portion character appearance effect. According to this configuration, since the character XG 6 is displayed in the split screen display GW, various displays can be made while being displayed in a missing state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a crack production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described split effects A to D, the boundary character appearance effect is performed after the boundary character appearance effect, but the boundary character appearance effect may be performed after the boundary character appearance effect.

[Modification 2]
In the above-described split effects A to D, the character XG 4 is displayed on the near side of the screen break display GW in the boundary character appearance effect, but the present invention is not limited thereto. May be displayed so as to be hidden by the screen break display GW.

[Modification 3]
In the above-described split effects A to D, the character image XG 5 is displayed on the near side of the screen break display GW in the boundary character appearance effect, but the present invention is not limited thereto. A part of the image XG5 may be displayed so as to be hidden by the split screen display GW.

[Modification 4]
The above-mentioned split effects A to D are executed in a definite change state (during rush (during continuous movement)) which is advantageous to the player, but the present invention is not limited thereto. May be performed. In this case, the broken screen display GW loses a predetermined image.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XG-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined display area,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a defect display to be displayed as if a part of the predetermined display area is lost,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect and the second display effect.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XG-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XG-1,
The predetermined display area has a character area including characters,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, an effect of displaying a part of the character area of the predetermined display area as a defect is performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XG-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XG-2,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, an effect is performed in which a part of the character area of the predetermined display area and a part of the predetermined display area other than the character area are displayed as a defect.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XG-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XG-3,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, at a first boundary portion between the defect display area in which the defect of the predetermined display area is displayed and the defect display area in which the defect of the predetermined display area is not displayed. An effect is made to make the characters appear anew
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XG-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XG-4,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, an effect of causing a character to newly appear at a second boundary between the defective display area of the predetermined display area and the non-defective display area is performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect XG-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect XG-5,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, an effect of causing a character to newly appear in the defect display area of the predetermined display area is performed.
A game machine characterized by

  The meter and button effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. The meter / button effect is an effect that can be executed in connection with the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “special symbol”). At the start of the change display of the special symbol, the start of the change effect of the decoration symbol, during the change effect of the decoration symbol, during the reach effect (super reach effect) and the like. More specifically, this meter / button effect displays a button image while displaying a meter image, and raises the meter value of the meter image in relation to the player's operation of the effect button, and the jackpot expectation is expected depending on the increase degree. It is an effect that suggests a degree.

[Meter, button effect A]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the meter / button effect A.
In the meter / button effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 125 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (B), reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect indicates that the left decoration symbol 8L and the right decoration symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decoration symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 125 (A). In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, during execution of the reach effect, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A including a plurality of memories and a meter area EM3A (hatched part shown in FIG. 125 (D) described later etc.). The meter area EM3A is for each memory in the meter frame EM2A. The movement represents the meter value. The meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape, and is disposed vertically on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 125C, on the display screen 7a, a button operation instruction effect is executed. The button operation instruction effect is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, and is switched to the reachable state decorative symbol shown in FIG. 125 (B), and the button image BOG is displayed. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, the character SIG of "continuous hit!" Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed at the left and right center of the display screen 7a. By this button operation instruction effect, the effect of the operation instruction to cause the player to depress and operate the effect button 63 is executed. In the button operation instruction effect, the meter image EM1A is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (D), a meter effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The meter effect is an effect of increasing the meter value of the meter image EM1A in relation to the player's operation of the effect button 63. Specifically, when the player starts the operation (continuous hitting) of the effect button 63 by the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 125 (C), on the display screen 7a, the button image BOG itself or the button image BOG A moving display object IH is generated from the periphery. The movement display object IH is generated each time the player operates the effect button 63 (for example, each time the production button 63 is pressed a predetermined number of times), and the generated movement display object IH has an afterimage like a fireball. The remaining moving indicator IH is moved in all directions while remaining, and some (or all) of the moving display objects IH finally generated reach the display area of the meter image EM1A so as to jump into the meter frame EM2A. In the meter image EM1A, the meter value (hatched portion) rises as the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A. That is, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter value rises by moving the meter area EM3A in the meter frame EM2A for each memory. Then, the degree of increase of the meter value suggests the jackpot expectation, that is, it indicates whether the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 125 (B) is the jackpot or the reach loss. In this example, it is shown that the meter value has risen by about 2/3. Further, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed at the bottom of the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross hatched portion) rises with the elapsed time since the button operation instruction effect is displayed, and the meter value will be removed when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 disappears. Is displayed to be full.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 125E, a jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot suggestion effect is the meter effect shown in FIG. 125 (D), and it is shown that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is full as a result of the player operating the effect button 63. That is, in this jackpot suggestion rendering, it is suggested that the result of the reach rendering shown in FIG. 125 (B) becomes a jackpot because the meter value is full. In the jackpot suggestion effect, a character MGL MAX (indicating a jackpot) indicating that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is full is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character MGL indicating this MAX, it is possible to make the player foresee a big hit.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (F), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the reach effect (the change) shown in FIG. 125 (B) is a jackpot. Here, this jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, in place of the jackpot suggestion effect shown in FIG. 125 (E), the loss suggestion effect shown in FIG. 125 (G) may be executed. As a result of the player operating the effect button 63 in the meter effect shown in FIG. 125 (D), this lost suggestion effect effect is that the meter value of the meter image EM1A becomes full as shown in FIG. 125 (G). When it happens. In this example, it is shown that the meter value has risen by about 3/4. That is, in this loss suggestion effect, it is suggested that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 125 (B) is a loss (reach loss) by the fact that the meter value is not full. In the loss suggestion effect, a character MLL LOSE indicating that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is not full (indicating a loss) is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character MLL "LOSE", it is possible to make the player not to be a big hit.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (H), on the display screen 7a, a lost symbol stop effect is executed. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the result of the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 125 (A) is lost (reach lost) after reaching the reach in FIG. 125 (B) . In this example, the lost symbol arrangement "757" is shown.

[Meter, button effect B]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the meter / button effect B.
In the meter / button effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 126 (A), the decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 126 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (B), reach effect is performed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect indicates that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 126 (A). In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "8 ↓ 8". In addition, when this reach symbol arrangement is “8 8 8”, when it becomes big hit symbol arrangement “888”, it is the symbol arrangement which usually becomes big hit, with usually big hit, after the big hit game end, fluctuation count of special symbol The gaming state is in the low probability time short state (low probability high base state) until 100 times are performed, and thereafter the low probability low base state (normal state).
Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, during execution of the reach effect, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A including a plurality of memories and a meter area EM3A (hatched portion shown in FIG. 126 (D) described later), and the meter area EM3A is for each memory in the meter frame EM2A. The movement represents the meter value. The meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape, and is disposed vertically on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126C, on the display screen 7a, a button operation instruction effect is executed. This button operation instruction effect is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, and is switched to the decorative symbol in the reach state shown in FIG. 126 (B), and the button image BOG is displayed. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, the character SIG of "continuous hit!" Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed at the left and right center of the display screen 7a. By this button operation instruction effect, the effect of the operation instruction to cause the player to depress and operate the effect button 63 is executed. In the button operation instruction effect, the meter image EM1A is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (D), a meter effect is performed on the display screen 7a. The meter effect is an effect of increasing the meter value of the meter image EM1A in relation to the player's operation of the effect button 63. Specifically, when the player starts the operation (continuous hitting) of the effect button 63 by the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 126 (C), on the display screen 7a, from the button image BOG itself or from the button image BOG A moving display object IH is generated from the periphery. The movement display object IH is generated each time the player operates the effect button 63 (for example, each time the production button 63 is pressed a predetermined number of times), and the generated movement display object IH has an afterimage like a fireball. The remaining moving indicator IH is moved in all directions while remaining, and some (or all) of the moving display objects IH finally generated reach the display area of the meter image EM1A so as to jump into the meter frame EM2A. In the meter image EM1A, the meter value (hatched portion) rises as the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A. That is, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter value rises by moving the meter area EM3A in the meter frame EM2A for each memory. Then, the degree of increase in the meter value indicates the jackpot expectation, that is, it indicates whether the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 126 (B) will be the jackpot or the reach loss. In this example, it is shown that the meter value has risen by about 2/3. Also, the meter value (hatched portion) shown in FIG. 126 (D) is displayed, for example, in blue.
Further, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed at the bottom of the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross hatched portion) rises with the elapsed time since the button operation instruction effect is displayed, and the meter value will be removed when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 disappears. Is displayed to be full.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126E, on the display screen 7a, a probability variation jackpot indication effect is executed. This probability variation jackpot indication effect is the meter effect shown in FIG. 126 (D), which indicates that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is full as a result of the player operating the effect button 63. That is, in this probability variation jackpot indication production, it is suggested that the result of the reach production shown in FIG. 126 (B) will be a jackpot because the meter value is full. Here, the color of the meter value (cross hatched portion) shown in FIG. 126 (E) is expected from blue shown in FIG. 126 (D) to have a higher expectation than blue (a benefit advantageous over blue is given) (High probability) is displayed, for example, changing to red. That is, in this probability variation jackpot indication production, the color of the meter value has changed from blue to red, and the reach symbol array “8 ↓ 8” that usually becomes a big hit in the reach production shown in FIG. 126 (B) is shown In spite of that, it suggests that the result will be a definite jackpot. In addition, the probability variation big hit is a big hit that becomes high probability time short state (high probability high base state) until the gaming state next big hit after the end of the big hit game. That is, in this probability variation jackpot indication production, it is suggested that the probability variation jackpot will be due to the meter value becoming full and the color of the meter value changing from blue to red. In the probability variation jackpot indication effect, a character MGL MAX (indicating a jackpot) indicating that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is full is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character MGL indicating this MAX, it is possible to make the player foresee a big hit.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (F), a normal jackpot symbol temporary stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The normal jackpot symbol temporary stop effect indicates that the result of the reach effect (the change) shown in FIG. 126 (B) has been temporarily stopped at the normal jackpot symbol. That is, in this normal jackpot symbol temporary stop production, "888" as the jackpot symbol array is not completely stopped normally, and the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R swing slightly (2, 3 frames) up and down. It is in the temporary stop state. In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (G), the full rotation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this all-round effect, in a state where "888" as a normal big hit symbol array that has been temporarily stopped in the normal big hit symbol temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 126 (F) is synchronized with each decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R. As shown by the arrow YA, the player performs an effect of scrolling at a low speed so that the player can visually recognize. Therefore, in the full rotation effect, only the jackpot symbol array is sequentially displayed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126H, on the display screen 7a, a probability variation jackpot determination effect is executed. In this definite variation big hit determination effect, as a result of all the rotation effects shown in FIG. 126 (G), it is shown that "777" as the definite variation large hit symbol arrangement has decidedly stopped and has made a big hit. That is, the normal jackpot symbol once stopped is promoted to a probability variable jackpot symbol by all the rotation effects. In the upper part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "probably big hit-!" Are displayed. The player is convinced that the jackpot is a jackpot by the jackpot determination effect.

[Meter, button effect C]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for describing the meter / button effect C.
In the meter / button effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 127 (A), the decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 127 (A), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are moving (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (B), reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect indicates that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 127 (A). In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, during execution of the reach effect, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A having a plurality of memories and a meter area EM3A (hatched part shown in FIG. 127 (D) described later etc.). The meter area EM3A is for each memory in the meter frame EM2A. The movement represents the meter value. The meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape, and is disposed vertically on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (C), on the display screen 7a, a button operation instruction effect is executed. This button operation instruction effect is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, and is switched to the decorative symbol in the reach state shown in FIG. 127 (B), and the button image BOG is displayed. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, the character SIG of "continuous hit!" Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed at the left and right center of the display screen 7a. By this button operation instruction effect, the effect of the operation instruction to cause the player to depress and operate the effect button 63 is executed. In the button operation instruction effect, the meter image EM1A is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (D), meter effects are executed on the display screen 7a. The meter effect is an effect of increasing the meter value of the meter image EM1A in relation to the player's operation of the effect button 63. Specifically, when the player starts the operation (continuous hitting) of the effect button 63 by the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 127 (C), the button image BOG itself or the button image BOG is displayed on the display screen 7a. A moving display object IH is generated from the periphery. The moving display object IH is generated each time the player operates the effect button 63 (for example, each time the effect button 63 is pressed a predetermined number of times), and the generated moving display object IH has an afterimage like a fireball. The remaining moving indicator IH is moved in all directions while remaining, and some (or all) of the moving display objects IH finally generated reach the display area of the meter image EM1A so as to jump into the meter frame EM2A. In the meter image EM1A, the meter value (hatched portion) rises as the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A. That is, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter value rises by moving the meter area EM3A in the meter frame EM2A for each memory. Then, the degree of increase of the meter value suggests the jackpot expectation, that is, indicates whether the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 127 (B) is the jackpot or the reach loss. In this example, it is shown that the meter value has risen by about 2/3. Further, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed at the bottom of the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross hatched portion) rises with the elapsed time since the button operation instruction effect is displayed, and the meter value will be removed when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 disappears. Is displayed to be full.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (E), a loss suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of the player operating the effect button 63 in the meter effect shown in FIG. 127 (D), this lost suggestion effect effect is that the meter value of the meter image EM1A becomes full as shown in FIG. 127 (E). When it happens. In this example, it is shown that the meter value has risen by about 3/4. That is, in this loss suggestion effect, it is suggested that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 127 (B) is a loss (reach loss) because the meter value is not full. In the loss suggestion effect, a character MLL LOSE indicating that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is not full (indicating a loss) is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character MLL "LOSE", it is possible to make the player not to be a big hit.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (F), on the display screen 7a, the lost symbol temporary stop effect is executed. This lost symbol temporary stop effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 127 (A) has been temporarily stopped with the lost symbol after reaching the reach in FIG. 127 (B) ing. That is, in this lost symbol temporary stop effect, the lost symbol array “757” is not completely stopped, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are slightly stopped (two or three frames) up and down and temporarily stopped It has become.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (G), on the display screen 7a, a resurrection product presentation is executed. In this resurrection product effect, the second movable character 15 located at the home location in a state where the lost symbol array “757” is temporarily stopped in the lost symbol temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 127 (F) ( 1) advances on the display screen 7a to the central advance position. In the state where the second movable character 15 has advanced to the central advanced position, the second movable character 15 is a part of "7" of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R and the decorative symbol 8C in the lost symbol array "757". It covers all of "5" invisibly. However, "7" of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R is partially covered in a readable manner so that the player can be seen as "7" from the uncovered portion. With this resurrection feature presentation, the player foresees that he will revive from a loss to a big hit.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (H), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalization effect was temporarily stopped in the lost symbol array “757” when the second movable character 15 retreats from the center advancing position to the home position as a result of the resurrection character effect shown in FIG. 127 (G) The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed to the jackpot symbol array “777”, which indicates that the determination has been stopped. That is, the lost symbol which has once stopped changes to a big hit symbol by the resurrection character effect. In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot.

[Meter, button effect D]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the meter / button effect D.
In the meter / button effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 128A, a short time (power support) start effect to be performed when the big hit game is over is executed. In this time start effect, in the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the characters "Time Short Start!" Is displayed at the center, and below the word "Time Short Start!", The player is urged to hit the right. The right-handed arrow YAR is displayed. In the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR, the characters "right-handed" are displayed. The player is prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR and right-handed, the game ball is played in the second starting opening 21 (power support) where the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and easy to win. It can be done. Then, when the gaming ball wins in the second starting opening 21, on the display screen 7a, variation effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R synchronized with the variation display of the second special symbol in the time saving state are executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (B), reach effect is performed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the game ball wins in the second starting opening 21 in a short time state, and the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in the reach symbol arrangement It shows how to do it. In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. In the decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol is in the right symbol display area. 8R is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 128 (B), it is shown that the decorative symbol 8CR is in motion (scrolling downward).
Further, during execution of the reach effect, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A having a plurality of memories and a meter area EM3A (hatched portion shown in FIG. 128 (D) described later etc.). The meter area EM3A is for each memory in the meter frame EM2A. The movement represents the meter value. The meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape, and is disposed vertically on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (C), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle effect is switched to the decorative symbol in the reach state shown in FIG. 128 (B), and an image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed. Here, in this battle effect, it is shown that the ally character CRA makes a first strike against the enemy character CRB. That is, in this battle rendition, the character that made the first strike attack is to win in the battle, that is, it suggests the character that the first strike will win. Therefore, in this battle rendition, it is suggested that the ally character CRA wins in the battle. Further, in the battle effect, in the meter value of the meter image EM1A, the meter value (hatched portion) increases when the teammate character CRA becomes dominant. Then, the degree of increase of the meter value suggests the jackpot expectation, that is, it indicates whether the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 128 (B) will be the jackpot or the reach loss. In this example, it is shown that the meter value has risen by about 2/3.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (D), a jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB in the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (C), the ally character CRA wins, and the meter value of the meter image EM1A becomes full. Is shown. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the meter value becomes full. And in this jackpot suggestion production, it is suggested that the result of the reach production shown in FIG. 125 (B) will be a jackpot because the meter value is full. At the center of the display screen 7a, a character "winning!" Indicating that the teammate character CRA has won is displayed together with the teammate character CRA. It is possible to make the player think that it will be a jackpot (the player is given an advantageous benefit) by displaying the character "winning!" And the meter value being full.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (E), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot finalization effect indicates that the result of the reach effect (the change) shown in FIG. 128 (B) is a big hit. Here, this jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, in place of the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (C), the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (F) may be executed. This battle effect is switched to the decorative symbol in the reach state shown in FIG. 128 (B), and an image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed. Here, in this battle effect, it is shown that the enemy character CRB makes a first strike against the teammate character CRA. That is, in this battle rendition, the character that made the first strike attack is to win in the battle, that is, it suggests the character that the first strike will win. Therefore, in this battle effect, it is suggested that the enemy character CRB wins in the battle. Further, in the battle effect, in the meter value of the meter image EM1A, the meter value (hatched portion) increases when the teammate character CRA becomes dominant. Then, the degree of increase of the meter value suggests the jackpot expectation, that is, it indicates whether the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 128 (B) will be the jackpot or the reach loss. In this example, it is shown that the meter value has risen by about 1/3. That is, in the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (F), it can be known from the increase degree of the meter value that the enemy character CRB is more dominant in the battle than the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (C).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (G), on the display screen 7a, a button operation instruction effect is executed. This button operation instruction effect is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, and is switched to an image in which the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle as shown in FIG. 128 (F), and the button image BOG Is displayed. This button operation instruction effect is an effect which is performed only when the enemy character CRB makes a first strike, as in the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (F). Therefore, as in the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (C), when the teammate character CRA makes a first strike, as described above, FIG. 128 (D) follows the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (C). The jackpot suggestion effect shown in) is executed. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, the character SIG "continuous hit!" Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed at the left and right center of the display screen 7a. By this button operation instruction effect, the effect of the operation instruction to cause the player to depress and operate the effect button 63 is executed. In the button operation instruction effect, the meter image EM1A is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (H), a meter effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The meter effect is an effect of increasing the meter value of the meter image EM1A in relation to the player's operation of the effect button 63. This meter effect is also an effect performed only when the enemy character CRB makes a first strike. Specifically, this meter effect is displayed on the display screen 7a from the button image BOG itself, or when the player starts the operation (continuous hitting) of the effect button 63 by the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 128 (G). A moving display object IH is generated around the button image BOG. The moving display object IH is generated each time the player operates the effect button 63 (for example, each time the effect button 63 is pressed a predetermined number of times), and the generated moving display object IH has an afterimage like a fireball. The remaining moving indicator IH is moved in all directions while remaining, and some (or all) of the moving display objects IH finally generated reach the display area of the meter image EM1A so as to jump into the meter frame EM2A. In the meter image EM1A, the meter value (hatched portion) rises as the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A. That is, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter value rises by moving the meter area EM3A in the meter frame EM2A for each memory. In this example, it is shown that the meter value rises from about 1/3 to about 2/3 shown in FIG. 128 (G). Further, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed at the bottom of the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross hatched portion) rises with the elapsed time since the button operation instruction effect is displayed, and the meter value will be removed when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 disappears. Is displayed to be full. Then, when this meter effect is finished, effects similar to the effects shown in FIG. 125 (E) to (H) described above are performed thereafter, but the description here is omitted.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effects of meter and button effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, the button image is displayed while the meter image is displayed, and the meter value of the meter image is increased in relation to the player's operation of the presentation button. It is configured to indicate the jackpot expectation degree by the increase degree of the meter value. (For example, if the meter value rises to full, it is suggested that the jackpot is determined (the higher the meter value, the more advantageous the advantage is given to the player). According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to technically intervene in order to raise the meter value as instructed by the effect button. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125 to FIG. 128, the movement display object is generated from the button image or from the periphery of the button image in relation to the player's operation of the presentation button. The meter value is configured to rise by the movement indicator reaching the display area of the meter image. According to this configuration, the meter value increases when the moving display object reaches the display area of the meter image, so that the player is at a loss as to whether the moving display object reaches the display area of the meter image. Become. In addition, visual effects can be produced with high effects. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, the movement display object is configured to be generated each time the player operates the effect button. According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to technically intervene by operating the rendering button more frequently (in a row) to generate more movement indicators and raise the meter value. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, a battle effect is produced in which the player-side ally character and the enemy character fight against each other while the meter image is displayed. It is configured to fill up the meter value of the meter image without indicating the image and indicate the jackpot determination. According to this configuration, the player is satisfied with the movement of the ally character in the battle rendition, and pays attention to the battle rendition with great interest in whether or not the ally character wins. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, when the display mode (color) of the meter value changes, the result is obtained even though the reach symbol arrangement that usually makes a big hit is shown. Is configured to be suggested to be a jackpot probability. According to this configuration, the player looks at the meter image with great interest in whether the display mode (color) of the meter value changes. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, in the state where the lost symbol array is displayed, when a predetermined character advances so as to cover a part of the lost symbol array invisibly. The lost symbol array being displayed is configured to change to the jackpot symbol array when the character is retracted from the advanced position, that is, when the symbol array is in a completely visible state. According to this configuration, with the lost symbol array being displayed, the player gazes with great interest in whether or not the prize is moved. In particular, when the lost symbol array is a reach lost symbol array and the character covers the part of the reach lost symbol array so as not to be visible, if the same symbol forming the reach is covered in a readable manner, the game People can be more strongly foreshadowed to be a big hit. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of meter and button production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing while the reach effect is being performed. At the same time as the establishment of, or before or after the establishment of reach. Moreover, although it was comprised so that a reach might not be displayed with a decorative symbol at the time of a reach, you may make it display this small on both corners etc. of a display screen.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, it is suggested that a jackpot will be reached when the meter value is full, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, even if the meter value is not full, or when the meter value is equal to or more than a predetermined value, it may be suggested that a jackpot will occur.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, when the color of the meter value changes, it is suggested that the probability change jackpot will be made, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, not only the color but also the form and size of the meter value, etc., may indicate that the probability variation jackpot will occur if the display mode changes. In addition, not only the probability variation jackpot but other benefits may be suggested. Furthermore, an image (for example, MAX) of a character or the like displayed together with the meter image when the color of the meter value changes may be changed to the same color as the meter value. Furthermore, the timing at which the color of the meter value changes is arbitrary. For example, it may be changed while the meter value is rising, or when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button becomes a predetermined time or less. It may be changed, or may be changed when the meter value increases by a predetermined value or more, or may be changed when the meter value is full.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, after temporary stop with the lost symbol, the lost symbol changes to the big hit symbol (resurrection) by moving the character, but the present invention It is not limited to this. For example, after temporarily stopping with a lost symbol, it may be changed (revived) to a big hit symbol by re-variation (pseudo link). Alternatively, it may be changed (revived) to a jackpot symbol when a predetermined image such as a cut-in is displayed after temporarily stopping with the lost symbol.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, in the battle effect, the first strike character is made to win the battle, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a character that has issued a predetermined skill may win in a battle, or a character that has issued a skill continuously may win in a battle. Alternatively, the character that fights back after defending the triggered technique may be made to win in the battle. That is, any character that has performed a predetermined mode may win the battle.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, in the button operation instruction effect, the player is made to continuously hit the effect button, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the instruction content of the button operation may be determined in association with the type of the ally character appearing in the battle effect (for example, when the ally character is A, it is a continuous hit, when it is B, etc.). Further, the player may be allowed to perform a plurality of types of button operations. For example, a plurality of button operation instructions such as continuous hit, long press, and one hit may be performed by one button operation instruction effect.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect F5-1]
Production means capable of executing multiple effects,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
An effect button operable by the player,
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
The first display is a display of a meter image,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The second display is a display of a button image,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
In the first effect, the button image is displayed while the meter image is displayed, and the meter value of the meter image is increased in relation to the player's operation of the effect button, and the increase degree of the meter value is increased. Suggest a big hit expectation by
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect F5-2]
In the first effect, a moving display object is generated from the button image or from the periphery of the button image in relation to the player's operation of the effect button, and the meter value of the meter image is the moving display object Rises by reaching the display area of the meter image,
The gaming machine according to aspect F5-1, characterized in that
[Aspect F5-3]
The movement indicator is generated each time the player operates the effect button.
The gaming machine according to aspect F5-2, characterized in that
[Aspect F5-4]
If the meter value of the previous meter image is full, it suggests a jackpot confirmation,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F5-1 to F5-3, characterized in that
[Aspect F5-5]
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
In the second effect, a battle effect in which an ally character on the player's side and an enemy character fight against each other is displayed while the meter image is displayed, and the button image is displayed when the ally character wins. Instead of filling the meter value of the previous meter image and suggesting a jackpot confirmation,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F5-1 to F5-4, characterized in that
[Other modifications]
The various display effects described above may include a configuration that does not include part of the effects or effects other than those described above.

  Although the gaming machine 1 of the said embodiment mentioned and demonstrated the pachinko gaming machine as an example, it is not restricted to this. For example, the present invention may be applied to a rotary machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a ball game machine in place of a pachinko machine. When the gaming machine 1 is used as a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, although the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit for the player to operate, the invention is not limited thereto, and a lever, a trigger or the like may be used as an operation unit for the player . Moreover, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead, the display effect is performed using the image representing the sword member 64. The display effect may be performed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

  Although the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine which does not have a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed type gaming machine.

  Moreover, you may combine two or more presentation examples and / or a modification among several presentation examples and / or a modification which were mentioned above. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may have a sub display device in addition to the image display device 7. In this case, the display effect described above may be performed by the sub display device.

  As mentioned above, although this aspect was demonstrated based on embodiment and a modification, embodiment of the above-mentioned aspect is for making an understanding of this aspect easy, and does not limit this aspect. The present embodiment can be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and the scope of the claims, and the present embodiment includes the equivalents thereof.

1 ... gaming machine 3 ... gaming area 7 ... image display device 9A, 9B ... pending image (pending icon)
9C ... concerned pending image (pending icon)
14 ... 1st movable role thing 15 ... 2nd movable role thing 18 ... 3rd movable role thing 20 ... 1st starting opening (1st ball entrance)
21 ... 2nd starting opening (2nd ball entry)
81 ... microcomputer for game control 91 ... microcomputer for effect control 101 ... microcomputer for image control

Claims (5)

Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects;
Symbol display means capable of displaying variable display of symbols;
A jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game when the symbol variably displayed by the symbol display means is a jackpot symbol,
Time-saving game changing means for changing the gaming state after the jackpot game executed by the jackpot game execution means to a time-saving game,
A gaming machine equipped with
In the time saving game, there is a low probability time and a short probability that the probability of becoming the big win is the first normal probability, and a high probability time and a short that the second probability is higher than the first probability,
When the short time game is over, in the low probability time short, the gaming state becomes a low probability low base normal state, and in the high probability time short, the gaming state hides a probability change that is apparently difficult to distinguish from the normal state It becomes a high probability low base latent certainty state,
The display means can execute a first effect display as one of the plurality of effect displays.
The first effect display performs a game state suggestive effect that indicates whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent probability change state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied after the short time game ends.
A game machine characterized by The establishment of the predetermined condition is when the variable display of the symbol is performed a predetermined number of times by the symbol display means,
The display means can execute a second effect display as one effect display among the plurality of effect displays,
The second effect display performs a countdown display for each fluctuation of the symbol until the fluctuation display of the symbol reaches a predetermined number of times after the time saving game is ended.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that. The display means can execute a third effect display as one of the plurality of effect displays.
The third effect display is an effect display that displays a specific image that changes according to the effect mode,
The gaming state suggestion effect suggests whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent probability state by differentiating the display mode of the specific image between when the gaming state is the normal state and when the latent state is the latent state. ,
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that. The display means can execute a fourth effect display as one of the plurality of effect displays.
The fourth effect display is an effect display performed during the execution of the big hit game by the big hit game execution means, and displays a plurality of selection images that indicate the gaming state after the big hit game, and the plurality of selected images Suggesting the degree of expectation of gaming state after the jackpot game by the selected image selected from among,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that: Equipped with an effect button that can be operated by the player,
The display means can execute a fifth effect display as one of the plurality of effect displays.
The fifth effect display is an effect display performed during the execution of the big hit game by the big hit game execution means, and displays a plurality of characters selectable by the player, and the character selected from among the plurality of characters Depending on the operation of the effect button performs different button effects, suggesting the gaming state after the jackpot game after the end of the button effect,
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that.

Images